2013 4 29 ROSEMARY BEACH PROJECT MANUAL.pdf

PROJECT MANUAL 

ROSEMARY BEACH OWNERS CENTER 

Rosemary Beach, FL. 

PROJECT NO. 12041 

APRIL 26,2013 

DAG ARCHITECTS INC. 

1223 Airport Road, Destin, Florida 32541 

Telephone: 850.837.8152 Fax: 850.654.4276 

www.dagarchitects.com

DAG Architects Inc. 

12041 Rosemary Beach Pavilion 

Rosemary Beach, FL 

This page intentionally left blank.


12041 Rosemary Beach Pavilion 


PROJECT MANUAL 

SECTION / TITLE 

DIVISION 00 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID 

00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

00 41 00 BID FORM 

00 42 00 PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME STATEMENT 

00 42 50 DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE CERTIFICATION 

00 52 00 AGREEMENT FORMS 

00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 

00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 

00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 

00 73 80 WEATHER DELAY LOG 

SPECIFICATIONS 

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

01 11 00 PRODUCT EVALUATION AND APPROVAL 

01 23 00 ALTERNATES 

01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 

01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 

01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 

01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 

01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

01 42 00 REFERENCES 

01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 

01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

01 73 00 EXECUTION 

01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 

DIVISIONS 03 - CONCRETE 

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

03 38 16 UNBONDED POST TENSIONING 

03 41 00 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 

DIVISIONS 04 – MASONRY 

04 20 00 CONCRETE MASONRY 

04 72 00 CAST STONE 

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1/4


12041 Rosemary Owners Center 



DIVISION 05 – METALS 

05 40 00 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 

05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 

06 15 16 WOOD ROOF DECKING 

06 15 33 WOOD STAGE DECKING 

06 16 00 SHEATHING 

06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 

06 48 00 WOOD DOOR FRAMES 

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 

07 42 13.23 FORMED METAL COMPOSITE PANELS 

07 54 19 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING 

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 

08 12 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 

08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 

08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 

08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 

08 80 00 GLAZING 

08 90 00 LOUVERS & VENTS 

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 

09 22 16 NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 

09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING 

09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 

09 30 00 TILING 

09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 

10 21 13.17 PHENOLIC CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 

10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES 

10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 

10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 

11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS 

14 21 00 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVAYORS 






DIVISION 21 

21 13 13 BUILDING SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEM 

DIVISION 22 

22 01 00 PLUMBING GENERAL 

22 05 23 VALVES 

22 05 48 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 

22 05 56 ACCESS DOORS 

22 05 59 TESTING, CLEANING AND STERILIZATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS 

22 05 63 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 

22 07 00 INSULATION FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING 

22 11 13 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 

22 11 16 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS 

22 11 19 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

22 13 16 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM 

22 14 00 STORM WATER SYSTEM 

22 16 00 GAS SYSTEM 

22 30 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 

DIVISION 23 

23 01 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL 

23 05 20 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS 

23 05 21 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

23 05 29 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 

23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 

23 05 93 TESTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 

23 07 13 EXTERIOR INSULATION FOR DUCTWORK 

23 31 13 HVAC METAL DUCTWORK 

23 33 00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 

23 34 00 FANS 

23 37 13 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 

23 37 26 WALL LOUVERS 

23 81 43 AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 

23 81 46 WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMPS 

DIVISION 26 

26 05 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 

26 05 23 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS AND SLEEVES 

26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

26 09 33 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS 

26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 

26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 

26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

26 43 13 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 

26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 

26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 






DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 

31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 


DAG Architects Inc 

12041 ROSEMARY BEACH OWNERS CENTER 

ROSEMARY BEACH, FLORIDA 

SECTION 00 11 16 - INVITATION TO BID 

PROJECT 

Rosemary Beach Owners Center 

Rosemary Beach, Florida 

LOCATION 


OWNER 



ARCHITECT 

DAG Architects, Inc. 

1223 Airport Road 

Destin, Florida 32541 

Telephone: 850.837.8152 

Fax: 850.654.4276 

Civil Engineer 

Preble-Rish Consulting Engineers 

324 Marina Drive 

Port St. Joe, Florida 32456 

Telephone: 850.277.7200 

Fax : 850.227.7215 

Contact: Chance Powell (powellc@preble-rish.com) 

Structural Engineer 

Anderson Engineers 

78 Ricker Ave. 

Santa Rosa Beach, Florida 32459 

Telephone: 850.231.4540 

Contact: Terry Anderson (terry@andersonengineers.net. 

Plumbing/Mechanical 

David Watford, PE 

Engineering Inc. 

4471 Clinton St. 

Marianna, FL 32446 

Telephone: 850.526.3447 

Contact: David Watford (david@watford-engineering.com) 

Electrical Engineer 

Humber-Garick Consulting Engineers 

207 Ferry Road SE 

Fort Walton Beach, Florida 

Telephone: 850.243.6723 

Fax: 850.664.5420 

Contact: Chris Garick (cgarick@h-gce.com) 

INVITATION TO BID 00 11 16 - 1




Contractors for Rosemary Beach Amphitheater are invited to bid on a General Contract, including New 

Construction for an Owners Center at Rosemary Beach, Florida. All bids must be on a lump-sum basis; 

segregated bids will not be accepted. All items and conditions below are a part of this request, and no bid 

will be accepted unless all these conditions have been complied with. 

Rosemary Beach Owners Center will receive sealed bids until 3:00pm Monday May 20, 2013. Bids may be 

hand delivered to DAG Architects Office Destin, Florida. Please note on the exterior of the envelope “Bid 

Enclosed, “Rosemary Beach Owners Center” Bid”. Bids may also be sent electronically to Roger Godwin, 

AIA, DAG Architects. rgodwin@dagarchitects.com. 

A Prebid Meeting is scheduled at the Project site for Monday May6, 2013. Architect to establish time at later 

date. 

Bids received after that time will not be accepted. All Bids will be opened privately. 

ACCESS TO BIDDING DOCUMENTS 

Copies of the Bidding documents will be available at the Architect’s Office and will be emailed to the 3 

selected General Contractors. 

DAG Architects, Inc. 

1223 Airport Road 

Destin, Florida 32541 

(850) 837-8152 

And at F.W. Dodge Corporation, 1311 Executive Center, Suite 108, Tallahassee, Florida. 

And at F.W. Dodge Corporation, 201 South “F” Street, Pensacola, Florida 

CONTRACT SECURITY 

Successful Bidder will be required to furnish a “performance bond” and “labor and material payment bond” in 

the amount of 100% of his contract amount. 

PROCUREMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 

General Contractors may obtain complete sets of Bidding Documents by reserving through the Bidder 

Contact at DAG Architect’s office. General Contractors will be provided documents specs and drawings in 

electronic format, pdf files on CD. 

Bidders shall use complete set of Bidding Documents in preparing bids; neither the Owner nor the Architect 

assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets. 

Bids will be opened privately and the contractors will be notified at a later date. 

In accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, each bid must include: 

1. Bid Form 

2. Bid Security 

3. List of Subcontractors 

4. Florida Public Entity Crimes statement. 

5. Drug-Free Workplace certification 

6. Additional Requirements per Section Instructions To Bidders, 00 21 13, 1.22, Qualifications, Staffing 

Outline, and Construction Schedule. 





RIGHTS RESERVED BY OWNER 

The owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any irregularities in bidding, or to 

accept the lowest responsible proposal that in the opinion of the owner will serve the best interest of the 

owner. The owner will not be obligated to accept the lowest proposal. The owner further reserves the right 

to approve all subcontractors. 

WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS 

No proposals may be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days after the receipt of proposals. 

END OF INVITATION TO BID 

“LEFT BLANK” 








ROSEMARY BEACH, FL. 

SECTION 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. The Drawings and Project Manual cover new construction for the Rosemary Beach Owners 

Center, Rosemary Beach, Florida. 

1.2 PROCUREMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 

A. Invited General Contractors will be provided electronic files in pdf format. These files will be 

emailed by way of a download service. 

1.3 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SITE 

A. Prior to submitting a Bid, each bidder shall carefully examine the Bidding Documents. Each 

bidder shall fully inform him/herself prior to bidding as to all limitations under which the work is 

to be performed and shall include in his/her bid a sum to cover the costs of all items necessary 

to perform that work as set forth in the Contract Documents. 

B. Bidders are encouraged to visit the construction site at Rosemary Beach, Florida. 

C. No allowance will be made to any Bidder because of lack of such examination or knowledge. 

The submission of a Bid will be construed as conclusive evidence that the Bidder has made such 

an examination. 

1.4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 

A. The Bidder shall carefully examine and compare the Bidding Documents, site and local 

conditions with each other and no later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids, 

make a written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any errors, 

ambiguities or inconsistencies found during his examination. 

B. Interpretations, corrections and change to the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. 

Addendums will be mailed, faxed or emailed to each Bidder of record. The Architect and the 

Owner will not be responsible for interpretations, corrections or changes made in any other 

manner, and the Bidder shall not rely on them 

C. Any item, material, condition, service, etc. that may be alluded to in the drawings or 

specifications, and that is not clearly understood by the bidder as to the Architects intent, shall 

be clarified by the bidder prior to the Bid. Failure to clarify any ambiguity shall not relieve the 

bidder from supplying the intent of the Architect as part of the base contract. 

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS (Prior to bidding) 

A. Substitutions will be considered prior to receipt of Bids only if a written request for approval is 

submitted to the Architect no later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each 

request shall include a complete description of the proposed substitution, along with drawings, 

performance and test data, any other information required for a complete evaluation. The 

Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval will be final. If the Architect approves the 

proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in addenda. Bidders shall not rely on 

approvals made in any other manner. 

B. Substitutions will be considered after the Contract award only if they are in compliance with the 

conditions set in Division 1 Section “Product Requirements.” 

C. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 -1




1.6 FAMILIARITY WITH LAWS 

A. The Bidder shall be familiar with all Federal, State and local laws, ordinances, rules and 

regulations affecting the Work including all requirements of the Rosemary Beach Community. . 

Ignorance of them on the part of Bidder shall in no way relieve the Bidder from responsibility. 

1.7 FLORIDA PRODUCTS AND LABORS 

A. The Bidder’s attention is called to Section 255.04 of the Florida Statutes which requires that on 

public building contracts, Florida products and labor shall be used for public building contracts 

whenever price and quality are the same as products and labor specified. 

1.8 TIME OF COMPLETION 

A. The Owner request you provide a Staffing and Construction Schedule with your proposal. 

1.9 PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS 

A. All bids shall be submitted on a lump sum basis; segregated Bids will not be accepted. Each 

bidder shall copy the Bid Form in duplicate on to the Bidder’s letterhead and indicate the Bid 

price, Alternate prices and other required information in the proper spaces. Any interlineations, 

alterations, and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. Bids containing any 

conditions or irregularities of any kind may be rejected by the Owner. All bids must be 

submitted on the form provided by the Owner and must be signed by an authorized 

representative of the company placing the bid. 

B. Submit the Bid forms, List of Subcontractors, Bid Security, Florida Public Entity Crime Statement 

and Drug-Free Workplace Certification in a sealed opaque envelope addressed to the Owner 

and identified with the project name and the Bidder’s name and address. It is the sole 

responsibility of the Bidder to see that the bid is received on time. 

C. Disclosure Requirement (Florida Statues, Chapter 112): Each bid is subject to the provisions of 

Florida Statutes, Chapter 112, providing that all bidders must disclose with the bid submittal the 

name of any officer, director or agent who is also a public officer or an employee of the Beach 

Community Bank. Further, all bidders must disclose the name of any City officer or employee 

who owns, directly or indirectly, an interest of five percent or more in the bidding firm. 

1.10 LISTING OF SUBCONTRACTORS 

A. In order that the Owner may be assured that only qualified and competent subcontractors will 

be employed on this project, each Bidder shall submit with his/her proposal a list of the 

subcontractors who will perform the work for each division of the specifications, as indicated by 

the “List of Subcontractors” form contained in these specifications. The bidder shall have 

determined to his/her own complete satisfaction that a listed subcontractor has been 

successfully engaged this particular type of business for a reasonable length of time, has 

successfully completed installations comparable to that which is required by this agreement and 

is qualified both technically and financially to perform that pertinent phase of work for which he 

is listed. Only one subcontractor shall be listed for each phase of work. 

B. It is also specified in a Division 1 Section that, in addition to foregoing, The Owner reserves the 

right to approve all subcontractors before work is started and that a complete list of all 

subcontractors shall be submitted. 

1.11 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 





A. More than one bid from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation or association under the 

same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that the 

bidder is interested in more than one bid for the same work will cause rejection of all bids in 

which such Bidder is believed to be interested. Bids will be rejected if there is reason to believe 

that collusion exists between Bidders. Bids in which the price is obviously unbalanced may be 

rejected. 

1.12 OPENING OF BIDS 

A. Bids will be opened privately. Contractor will be notified at a later time. 

1.13 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 

A. A submitted Bid may be substituted, replaced or withdrawn in its entirety, prior to the date and 

time designated for receipt of Bids, by notifying the party receiving the Bids at the place 

designated for receipt of Bids. Notification shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder. 

Such notification shall be received by the end of the business day prior to the day designated to 

receive bids. 

1.14 EVALUATION AND CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 

A. It is the intent of the Owner to award the Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided 

the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and 

does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities or 

irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid, which in the Owner's judgment, is in the 

best interest of the Owner. 

B. The Owner reserves the right to award to other than the lowest responsible bidder if sufficient 

reasons exist that a bidder other than the lowest is more responsive. If the bid is not awarded 

to the lowest bidder, a full and complete statement of the reasons for awarding the contract 

otherwise shall be prepared by the Owner and filed with documents relating to the bid award. 

1.15 REJECTION OF BIDS 

A. The Owner reserves the right to waive minor defects in the process, to reject any or all Bids 

when such rejection is in the best interest of the Owner, to reject a Bid not accompanied by a 

Bid Security, or to reject a bid if not in the best interest of the Owner, or to reject a Bid, which 

is in any way irregular or incomplete. 

1.16 OWNER’S FINANCIAL CAPACITY 

A. The Owner shall furnish evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the 

Owner's obligations under the Contract to the Bidder under consideration for award of Contract, 

if requested, no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of bids. 

If reasonable evidence is not furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the 

Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor. 

1.17 SUBMITTAL 

A. The Bidder shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing a designation of work to 

be done by his own forces, names of the manufacturers, products and suppliers of principal 

items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the work, names of persons or 

entities proposed for the principal portions of the work. 





B. Prior to award of the Contract the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner 

or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any person or entity 

proposed by the Bidder. The Bidder may, at his option, withdraw his bid or submit a substitute 

with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the cost occasioned by the 

substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted price or disqualify the Bidder. In either 

event the bid security will not be forfeited. 

C. Persons and entities proposed for the work of which the Owner and the Architect have No 

objection shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and the Architect. 

1.18 BID BOND 

A. The Bidder shall furnish a Bid Bond for not less than 5% of the Base Bid sum, nor more than 

$10,000.00 payable to the Owner, must be attached to the bid. Bid Bond shall be on bonds in 

this State, have power-of-attorney attached, and be dated within 15 days of date of opening. 

Bid Bonds of three lowest bidders will be retained until Contract and Bonds are properly 

executed by the successful bidder; all others will be returned upon request immediately after 

tabulation and checking of bids. The Bid Security shall insure that the bidder will enter into a 

contract with the Owner and will furnish the specified Performance and Payment Bonds and 

evidence of insurance within 10 days after presentation to him of a contract draft, provided 

such presentation is made within 90 days of the Bid Date. The monies represented by the Bid 

Security (limited to the difference to the next lower bid) shall be forfeited to the Owner as 

proper compensation for any damage resulting from a default of this condition. 

1.19 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 

A. The Bidder shall execute and deliver to Owner a Performance Bond and a Labor and Materials 

Payment Bond with a surety insurer authorized to do business in this state as a surety, each in 

the amount of 100% of the Contract Sum in accordance with the General Conditions and 

Supplementary Conditions. Before commencing the work, Bidder shall be required to record 

the bonds in the public records of Walton County. 

1.20 COST BREAKDOWN 

A. The successful bidder will be required to submit, at the start of the job, and prior to the first 

application for payment, a breakdown of construction costs (Schedule of Values), itemized, to 

be used for accounting purposes. 

1.21 OWNERS RIGHTS 

A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids when such rejection is in the best interest 

of the Owner, to reject a Bid not accompanied by a Bid Security, to reject a Bid which is in any 

way irregular or incomplete, or to withdraw the request for Bids. 

1.22 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. The owner request that each bidder provide the following information in a sealed package 

separate from the Bid: 

1. Submit your qualifications for this project describing similar types of project completed 

listing building user contact information if owner desires to contact them. 

2. Submit staffing outline for the project including Superintendents, project managers, etc., 

by name identifying, experience, and time with company. 

3. Submit Construction Schedule for the project. 

END OF SECTION 00 21 13 



10059 ROSEMARY BEACH AMPHITHEATER 

ROSEMARY, FL. 

SECTION 00 41 00 - BID FORM 

Bidders Name: 

Legal Address: 

Telephone No.: 

Proposal For: 

Project Name: 

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION WORK 

Rosemary Beach Owners Center, Rosemary Beach, Florida 

DAG Project No.: 12041 

Gentlemen: 

I have received the Bidding Documents, consisting of Drawings and Project Manual, entitled Rosemary 

Beach Amphitheater, as prepared by DAG Architects Inc., 1223 Airport Road, Destin, Florida 32541. I have 

also received Addenda numbers ____________________ and have included their provisions in my Bid. I 

have examined both the Bidding Documents and the site and submit the following bid. 

In submitting the Bid, I agree: 

1. To hold my Bid in full force and effect for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the date of the 

opening of this Bid. 

2. To enter into and execute a Contract within fifteen (15) calendar days after said Contract is 

delivered to me, if awarded said Contract on the basis of this Bid, and to furnish Performance Bonds 

and Labor and Material Payment Bonds in accordance with the General Conditions. 

3. To accomplish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and to commence such work on 

or before the date to be specified by the Architect in the written “Notice to Proceed” and to 

substantially complete the Project as stated in the Staffing and Construction Schedule I submit with 

this Proposal. 

I will construct this Project (Base Bid) for the lump sum price as listed: 

Base Bid 

Dollars 

($ ), which amount includes the following addenda: 

ALTERNATE NO 1: Bocce Ball Courts 

Add/Deduct:___________________________________________________dollars ($__________________). 

ALTERNATE NO 2: Dog Park 


ALTERNATE NO 3: Greenwall 


ALTERNATE NO 4:Sliding Doors 


BID FORM 00 41 00 - 1


10059 ROSEMARY BEACH AMPHITHEATER 

ROSEMARY, FL. 

The undersigned hereby agrees to complete the work as stated in the attached Staffing and Construction 

Schedule I submitted with this proposal. 

Florida Construction Industries Licensing Board Certification: 

________________________________ 

(Name of Holder) 

_______________________ 

(Certificate No.) 

FIRM: __________________________________________________________ 

(Name of Firm) 

BY: 

__________________________________________________________ 

(Signature of Bidder) 

__________________________________________________________ 

(Name of Bidder) 

TITLE: __________________________________________________________ 

(Title of Bidder) 

DATE: __________________________________________________________ 

ATTACHMENTS: 

Bid Form 

List of Subcontractors 

Bid Bond. 

Public Entity Crime Statement 

Drug-Free Workplace Certificate 

Additional Requirements per Instructions To Bidders, 00 21 13, 1.22, Qualifications, Staffing Outline, and 

Construction Schedule. 


BID FORM 00 41 00 - 2


12041 Rosemary Beach Owners Center 

Rosemary Beach Fl. 

SECTION 00 42 00 - PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES STATEMENT 

A. The following information is included in these bid documents as required by Florida 

Statute. 

B. All invitations to bid as defined by Section 287.012(11), Florida Statutes; requests for 

proposals as defined by Section 287.012(16), Florida Statutes; and any contract 

document described by Section 287.058, Florida Statutes, shall contain a statement 

informing persons of the provisions of paragraph (2)(a) of Section 287.133, Florida 

Statutes. 

C. A copy of the Sworn Statement form is contained herein. The completed form shall be 

submitted in the bid submittal along with the other required documents. 

PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES STATEMENT 00 42 00 - 1




SWORN STATEMENT UNDER SECTION 287.133 (3) (A) 

FLORIDA STATUES, ON PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES 

THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED IN THE PRESENCE OF A NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICER 

AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATHS. 

1. This sworn statement is submitted with Bid, Proposal or Contract for 

2. This sworn statement is submitted by 

whose business address is 

and (if applicable) Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) is 

(If the entity has no 

FEIN, include the Social Security Number of the individual signing this sworn statement: 

3. My name is and my relationship to the entity named above is 

4. I understand that a "public entity crime" as defined in Paragraph 287.133 (1) (g). Florida 

Statutes, means a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to and directly related 

to the transaction of business with any public entity or with an agency or political subdivision of any 

other state or with the United States, including, but not limited to, any bid or contract for goods or 

services to be provided to any public entity or any agency or political subdivision of any other state or of 

the United States and involving antitrust, fraud, theft, bribery, collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or 

material misrepresentation. 

5. I understand that "convicted" or "convicted" as defined in paragraph 287.133 (1) (b), Florida 

Statutes, means a finding of guilt or a conviction of a public entity crime with or without an adjudication 

of guilt, in any federal or state trial court of records relating to charges brought by indictment or 

information after July 1, 1989, as a result of a jury verdict, non-jury trial, or entry of a plea of guilty or 

nolo contendere. 

6. I understand that an "affiliate" as defined in Paragraph 287 .133 (1) (a), Florida Statutes, 

means: 

1. A predecessor or successor of a person convicted of a public entity crime; or 

2. An entity under the control of any natural person who is active in the management of 

the entity and who has been convicted of a public entity crime. The term " affiliate" includes those 

officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active 

in the management of an affiliate. The ownership by one of shares constituting a controlling income 

among persons when not for fair interest in another person, or a pooling of equipment or income 

among persons when not for fair market value under an length agreement, shall be a prima facie case 

that one person controls another person. A person who knowingly convicted of a public entity crime, in 

Florida during the preceding 36 months shall be considered an affiliate. 

7. I understand that a "person" as defined in paragraph 287 .133 (1) (e), Florida Statutes, means 

any natural person or entity organized under the laws of the state or of the United States with the legal 

power to enter into a binding contract provision of goods or services let by a public entity, or which 

otherwise transacts or applies to transact business with a public entity. The term "person" includes 

those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are 

active in management of an entity. 





8. Based on information and belief, the statement which I have marked below is true in relation to 

the entity submitting this sworn statement. (Please indicate which statement applies) 

Neither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any officers, directors, 

executive, partners, shareholders, employees. member, or agents who are active in management of the 

entity, nor affiliate of the entity have been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime 

subsequent to July 1, 1989. 

The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers, directors, 

executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in management of 

the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime 

subsequent to July 1, 1989 And (please attach a copy of the final order) 

The person or affiliate was placed on the convicted vendor list. There has been a 

subsequent proceeding before a hearing officer of the State of Florida, Division of Administrative 

Hearings. The final order entered by the hearing officer determined that it was in public interest to 

remove the person or affiliate from the convicted vendor list. (please attach a copy of the final order.) 

The person or affiliate has not been placed on the convicted vendor list. (Please 

describe any action taken by, or pending with, the department of General Services.) 

STATE OF FLORIDA 

COUNTY OF 

(Signature) 

Date: 

PERSONALLY APPEARED BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, 

who, after first being sworn by me, affixed his/her signature at the space provided above on this 

day of , 20 , and is personally known to me, or has provided _ as 

identification. 

My Commission expires: 

Notary Public 











SECTION 00 42 50 – DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE CERTIFICATION 1-3-2013 

A. A copy of the Drug-Free Certification form is contained herein. The completed form 

must be submitted in the bid submittal along with the other required documents. 





DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE CERTIFICATION 

The below signed bidder certifies that it has implemented a Drug-Free Workplace Program. In order to 

have a Drug-Free Workplace Program, a business shall: 

1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, 

possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that 

will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 

2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of 

maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling rehabilitation and employee assistance 

programs and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 

3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under 

proposal a copy of the statement specified in subsection 1. 

4. In the statement specified in subsection 1., notify the employees that, as a condition of working 

on the commodities or contractual services that are under proposal, the employee will abide by the terms 

of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, 

any violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) working days after such conviction. 

5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in drug abuse assistance or 

rehabilitation program of such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is 

convicted. 

6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of 

this section. 

As the person authorized to sign this statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above Drug- 

Free Workplace requirements. 

DATE: _____________________________ 

COMPANY: ________________________________________________________ 

ADDRESS: ________________________________________________________ 

CITY: _______________________ STATE: ____ ZIP CODE: _________ 

TELEPHONE: __________________ 

SIGNATURE: __________________________________ NAME 

(PRINTED):____________________________ 

TITLE: ________________________________________ 

ND OF SECTION 00 42 50 





SECTION 00 52 00 – AGREEMENT FORMS 

The “Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment is a 

Stipulated Sum,” The American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A101-1997, 1997 Edition, Six (6) 

Pages, is reference only. Document shall be issued, as modified, on this Project as the Agreement Form. 

Copy upon request. 

AGREEMENT FORM 00 52 00 - 1





AGREEMENT FORM 00 52 00 - 2

DAG Architects 



SECTION 00 61 13 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 

A. The "Performance Bond and Payment Bond", The American Institute of Architects' (AIA) 

Document A312, March 1987 Edition, Seven (7) pages, is reference only. The 

documents shall be used on this Project as the Performance Bond and Payment Bond. 

Copies upon request. 


PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 00 61 13 -1





PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 00 61 13 -2




SECTION 00 72 00 – GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 

CONSTRUCTION 

The “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”, the American Institute of Architects (AIA) 

Document A201-1997, Fifteenth Edition, 1997, forty (40) pages, is referenced only. 

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00 72 00 - 1





GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00 72 00 - 2




SECTION 00 73 00 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 

CONSTRUCTION A201-1997 

PART 1 – STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 

A. The “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction” of the American Institute of 

Architects, AIA Document No. A201-1997, inclusive, is a part of this Contract, it is incorporated 

herein. 

B. Additional copies of the “General Conditions” may be purchased from the Florida Association, 

The American Institute of Architects, Document Department, P. O. Box 10388, Tallahassee, 

Florida, 32302. 

C. The Contractor is hereby specifically directed, as a condition of the Contract, to acquaint himself 

with the Articles contained therein and to notify and appraise all Subcontractors, Suppliers and 

any other parties of the Contract or individuals or agencies engaged in the work as to its 

contents. 

D. No contractual adjustments shall be due or become exigent as a result of, or failure on the part 

of the Contractor to fully acquaint himself and all other parties to the contract with the 

conditions of Document A201. 

PART 2 – SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 

The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for 

Construction", AIA Document A201, Fifteenth Edition 1997. Where a portion of the General Conditions is 

modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions 

shall remain in effect. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, 

Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of 

that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect. 

ARTICLE 1; GENERAL PROVISIONS 

1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

Add the following Subparagraph 1.2.1.1 to 1.2: 

1.2.1.1 In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be 

based on the following priorities: 

1. The Agreement. 

2. Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date. 

3. The Supplementary Conditions. 

4. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 

5. Drawings and Specifications. 

In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified 

by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the 

Architect’s interpretation. 

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00 73 00 -1




ARTICLE 2; OWNER 

2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 

Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 and substitute the following: 

2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished Construction Documents (Drawings and Project Manuals) returned 

to the Architects office and PDF,s for the reproduction as required for construction of this project. 

All copies are the responsibility of the contractor. 

ARTICLE 3; CONTRACTOR 

3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOUCMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 

Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 3.2.2: 

Prior to commencing any excavation or grading, the Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of all 

survey data as indicated in these Drawings and Specifications and/or as provided by Owner. Should the 

Contactor discover any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions in the survey data, the Contractor shall immediately 

notify the Architect in order that proper adjustments can be anticipated and ordered. 

Add the following Subparagraphs 3.2.4, 3.2.5, 3.2.6, and 3.2.7, to 3.2 

3.2.4 If, in Contractor’s opinion, any work is indicated on Drawings, or is specified in such as manner as 

will make it impossible to produce a generally acceptable piece of work, or should discrepancies 

appear between drawings and specifications, he shall refer it to Architect for decision before 

proceeding with Work. 

3.2.5 If Contractor fails to make such reference, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to 

carry our work in satisfactory manner. Should a conflict occur in or between Drawings or 

Specifications, Contractor shall be deemed to have estimated on a more expensive way of doing 

work unless he shall have asked for and obtained a decision, in writing, from Architect before 

submission of proposal as to which method or materials will be required. 

3.2.6 Figures govern scale dimensions and large scale drawings govern those of smaller scale. If 

drawings and specifications conflict or require any clarification that was not obtained prior to 

bidding, the Contractor shall estimate and include in his bid the more expensive method or material. 

No deviation shall be made from plans and specifications except upon written order of the 

Architect. 

3.2.7 Contractor shall, within fifteen (15) days after signing of Contract, file with the Architect, a correct, 

complete itemized schedule of materials and subdivisions of work, giving quantities and unit prices 

of complete labor and materials. 

3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 

Add the following Subparagraphs 3.3.4, 3.3.5, 3.3.6, 3.3.7, and 3.3.8 to 3.3: 

3.3.4 The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces, construction plans and equipment, and shall work such 

hours, including night shifts and overtime operation, as may be necessary to insure the execution of 

the Work in accordance with the approved progress schedule. If the Contractor falls behind the 





progress schedule, the Contractor shall take such steps as may be necessary to improve the 

progress by increasing the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work and the amount of 

construction plans, all without additional cost to the Owner. 

3.3.5 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the 

Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of 

the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the 

Contractor. 

3.3.6 The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces, construction plant and equipment, and shall work such 

hours, including night shifts and overtime operations, as may be necessary to insure the prosecution 

of the Work in accordance with the approved progress schedule. If the Contractor falls behind the 

progress schedule, the Contractor shall take such steps as may be necessary to improve the 

progress by increasing the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work and the amount of 

construction plant, all without additional cost to the Owner. 

3.3.7 Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements under this provision shall be grounds for 

determination by the Architect that the Contractor is not executing the Work with such diligence as 

will insure completion within the time specified and such failure may constitute a substantial 

violation of the conditions of the Agreement. 

3.3.8 Upon such determination, the Owner may terminate the Contractor’s right to proceed with the 

Work, or any separable part thereof, in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions, or may 

with hold further payments as indicated in Article 9.5.1 also of the General Conditions. 

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 

Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.4, 3.4.5, 3.4.6 and 3.4.7 to 3.4: 

3.4.4 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for 

the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the 

General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications), Section “Product Requirements.”. 

3.4.5 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor: 

1. Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product 

and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; 

2. Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the 

Contractor would for that specified; 

3. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this 

Contract, including the Architect's or Engineer’s redesign costs, and waives all claims for 

additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and 

4. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be 

required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 

3.4.6 The Contractor shall follow all specified and manufacturer’s standards for Delivery, Storage and 

Handling of all products. All products that require storage in a climate-controlled environment shall 

be so handled. In all cases the more stringent guidelines shall be followed. 

3.4.7 The Contractor shall follow all specified and manufacturers instructions and conditions for installation 





of all products and finishes. 

3.5 WARRANTY 

ADD THE FOLLOWING SUBPARAGRAPHS 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 to 3.5 

3.5.2 The warranty provided in this paragraph shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other 

warranty or remedy required by law or by the Contract Documents. 

3.5.3 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with written warranties covering the work for the periods of 

time specified in the Contract Documents. As a minimum the work will be guaranteed against 

defects in materials and workmanship for one year from the date of final acceptance of the project 

by the Owner with all mechanical equipment compressors guaranteed for five years from the date of 

final acceptance. The date of final acceptance shall be the beginning date of all warranties (see 

Article 8). 

3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 

ADD THE FOLLOWING SUBPARAGRAPHS 3.7.5 TO 3.7: 

3.7.5 The Contractor shall meet the latest requirements of the United States Department of Labor 

Occupational Safety and Health Standards and comply with The Manual of Acident Prevention in 

Construction, all applicable safety and sanitary laws, regulations, and ordinances and any safety 

rules or procedures. 

3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 


3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ and keep at the site of the work during its progress a competent and 

thoroughly experienced superintendent capable of handling all phases of the project. The 

Superintendent shall have any necessary assistants, foremen and timekeepers required by the scope 

of this project, and shall be acceptable to the Architect, and shall not be changed or transferred 

unless approved by the Architect, or ceases to be in the employ of the Contractor. If the Contractor 

must replace the Superintendent for any reason between “Notice-to-Proceed” and final Architect’s 

certification of completion of the work, then the Contractor shall notify Architect that the existing 

Superintendent will be leaving the job on a specific date and that all job work shall cease after said 

date until a satisfactory replacement Superintendent is found, acceptable to the Architect, and 

physically present on the site, properly authorized and briefed by Contractor. 

Add the following Subparagraphs 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.9.4, 3.9.5, 3.9.6 and 3.9.7 to 3.9: 

3.9.2 The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in the Contractor’s absence and all directions 

given to the Superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Major and important 

directions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on 

written request in each case. 

3.9.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Architect the name and resume of the proposed Superintendent 

for the Contractor at the preconstruction conference to allow investigation by Architect. 





3.9.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s 

employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions 

of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. 

3.9.5 The Contractor shall submit to the Architect the name of the proposed superintendent for the 

Contractor at the Pre-Construction Conference. The superintendent shall attend the Pre- 

Construction Conference and all Progress Meetings. 

3.9.6 The Superintendent will remain on the job until punch list items are corrected. 

3.9.7 The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work, using the best skill and attention. The 

Contractor shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications and other instructions and 

shall report at once to the Architect any error, inconsistency or omission which is discovered but 

shall not be held responsible for their existence or discovery. The Superintendent shall be in 

attendance on the job a minimum of six (6) hours per working day from “Notice to Proceed” 

continuously through final approval of the work by the Architect. No work shall be allowed to 

transpire on the site unless the Superintendent is in attendance at the site. 

3.10 CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 

3.10.4 The contractor shall furnish, not later than 7 days of date established for commencement of work, a 

bar-chart schedule showing the expected times of completion of the various stages of work on this 

project. The work headings therein shall correspond generally with the headings listed in the 

Contractor’s Schedule of Values. During progress of the work the Contractor shall enter on the 

schedule the actual progress at the end of each month, and shall deliver two (2) copies to the 

Architect along with the Contractor’s pay request. Contractor’s pay request will not be processed 

until receipt and review of monthly updated bar-chart schedule. 

3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 

Add the following Subparagraph 3.11.2 to 3.11: 

3.11.2 Copy of Toxic Substance List submitted by both the Contractor and Subcontractors to the Owner, 

must be kept at the site during the duration of construction. 

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 

Add the following Subparagraphs 3.12.11, 3.12.12 and 3.12.13 to 3.12: 

3.12.11 Shop Drawings and samples shall be dated and contain the following: name of project; project 

number; description or names of equipment, materials and items; and complete identification of 

locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed. If the shop drawings do not conform 

completely to the requirements of the Contract Documents, such nonconformance shall be 

specifically noted on the face of the drawings. Refer to Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures.” 

3.12.12 Submission of Shop Drawings and samples shall be accompanied by transmittal letter, containing 

project name, Contractor’s name, number of drawings and samples, titles and other pertinent data. 

3.12.13 Unless otherwise specified, the number of Shop Drawings and the number of Samples which the 

Contractor shall submit and, if necessary , resubmit, is the number that the Contractor requires to 

be retained for the Contractor’s use plus 2, which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. 

3.13 USE OF SITE 

Add the following Subparagraphs 3.13.2 to 3.13: 





3.13.2 Contractor shall access the Project site from roadways, right-of-ways, easements or temporary 

roadways as authorized by the Owner and shall limit construction traffic from residential areas by 

utilizing through streets within commercial districts. Use of multiple project site access points shall 

be at the discretion of the Owner. 

The Contractor shall present a plan, for approval by the Architect and Owner, showing all areas for 

safety fencing staging, storage, job office, ingress and egress to the site. No work shall be done 

until this is approved. 

3.15 CLEANING UP 


3.15.1 Keep interior of the building and keep the area around the building free of stored or unattended 

combustible materials. 

3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 

Delete Subparagraph 3.18.1 and substitute with the following: 

3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall, for the sum of ten dollars ($10.00) and 

other good and valuable consideration paid by the Owner and the Architect/Engineer individually, 

receipt hereby acknowledged by the Contractor, Indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the 

Architect/Engineer and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses 

and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees arising out of or resulting from the 

performance of the Work provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense: (1) is attributable 

to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property other 

than the Work itself, including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (2) is caused in whole or in 

part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or 

indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of 

whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be 

construed to negate, abridge or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which 

would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. 


3.18.2 The indemnification which the Contractor and Subcontractors are to provide under Paragraph 3.18 

shall include, extend and insure to and be for the benefit of the Owner, Architect, their respective 

agents, and employees of any of them, and shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the 

amount of type of damage, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any 

Subcontractor under Worker’s Compensation or Employer’s Liability Acts, disability acts, employee 

benefit acts or other legislation or rule of law, whether legislative, judicial, administrative or common 

law. 

ARTICLE 4; ADMINSTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 

4.01 ARCHITECT 

Add the following subparagraphs 4.1.4 to 4.1: 

4.1.4 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the 





Architect and the Contractor. 

ARTICLE 5; SUBCONTRACTORS 

5.3 SUBCONTRACTURAL RELATIONS 

Add the following subparagraph 5.3.2 to 5.3: 

5.3.2 The Subcontractor agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to indemnify, save harmless and 

defend the Contractor, Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, their respective agents, and 

employees of any of them harmless from any liability for damages to any person or property upon, 

or at, or about the project, that may arise as a result of or in connection with the work hereunder, 

provided, however, that the Subcontractor shall not be required to indemnify the Contractor against 

the Contractor's sole negligence; and the Subcontractor agrees to procure at his own expense, 

before the commencement of the work comprehensive general liability including contractor's 

protective liability insurance, completed operations and contractual liability insurance and 

automobile liability insurance, including the ownership, maintenance, and operation of any 

automotive equipment owned, hired and non-owned for the benefit of the Contractor and Owner, in 

the sum of Two Hundred Fifty Thousand ($250,000.00) Dollars for damages resulting to one person 

and Five Hundred Thousand ($500,000.00) Dollars for damages to persons resulting from one 

casualty, and Two Hundred Fifty Thousand ($250,000.00) Dollars for damages to property arising 

out of each casualty, and an aggregate of not less than Five Hundred Thousand ($500,000.00) 

Dollars for damages to property, and to keep such insurance in force until the construction of the 

project is fully completed, and to immediately and before commencing work deliver such policy or 

policies or certificates of such insurance to the Contractor. 

ARTICLE 7; CHANGES IN THE WORK 

7.2 CHANGES IN THE WORK 

Add the following Subparagraph 7.2.3, 7.2.4, 7.2.5, 7.2.6, 7.2.7 and 7.2.8 to 7.2: 

7.2.3 The Contractor is responsible for all affected work that is a result of a Change Order. All changes 

required as a result of a Change Order should be reflected in the price of the Change Order. Any 

associated additional work that becomes evident after the Change Order has been signed will be 

made at the Contractor’s expense. 

7.2.4 When any one change increases or decreases the scope of the original contract, the proposal to 

change shall be supported by accurate cost data establishing the fair and current market valve of 

the labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to accomplish the change, plus a margin to 

represent the contractor’s profit and overhead. Cost data shall be in sufficient detail to enable the 

Architect or Engineer to confirm the accuracy of such proposal. Profit and overhead shall be added 

to additive change orders and shall be deducted on deductive change orders. No deduction shall be 

made for profit and overhead on deductive change orders in connection with Direct Material 

Purchases. 

7.2.5 Cost shall be limited to the following: Cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery, cost 

of labor, including Social Security, Old Age and Unemployment Insurance; Worker’s Compensation 

Insurance; rental value of power tools and equipment. Overhead shall include the following: Bond 

premiums, supervision, superintendence, wages of timekeepers, watchmen and clerks, small tools, 

incidentals, general office expense and all other expenses not included in “cost.” If the net value of 

a change results in a credit from the Contractor or Subcontractor, the credit given shall be the net 





cost plus overhead and profit except for Direct Material Purchase items. The cost as used herein 

shall include all items of labor, materials and equipment. 

7.2.6 The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for damages or cost including loss of profits, loss of 

use, overhead expenses, equipment rental, etc. on account of hindrances or delays from any cause 

whatsoever. If the hindrance or delay is caused by any act of God, or by any act or omission on the 

part of the Owner, Owner’s agents, or governmental agencies having jurisdiction, such act, 

hindrance, or delay may entitle the Contractor to an extension of time only in which to complete the 

work which shall be determined by the Architect and approved by the Board, provided that the 

Contractor will give written notice as provided herein of the cause of such act, hindrance, or delay. 

7.2.7 Should concealed conditions encountered in the performance of the work below the surface of the 

ground be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents be encountered, the 

Contract Sum shall be equitable adjusted by Change Order upon claim by either party made within 

five days after the first observance of the conditions. 

7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 

Delete first sentences of Subparagraph 7.3.6 and substitute the following: 

7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the 

Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of 

reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, 

including, incase of an increase in the Contract Sum, an allowance for overhead and profit in 

accordance with Clauses 7.3.10.1 through 7.3.10.6. 

Delete Subparagraph 7.3.6.5 and substitute the following: 

7.3.6.5 Cost of supervision and field personnel may be allowed when a contract time extension is allowed, 

which is directly attributed to the change. 

Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.6.6 to 7.3: 

7.3.6.6 Overhead shall include small tools, incidentals, general office and field office expenses, estimating, 

data entry and all other expenses not included in “cost.” 

Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.10 to 7.3 

7.3.10 Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit in the total cost to the 

Owner shall be based on the following schedule: 

.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, a maximum of 

fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. 





.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractor, a maximum of 

seven and one-half percent (7-1/2%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. 

.3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that 

Subcontractor’s or Sub-subcontractor’s own forces, a maximum of fifteen percent (15%) of 

the cost. 

.4 For each Subcontractor for work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub-subcontractors, a 

maximum of seven and one-half percent (7-1/2%) of the amount due the Subsubcontractors. 

.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with 

Subparagraph 7.3.6. 

.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those 

so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a 

complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and subcontracts. Labor and 

materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are 

subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a charge over $100.00 be 

approved without such itemization. 

ARTICLE 8; TIME 

8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 

Add the following Subparagraph 8.2.4 and 8.2.5 to 8.2: 

8.2.4 The work to be performed under the Contractor’s Base Proposal as defined in the Contract 

Documents shall be substantially completed by ________________________. 

8.2.5 Failure to complete the Project within the time fixed in this Agreement will result in substantial injury 

to the Owner, and as damages arising from such failure cannot be calculated with any degree of 

certainty, according to the definition of “ Substantial Completion” in Subparagraph 9.8.1 of the 

General Conditions, within the time fixed or within such further time, if any, as maybe authorized in 

accordance with Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as Liquidated Damages 

for such delay, and not as a penalty, $500.00 for each and every calendar day elapsing between the 

date fixed for Substantial Completion and the date such Substantial Completion shall bee fully 

accomplished. It is also hereby agreed that if after thirty (30) Calendar days after Substantial 

Completion this Project is not fully and finally completed in accordance with the requirements of the 

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as Liquidated Damages, and not as a 

penalty, for such delay, 1/4 of the rate previously indicated. These Liquidated Damages shall be 

payable in addition to any expenses or costs payable by the Contractor to the Owner under the 

provision of the Contract Document and shall not exclude the recovery of damages of te Owner 

under the Contract Documents. 

This provision of Liquidated Damages for delay shall in no manner affect the Owner’s right to 

terminate the Contract. The Owner’s exercise of the right to terminate shall not release the 

Contactor from his obligation to pay Liquidated Damages. 

It is further agreed that the Owner may deduct from the balance of the Contract Sum held by the 

Owner the Liquidated Damages stipulated herein or such portions, as said balance will cover. 

8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 

Add the following Clause 8.3.1.1 to Subparagraph 8.3.1: 





8.3.1.1 Extension of Time 

Extensions on all additions will be granted only to such conditions are in excess of the average for that 

period and also that the weather actually affects operations. 


Extension of time requests due to adverse weather shall be submitted within twenty (20) days after adverse 

weather. The Contractor shall submit the referenced climatologically summary data immediately upon its 

availability and shall show how the time extension request corresponds with the climatological data. 

Extension of contract time due to adverse weather shall be for “time only” and will not be the basis of any 

monetary claim or request for “extended general conditions.” Refer to Section 00 73 80 “Weather Delay 

Log” 

Add the following subparagraphs 8.3.4, 8.3.5, 8.3.6, 8.3.7, 8.3.8, 8.3.9 and 8.3.10 to 8.3: 

8.3.4 The Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect 

may determine and as approved by the Owner. 

8.3.5 All Claims for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Architect no more than seven days 

after the Occurrence of the delay; otherwise they shall be waived. In the case of a continuing delay 

only one claim is necessary. 

8.3.6 It is mutually agreed between the parties that time is of the essence of this contract, and that there 

will be, on the part of the Owner considerable monetary damage in the event the work is not 

completed within the time fixed for completion in the Contract or within the time to which such 

completion may have been extended. 

8.3.7 The amount per calendar day set forth herein for each day that said Contract is not completed is 

hereby agreed upon as the liquidated damages for each and every calendar day that the time 

consumed in completing the work under the contract exceeds that time allowed therefore. 

8.3.8 The amount shall, in no event, be considered as a penalty or otherwise than as liquidated and 

adjusted damages to the Owner of the said Project, and the Contractor and his sureties shall be 

liable therefore. 

8.3.9 The Contractor agrees to make no claim for damages for delay in the performance of the contract 

occasioned by any act or omission of the Owner or any of its agents or representatives, or because 

of any injunction which may be brought against the Owner and agrees that any such claim shall be 

fully compensated for by an extension of time to complete performance of the Work as provided 

herein. 

8.3.10 No extension of time beyond the date of completion fixed by terms of the Contract shall be effective 

unless in writing, submitted to the Architect, and approved by Owner. The determination made by 

the Owner on an application for an extension of time shall be binding and conclusive on the 

Contractor. 

ARTICLE 9; PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 





9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

Add the following subparagraph 9.3.1.4 to 9.3: 

9.3.1.4 The full Contract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the Work and its 

progress do not remain satisfactory to the Architect (or if the Surety withholds its consent), or for 

other good and sufficient reasons. 

9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 

Add the following paragraphs: 

9.4.3 The Architect shall certify a payment of ninety percent (90%) of the value of the Work and materials 

as above noted according to his best judgment of the correct amount. 

9.4.4 On these monthly certificates, ten percent (10%) of the total of the estimated work for that month 

shall be retained until completion and acceptance of the job. 

9.4.5 Upon substantial completion of the job, the Architect may issue a semi-final certificate covering 

payment up to ninety percent (90%) of the Contract Sum less any reserves to cover any incomplete 

items. 

9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 

Add the following article to 9.7: 

9.7.2 PAYMENTS TO SUBCONTRACTORS 

9.7.2.1 If the Architect fails to issue a Certificate for Payment for any cause which is the fault of the 

Contractor and not the fault of a particular Subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay that 

Subcontractor on demand, made at any time after the Certificate for Payment should otherwise 

have been issued for his work to the extent completed, less the retained percentage. 

9.7.2.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received by the 

Contractor under Article 11, and he shall require each Subcontractor to make payments to his 

subcontractors. 

9.7.2.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding 

percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by 

the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 

9.7.2.4 Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any obligation to pay or to see the payments of any 

moneys to any Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by Florida Statutes. Payment to 

material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.7.2.1, 2, 

and 3. 

10.6 EMERGENCIES 





ADD THE FOLLOWING SUBPARAGRAPH 10.6.2 TO 10.6: 

10.6.2 The Contractor shall provide at the site, and make available to all workers, medical supplies and 

equipment necessary to supply first aid service to all persons injured in connection with the work. 

The Contractor shall report any and all accidents in writing to Insurance Company, Owner and 

Architect within twenty-four (24) hours of the occurrence. The report shall contain the following 

information and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have an accident report filled out in 

triplicate and submitted as required above with (1) Name of Person or Persons and Home Address, 

(2) Location of Occurrence, (3) Time of Day and Date, (4) Description of Occurrence, (5) Statements 

of Witnesses and (6) Signature of Contractor’s Superintendent. In addition, if death or serious 

injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be reported immediately by telephone or 

messenger. If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or any Subcontractor on account 

of any accident, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Owner, giving full 

details of the Claims. 

ARTICLE 11; INSURANCES AND BONDS 

11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 


11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to 

do business in the State of Florida such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth 

below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations under the Contract and for 

which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a 

Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose 

acts any of them may be liable. All insurance policies shall be issued and countersigned by 

representatives of such companies duly authorized for the State of Florida and shall be written on 

ISO standard forms or their equivalents. The Contractor shall provide the ISO Commercial General 

Liability policy for general liability coverage. All liability policies shall provide that the Owner is a 

named additional insured as to the operations of the Contractor under the Agreement and shall 

provide for the Severability of Insureds Provision. The Owner shall be exempt from, and in no way 

liable for, any sums of money, which may represent a deductible in any insurance policy. The 

payment of such deductible shall be the responsibility solely of the Contractor and/or Subcontractor 

providing such insurance. The insurance shall protect the Contractor from the following claims: 

.1 claims under workers’ or workmen compensation, disability benefit and other similar 

employee benefit acts, which are applicable to the Work to be performed; 

.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of 

the Contractor’s employees; 

.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person 

other than the Contractor’s employees; 

.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage including claims, 

which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to 

employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by another person; 

.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of 

tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; 





.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damages arising 

out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and 

.7 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations 

under Paragraph 3.18. 


11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of $250,000 

per person, $500,000 per occurrence or a minimum of $500,000 combined single limit. Coverages, 

whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption 

from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any 

coverage required to be maintained after final payment. The insurance required by Subparagraph 

11.1.1 shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under 

Paragraph 3.18 and coverage for the “XCU” exposure. 

.1 Worker’s Compensation: The Contractor shall secure and maintain for the life of this 

Agreement, valid Worker’s Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 440, Florida 

Statutes. Copies of the insurance policy shall be filed with the Owner no later than 60 days 

after execution of the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 

.2 Automobile Liability: The Contractor shall secure and maintain, during the life of this 

Agreement, Automobile Liability insurance on all vehicles against bodily injury and property 

damage in at least the amounts of $100,000 per person, $300,000 per occurrence, and 

property damages in at least the amount of $100,000; or combined single limit of $300,000 

for bodily injury and property damage. 


11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to 

commencement of the Work. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this 

Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be 

cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the 

Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final 

payment an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with 

the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. The Contractor shall furnish 

one copy each of Certificates of Insurance for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically 

set forth evidence of all insurance coverage required by the Contract Documents. The Certificate of 

Insurance shall be dated and show the name of the insured Contractor, the specific job by name 

and job number, the name of the insurer, the number of the policy, its effective date, and its 

termination date. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the insurance policy to the Owner within 60 

days following execution of the Agreement. If the Acord form certificate is used, the Supplemental 

Attachment form, AIA document G715, shall be completed, signed by Contractor’s insurance 

representative and attached to the Acord certificate. 

Add the following subparagraphs 11.1.4, 11.1.4.1, 11.1.4.2, 11.1.4.3, 11.1.4.4, 11.1.4.5, 11.1.4.6, 11.1.4.7, 

11.1..4.8, 11.1.4.9, 11.1.4.10 and 11.1.4.11 to 11.1: 

11.1.4 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than any limits of 

liability set forth below, required by Law or set forth in the Contract Documents, whichever is 

greater. Other types as may be required by the Project Specifications shall also be furnished. 





11.1.4.1 FURNISH TO THE OWNER A LETTER FROM THE INSURANCE COMPANY STATING THAT 

ALL REQUIRED INSURANCE HAS BEEN COMPLIED WITH AS SPECIFIED. 

11.1.4.2 THE OWNER, AND THE ARCHITECT, DAG Architects Inc. shall be named as an 

ADDITIONAL INSURED on the Contractor’s general liability policies. (Being named as 

Certificate Holder is not acceptable). 

11.1.4.3 INSURANCE MUST BE MAINTAINED FOR ONE (1) YEAR AFTER FINAL PAYMENT if written 

on a claims-made basis. 

11.1.4.4 All insurance shall contain provision that coverage afforded under the policies SHALL NOT 

BE CANCELED OR MODIFIED UNTIL A MINIMUM OF FIFTEEN (15) DAYS PRIOR WRITTEN 

NOTICE TO OWNER HAS BEEN GIVEN, AND THIS PROVISION SHALL BE NOTED ON 

CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE. 

11.1.4.5 Deliver to the Architect, before work commences, two (2) certificates evidencing compliance 

with all required insurance, using AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. 

11.1.4.6 Insurance required shall include Contractual Liability Insurance applicable to the 

Contractor’s obligations under Article 3. 

11.1.4.7 Property Insurance coverage shall include coverage of perils of windstorms, fire, lightning 

vandalism, malicious mischief and those included in extended coverage in the amount of 

one hundred percent (100%) of the values at risk. Extended coverage, vandalism, and 

malicious mischief insurance may contain the standard deductibles. 

11.1.4.8 Contractor shall maintain valid Worker’s Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 

440, Florida Statutes. All Subcontractors shall maintain valid Worker’s Compensation as 

required by Florida Statutes. 

11.1.4.9 Contractor shall maintain Public Liability Insurance against bodily injury, personal ijury and 

property damage, in limits as specified. Coverage shall include Comprehensive General 

Liability and Products and Completed Operations Liability. 

11.1.4.10 The amounts set forth herein and by Law shall apply equally or whether on or off the site of 

the Work. 

11.1.4.11 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, property insurance shall cover 

portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value 

established in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit. 

11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 

Delete subparagraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.5 and substitute the following subparagraphs to 11.4: 

11.4.1 It is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain, purchase and maintain property coverage’s (Builder’s 

Risk) shall be written for one hundred percent (100%) of the values at risk. 

11.4.1.1 Such policy shall include the interest of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors 

or any other parties involved in the project. Perils insured shall be “All Risks” including, but not 

limited to the following, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, flood, earthquake, windstorm, 





sinkhole, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal, including 

demolition. Contractor remains responsible for any deductible under such policy. 

11.4.1.2 Any insured loss is payable to the Owner as trustee for the insured, as their interest may appear. 

11.4.1.3 The Contractor shall file a copy of all policies with the Owner before an exposure to loss may occur. 

11.4.1.4 If the Owner requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance 

policy, the Contractor shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged 

to the Owner by appropriate Change Order. 

11.4.1.5 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages caused by fire or other 

perils to the extent covered by insurance provided under this paragraph, except such rights as they 

may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. The Contractor shall 

require similar waivers by Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors. 


11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance: The Contractor shall purchase and maintain an appropriate 

installation floater which shall specifically cover such insured objects which are subject to the boiler 

and machinery hazards during installation and until formal acceptance by the Owner. 

Add the following Subparagraphs 11.4.2.1, 11.4.2.2, and 11.4.2.3: 

11.4.2.1 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner a copy of each policy 

that includes insurance coverage required by this Paragraph 1.1.3. Each policy shall contain all 

generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. 

Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at 

least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. 

11.4.2.2 A loss insured under property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made 

payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the Insured, as their interests may appear. The Contractor 

shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by 

appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to 

make payments to their Subcontractors in similar manner. 

11.4.2.3 The Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, deposit in a separate account 

proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the 

parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an award as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after 

such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged property shall be covered 

by appropriate Change Order. 

Delete subparagraph 11.4.7 and substitute the following: 

11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. If permitted by the Owner's and Contractor's insurance companies, without 

penalties, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their 

Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, (2) the Architect, his 

employees and agents, and (3) the engineers, the engineer’s consultants, separate contractors 

described in Article 6, if any, and any of their Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and 

employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance 

obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except 

such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner 

or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate 





contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the Subcontractors Sub-subcontractors, agents and 

employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, 

similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. 

The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of 

subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would 

otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise did not pay the insurance 

premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in 

the property damaged. 

Add the following subparagraphs 11.4.11 to 11.4: 

11.4.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance 

company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or 

use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to 

obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, 

take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or 

deduction of insurance. 

11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 


11.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish the Owner a Performance Bond equal to one hundred percent (100%) 

of the contract price. The Performance Bond shall extend as a guarantee bond for one (1) year 

after final acceptance of the Work, or until specified guarantees, which exceed one year are 

satisfied. The Contractor shall furnish a Labor and Material Payment Bond equal to one hundred 

percent (100%) of the contract price. 

ADD THE FOLLOWING ARTICLES: 

11.6 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS (MINIMUM) 

11.6.1 WORKER’S COMPENSATION 

Applicable Per Florida Statute – Chapter 440 

Railroad Required 

NO 

Maritime Required 

NO 

Employer’s Liability 500,000 

11.6.2 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE including CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY 

Form of Insurance shall be: 

Comprehensive General Liability, Premises and Completed Operations, Contractual Liability, 

Broad Form. 

a. BODILY INJURY 

Each Occurrence $1,000,000 

Aggregate 1,000,000 

b. PROPERTY DAMAGE 

Including Complete Operations 

Broad Form 

Yes 





Each Occurrence 1,000,000 


c. PERSONAL INJURY (WITH EMPLOYMENT EXCLUSION DELETED) 



d. XCU COVERAGE included Yes 

11.6.3 MOTOR VEHICLE LIABILITY – Owned, Non-Owned and Hired 





Each Occurrence 200,000 

Aggregate 400,000 

11.6.4 OWNER’S AND CONTRACTOR’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE 

11.6.5 PROPERTY INSURANCE 

END OF SECTON 00 73 00 

The Contractor shall provide an Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective Liability Policy with the 

following limits: (A separate policy in the name of the Owner must be provided.) 







c. PROPERTY INJURY 



d. Optionally, the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self-protection 

against claims, which may arise from operations under the Contract. 

a. To be purchased by Contractor: Builders Risk Insurance on completed value form 

in the names of the Owner, Architect, and Contractor as their interests may appear 

with limits in an amount equal to the Contract Sum for the work, including 

coverage for materials and equipment furnished by Owner to be incorporated or 

used in the project when stored off the site or when in transit. Coverage shall be 

provided on an all risk basis to include extended coverage for fire, lightning, wind 

storms, vandalism and malicious mischief. 










SECTION 00 73 80 - WEATHER DELAY LOG 

A. Project: 

12041 Rosemary Beach Owners Center, rosemary Beach, FL. 

B. Date: 

C. Weather Event: 

D. Work On Progress: 

E. Is the work on the Critical Path 

F. Length of Delay: 

G. If the work is not on the Critical Path, how many days of delay until this work 

category will be on the Critical Path 

Instructions: 

1. The above information is required to be submitted with each payment request on a 

monthly basis. The NOA weather report and superintendents daily log must be 

submitted with weather extension request. 

2. This information will be required as back-up to grant a Time Extension request for delays 

caused by weather events. 

3. Direct delays for work stoppages that are on the critical path will be given accordingly. 

4. Delays for work not on the critical path shall be logged and delay logs for that category 

of work shall be accumulated and submitted in the event the work enters the critical 

patch and causes a delay of the project. 

5. Delays will be granted only on the basis of adverse effect on the Critical Path of work for 

the project. 

References: 

CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXHIBIT C, DIVISION 1 (CONTRACT) 

8. Any time or day lost to a weather related delay including wet ground conditions, rain, other 

forms of precipitation, and cold weather conditions, shall be an extension to the construction 

time regardless whether the period is under normal or adverse weather conditions. 

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION – A201 

Article 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim 

shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of 

time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled 

construction. 

Submitted by: 

Signature: 

General Contractor: 

WEATHER DELAY LOG 00 73 80 -1





WEATHER DELAY LOG 00 73 80 -2




SECTION 01 11 00 – PRODUCT EVALUATION AND APPROVAL 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Florida Product Evaluation and Approval. 

1.2 REFERENCES 

A. Florida Statute 553.842 

B. Florida Administrative Code 9B-72 

C. Definition: Product evaluation and approval system that applies statewide to concurrent with the 

Florida Building Code. 

1.3 RESPONSIBILITY 

A. The Contractor is responsible for providing products approved by the State of Florida with 

approval numbers. Do not use products that do not have a Florida approval number. 

1.4 SUBMITTAL 

A. Submit a copy of the approved product schedule, (attached at the end of this section), to the 

Architect within thirty (30) days after project has been awarded. In addition to State 

requirements comply with the requirements of the local jurisdiction of the project. 

B. Submit the following product approval specification sheet, or local jurisdiction form to obtain 

building permits. 

1.5 CATEGORIES 

A. General: Products, methods, or systems of construction, used in the exterior envelope of a 

building must be approved by the Building Department. The products covered are those 

products, methods or systems that affect the structural integrity of the building envelope, 

including but not limited to the following categories. 

1. Panel Walls. 

2. Exterior Doors 

3. Roofing Products. 

4. Skylights 

5. Windows 

6. Shutters 

7. Structural Components 

8. New and Innovative Building Envelope Products. 

PRODUCT APPROVAL SPECIFICATION SHEET 01 11 00 - 1/6




B. If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, non-complying components shall be 

removed and replaced with components that do comply at no expense to the Owner. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 





PRODUCT APPROVAL SPECIFICATION SHEET 

Location:__________________________ Project 

Name:__________________________________________________ 

As required by Florida Statute 553.842 and Florida Administrative Code 9B-72, please provide the 

information and the product approval number(s) on the building components listed below if they will be 

utilized on the construction project for which you are applying for a building permit. We recommend you 

contact your local product supplier should you not know the product approval number for any of the 

applicable listed products. More information about statewide product approval can be obtained at 

www.floridabuilding.org 

Category/Subcategory Manufacturer Product Description Approval Number(s) 

A. EXTERIOR DOORS 

1. Swinging 

2. Sliding 

3. Sectional 

4. Roll up 

5. Automatic 

6. Other 

B. WINDOWS 

1. Single hung 

2. Horizontal Slider 

3. Casement 

4. Double Hung 

5. Fixed 

6. Awning 

7. Pass -through 

8. Projected 

9. Mullion 

10. Wind Breaker 

11 Dual Action 

12. Other 

C. PANEL WALL 

1. Siding 

2. Soffits 

3. EIFS 

4. Storefronts 

5. Curtain walls 

6. Wall louver 

7. Glass block 

8. Membrane 

9. Greenhouse 

10. Other 

Category/Subcategory (cont.) Manufacturer Product Description Approval Number(s) 

D. ROOFING PRODUCTS 

1. Asphalt Shingles 

2. Underlayments 





3. Roofing Fasteners 

4. Non-structural Metal 

Roof 

5. Built-Up Roofing 

6. Modified Bitumen 

7. Single Ply Roofing Sys 

8. Roofing Tiles 

9. Roofing Insulation 

10. Waterproofing 

11. Wood shingles /shakes 

12. Roofing Slate 

13. Liquid Applied Roof Sys 

14. Cements-Adhesives – 

Coatings 

15. Roof Tile Adhesive 

16. Spray Applied 

Polyurethane Roof 

17. Other 

E. SHUTTERS 

1. Accordion 

2. Bahama 

3. Storm Panels 

4. Colonial 

5. Roll-up 

6. Equipment 

7. Others 

F. SKYLIGHTS 

1. Skylight 

2. Other 

Category/Subcategory (cont.) Manufacturer Product Description Approval Number(s) 

G. STRUCTURAL 

COMPONENTS 

1. Wood connector/anchor 





2. Truss plates 

3. Engineered lumber 

4. Railing 

5. Coolers-freezers 

6. Concrete Admixtures 

7. Material 

8. Insulation Forms 

9. Plastics 

10. Deck-Roof 

11. Wall 

12. Sheds 

13. Other 

H. NEW EXTERIOR 

ENVELOPE PRODUCTS 

1. 

2. 

The products listed below did not demonstrate product approval at plan review. I understand that at the 

time of inspection of these products, the following information must be available to the inspector on the 

jobsite; 1) copy of the product approval, 2) the performance characteristics which the product was tested 

and certified to comply with, 3) copy of the applicable manufacturers installation requirements. 

I understand these products may have to be removed if approval cannot be demonstrated during 

inspection. 

Contractor or Contractor’s Authorized Agent Signature Print Name Date 

Location Permit # 






This page intentionally left blank. 





SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 

1.2 DEFINITIONS 

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined 

in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if 

Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be 

completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described 

in the Contract Documents. 

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract 

Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the 

Contract Sum. 

1.3 PROCEDURES 

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate 

work of the alternate into Project. 

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar 

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part 

of alternate. 

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in 

writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or 

deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to 

alternates. 

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. 

D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification 

Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the 

work described under each alternate. 


PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES 

A. 

Alternate No. 1: Bocce Ball Courts 

Provide a deductive price for the 2 Bocce Ball Courts to include the following items: 

1. Aggregate walkway and metal edging to the gate at the Dog Park. 

2. Concrete Walkway and benches all around the 2 Bocce Ball Courts. 

3. 6’ high concrete privacy wall on the east side of the Bocce Ball Courts. 

4. Stadium Style seating, steps and raised planters. 

5. All Landscaping shall remain; grassed lawn areas shall be added in place of all removed 

hardscape, courts, and seating areas. 

ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1




B. 

Alternate No. 2: Dog Park 

Provide a deductive price for the Dog Park to include the following items: 

1. 4’ high concrete garden wall and gates. 

2. Metal fencing 

3. Aggregate walkway and metal edging 

4. All Lawn and Landscaping 

5. This area shall remain in its existing vegetative state. 

C. Alternate No. 3: Green Wall as shown and detailed on Landscape Drawings 

D. Alternate No. 4: 

Schedules 

Sliding Doors/Louvers as identified on Architectural Floor Plans and 


Provide a deductive price for the 2 Bocce Ball Courts to include the following items: 

1. Aggregate walkway and metal edging to the gate at the Dog Park. 

2. Concrete Walkway and benches all around the 2 Bocce Ball Courts. 

3. 6’ high concrete privacy wall on the east side of the Bocce Ball Courts. 

4. Stadium Style seating, steps and raised planters. 

5. All Landscaping shall remain, grassed lawn areas shall be added in place of all removed 

hardscape, courts, and seating areas. 

ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 2




SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 

B. Related Requirements: 

1. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable 

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 


A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from 

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product 

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and 

title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A 

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, 

as applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be 

provided, if applicable. 

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other 

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate 

contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of 

the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. 

Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, 

durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific 

features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work 

specified. 

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and 

installation procedures. 

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. 

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and 

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting 

test results for compliance with requirements indicated. 

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1




i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, 

from ICC-ES 

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed 

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall 

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided 

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's 

letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays 

in delivery. 

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in 

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible 

with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. 

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently 

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated 

results. 

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. 

Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 

15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or 

documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's 

Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. 

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed 

substitution within time allocated. 

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution 

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility 

tests recommended by manufacturers. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for 

change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related 

submittals. 

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the 

following conditions are satisfied: 

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce 

indicated results. 

b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. 

c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 





e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 

f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 

g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution 

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is 

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed 


END OF SECTION 012500 









SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 


SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing 

Contract modifications. 

MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 

B. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not 

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, 

"Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 

PROPOSAL REQUESTS 

C. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed 

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If 

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress 

or to execute the proposed change. 

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, 

after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the 

Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. 

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with 

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey 

data to substantiate quantities. 

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of 

trade discounts. 

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of 

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and 

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an 

extension of the Contract Time. 

e. Quotation Form: Use Acceptable to Architect. 

D. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the 

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the 

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the 

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total 

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to 

substantiate quantities. 

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade 

discounts. 

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1/4




4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the 

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, 

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the 

Contract Time. 

6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the 

proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system 

specified. 

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 

ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS 

E. Allowance Adjustment: Refer to Division 01 Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures 

for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs 

of allowances. 

F. Unit Price Adjustment: Refer to Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures 

for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured 

scope of unit price work. 

G. Direct Owner Purchase: Refer to Division 01 Section “Direct Material Purchase Procedure” for 

administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract 

Sum to reflect direct material purchases. 

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 

H. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures 

of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 

CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 

I. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on 

AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a 

change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It 

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the 

Contract Time. 

J. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the 

Construction Change Directive. 

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary 

to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 

















SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and 

process Applications for Payment. 

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's 

construction schedule. 

1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms 

and schedules, including the following: 

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. 

b. Submittal schedule. 

c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction 

schedule. 

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 

3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring 

separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each 

phase of payment. 

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items 

for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: 

a. Project name and location. 

b. Name of Architect. 

c. Architect's project number. 

d. Contractor's name and address. 

e. Date of submittal. 

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued 

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project 

Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in 

excess of five percent of Contract Sum. 

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where 

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated 

and stored, but not yet installed. 

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each 

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1/4




7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. 

Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by 

measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine 

quantities. 

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. 

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. 

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual 

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of 

values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next 

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result 

in a change in the Contract Sum. 

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as 

certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, 

and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement 

between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application 

for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. 

C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the 25th day 

of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on 

the last day of the month. 

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for 

Applications for Payment or Contractor’s computer print-out sheet with all required data from 

G702 and G703 and as approved by the Owner. 

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person 

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete 

applications without action. 

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction 

schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before 

last day of construction period covered by application. 

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment 

to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of 

lien and similar attachments if required. 

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate 

information about application. 

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's 

lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related 

to the Work covered by the payment. 





1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after 

deduction for retainage, on each item. 

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit 

waivers. 

4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to 

Owner. 

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or 

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 

1. List of subcontractors. 

2. Schedule of values. 

3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 

4. Schedule of unit prices. 

5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 

6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 

7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 

8. Copies of building permits. 

9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance 

of the Work. 

10. Initial progress report. 

11. Report of preconstruction conference. 

12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial 

Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of 

the Work claimed as substantially complete. 

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a 

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued 

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 

J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting 

documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the 

following: 

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof 

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 

4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 

5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 

6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 

7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 

8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of 

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed 

responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. 







END OF SECTION 01 29 00 





SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Coordination drawings. 

2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 

3. Project meetings. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and 

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 


A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during 

construction. 

1.3 COORDINATION 

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the 

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate 

construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper 

installation, connection, and operation. 

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where 

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before 

or after its own installation. 

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and 

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures 

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees 

at meetings. 

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their 

Work is required. 

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative 

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of 

the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1/8




3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 

5. Progress meetings. 

6. Preinstallation conferences. 

7. Project closeout activities. 

8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 

9. Project closeout activities. 

1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with 

requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop 

Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is 

required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than 

one entity. 

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to 

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed 

data. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, 

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. 

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that 

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance 

requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed 

resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will 

not be considered changes to the Contract. 

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and 

mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of 

visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. 

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical 

and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to 

accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. 

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans 

and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical 

equipment. 

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of 

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, 

door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and 

similar items. 

6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being 

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's 

responsibility. 

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) 

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the 

Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 





1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor 

with no response. 

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's 

work or work of subcontractors. 

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or 

interpretation and the following: 

1. Project name. 

2. Project number. 

3. Date. 

4. Name of Contractor. 

5. Name of Architect. 

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 

7. RFI subject. 

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 

11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time 

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 

12. Contractor's signature. 

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, 

Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe 

items needing interpretation. 

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716. 

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. 

Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect 

after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: 

a. Requests for approval of submittals. 

b. Requests for approval of substitutions. 

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract 

Documents. 

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. 

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. 

f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case 

Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the 

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to 

Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." 

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or 

the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI 

response. 

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response 

to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor 

disagrees with response. 





F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. 

Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B. Include the following: 

1. Project name. 

2. Name and address of Contractor. 

3. Name and address of Architect. 

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 

5. RFI description. 

6. Date the RFI was submitted. 

7. Date Architect's response was received. 

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and 

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 

9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as 

appropriate. 

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is 

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled 

meeting dates and times. 

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and 

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including 

Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. 

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference 

before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 

days after execution of the Agreement. 

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; 

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned 

parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with 

Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: 

a. Tentative construction schedule. 

b. Phasing. 

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. 

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. 

e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 

f. Procedures for RFIs. 

g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. 

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 

i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 

j. Submittal procedures. 

k. Sustainable design requirements. 

l. Preparation of record documents. 

m. Use of the premises and existing buildings. 

n. Work restrictions. 

o. Working hours. 

p. Owner's occupancy requirements. 

q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 





r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. 

s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. 

t. Construction waste management and recycling. 

u. Parking availability. 

v. Office, work, and storage areas. 

w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 

x. First aid. 

y. Security. 

z. Progress cleaning. 

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting 

minutes. 

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each 

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or 

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and 

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise 

Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the 

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: 

a. Contract Documents. 

b. Options. 

c. Related RFIs. 

d. Related Change Orders. 

e. Purchases. 

f. Deliveries. 

g. Submittals. 

h. Review of mockups. 

i. Possible conflicts. 

j. Compatibility problems. 

k. Time schedules. 

l. Weather limitations. 

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 

n. Warranty requirements. 

o. Compatibility of materials. 

p. Acceptability of substrates. 

q. Temporary facilities and controls. 

r. Space and access limitations. 

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

t. Testing and inspecting requirements. 

u. Installation procedures. 

v. Coordination with other work. 

w. Required performance results. 

x. Protection of adjacent work. 

y. Protection of construction and personnel. 

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including 

required corrective measures and actions. 

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties 

requiring information. 

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. 

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the 

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 





D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. 

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, 

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in 

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these 

meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to 

conclude matters relating to the Work. 

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review 

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as 

appropriate to status of Project. 

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. 

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind 

schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how 

construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties 

involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that 

current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 

1) Review schedule for next period. 

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 

1) Interface requirements. 

2) Sequence of operations. 

3) Status of submittals. 

4) Deliveries. 

5) Off-site fabrication. 

6) Access. 

7) Site utilization. 

8) Temporary facilities and controls. 

9) Progress cleaning. 

10) Quality and work standards. 

11) Status of correction of deficient items. 

12) Field observations. 

13) Status of RFIs. 

14) Status of proposal requests. 

15) Pending changes. 

16) Status of Change Orders. 

17) Pending claims and disputes. 

18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the 

meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. 

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each 

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. 

Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 

















SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of 

construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 

1. Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Daily construction reports. 

3. Field condition reports. 

1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 

1. Two paper copies. 

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule 

for entire construction period. 

C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. 

D. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 


A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of 

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. 

B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, 

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and 

reports. 

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities 

involved. 

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule 

them in proper sequence. 


2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL 

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of 

Substantial Completion. 

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1/4




1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows 

an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal 

element of the Work. Comply with the following: 

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless 

specifically allowed by Architect. 

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead 

items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in 

schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, 

approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 

Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in 

Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 10 days for startup and testing. 

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for 

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures 

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for punch list and final 

completion. 

C. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days 

behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means 

by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. 

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) 

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, 

Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of 

each week with a continuous vertical line. 

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an 

estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 

2.3 REPORTS 

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following 

information concerning events at Project site: 

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 

2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 

4. Equipment at Project site. 

5. Material deliveries. 

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or 

snow. 

7. Accidents. 

8. Meetings and significant decisions. 

9. Unusual events. 

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 





11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 

12. Emergency procedures. 

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 

14. Change Orders received and implemented. 

15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 

16. Services connected and disconnected. 

17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 

18. Partial completions and occupancies. 

19. Substantial Completions authorized. 

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and 

the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for 

Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with 

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 


3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect 

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at each regularly scheduled 

progress meeting. 

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have 

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each 

such meeting. 

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not 

limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. 

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, 

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know 

schedule responsibility. 

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in 

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their 

assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction 

activities. 











SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural 

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 


1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and 

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and 

maintenance manuals. 

3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record 

Specifications, and record Product Data. 


A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require 

Architect's responsive action. 

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not 

require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with 

requirements. 


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates 

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, 

fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making 

corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling 

and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, 

floor plans and elevations only, will be provided upon request by Architect for Contractor's use 

in preparing submittals. 

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract 

Drawings upon request by Contractor for use in preparing Shop Drawings. 

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital 

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. 

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document 

C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. 

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1/8




B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of 

construction activities. 

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, 

and related activities that require sequential activity. 

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so 

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for 

coordination. 

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination 

with other submittals until related submittals are received. 

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. 

Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the 

Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of 

the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if 

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor 

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner 

as initial submittal. 

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 

D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy 

submittal item for identification. 

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 

2. Provide a space approximately 150 by 200 mm (6 by 8 inches) on label or beside title 

block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 

c. Name of Architect. 

d. Name of Construction Manager. 

e. Name of Contractor. 

f. Name of subcontractor. 

g. Name of supplier. 

h. Name of manufacturer. 

i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a 

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). 

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point 

(e.g., 061000.01.A). 

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 

m. Other necessary identification. 

E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal 

file as follows: 





1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling 

navigation to each item. 

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by 

a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). 

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 

LNHS-061000.01.A). 

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval 

markings and action taken by Architect. 

4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 

c. Name and address of Architect. 

d. Name of Construction Manager. 

e. Name of Contractor. 

f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 

g. Name of subcontractor. 

h. Name of supplier. 

i. Name of manufacturer. 

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 

m. Related physical samples submitted directly. 

n. Other necessary identification. 

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. 

G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. 

H. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless 

Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal 

may serve as final submittal. 

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of 

copies to Architect. 

I. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and 

handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals 

received from sources other than Contractor. 

1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. 

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant 

information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on 

previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, 

including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as 

related submittal. 

J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of 

revision. 





3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action 

stamp. 

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, 

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of 

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from 

Architect's action stamp. 


2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 

1. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise 

indicated. Architect will return two copies. 

2. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise 

indicated. Architect will not return copies. 

3. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements 

specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 

4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of 

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be 

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that 

entity. 

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted 

certificates and certifications where indicated. 

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications 

where indicated. 

5. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in 

Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and 

type of product or equipment. 

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data 

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 

3. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 

b. Manufacturer's product specifications. 

c. Standard color charts. 

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. 

e. Testing by recognized testing agency. 

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 

g. Notation of coordination requirements. 

h. Availability and delivery time information. 

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: 





a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. 

b. Printed performance curves. 

c. Operational range diagrams. 

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop 

Drawings. 

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 

6. Submit Product Data in the following format: 

a. Three paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will 

return two copies. 

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base 

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless 

submittal based upon Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the 

following information, as applicable: 

a. Identification of products. 

b. Schedules. 

c. Compliance with specified standards. 

d. Notation of coordination requirements. 

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop 

Drawings on sheets at least 215 by 280 mm (8-1/2 by 11 inches) but no larger than 600 

by 900 mm (24 by 36 inches) . 

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: 

a. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. 

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these 

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between 

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories 

together in one submittal package. 

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 

a. Generic description of Sample. 

b. Product name and name of manufacturer. 

c. Sample source. 

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol 

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be 

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual 

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time 

of use. 





b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's 

property, are the property of Contractor. 

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or 

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, 

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from 

manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared 

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and 

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of 

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the 

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or 

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing 

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent 

testing and inspection. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one 

Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 

1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in 

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of 

paired units that show approximate limits of variations. 

E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 

"Construction Progress Documentation." 

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment 

Procedures." 

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment 

Procedures." 

H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each 

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a 

special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. 

1. Submit subcontract list in the following format: 

a. Number of Copies: Two paper copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise 

indicated. Architect will return one copy. 

I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project 

Management and Coordination." 

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of 

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact 

information of architects and owners, and other information specified. 

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel 

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure 

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. 

Include names of firms and personnel certified. 





L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is 

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying 

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of 

manufacturing experience where required. 

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's 

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with 

requirements in the Contract Documents. 

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by 

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on 

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or 

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. 

S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 

"Quality Requirements." 

T. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed 

either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for 

compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

U. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and 

Maintenance Data." 

V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, 

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. 

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. 

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for 

calculations. Include page numbers. 

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES 

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a 

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide 

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a 

written request for additional information to Architect. 

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other 

required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the 





responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to 

Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the 

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing 

these services. 


3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW 

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with 

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections 

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. 

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 

Section "Closeout Procedures." 

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name 

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date 

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, 

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION 

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and 

will return them without action. 

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or 

modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp 

and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. 

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return 

it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate 

party. 

D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be 

returned without review. 

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be 

discarded. 






SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality 

control. 

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or 

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the 

Contract Document requirements. 

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance 

and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document 

requirements. 

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required 

by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this 

Section. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 


A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during 

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed 

construction will comply with requirements. 

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after 

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and 

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract 

enforcement activities performed by Architect. 

C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed 

to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where 

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to 

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified 

installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved 

mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to 

verify performance characteristics. 

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before 

products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with 

specified criteria. 

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing 

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to 

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. 

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1/6




F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., 

plant, mill, factory, or shop. 

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation 

of the Work and for completed Work. 

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing 

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an 

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, 

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that 

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that 

requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades. 

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully 

completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; 

being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the 

standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, 

comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, 

but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be 

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the 

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. 

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as 

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision 

before proceeding. 


A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, 

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before 

starting work on the following systems. 

1. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-forceresisting 

system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to 

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a 

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 

1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS 

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other 

Sections. Include the following: 





1. Date of issue. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 

7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 

8. Complete test or inspection data. 

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and 

inspecting. 

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with 

the Contract Document requirements. 

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections 

specified in other Sections. Include the following: 

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 

3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with 

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 

4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance 

complies with requirements. 

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, 

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee 

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for 

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels 

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar 

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as 

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated 

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient 

production capacity to produce required units. 

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling 

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has 

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to 

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering 

services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for 

installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this 

Project in material, design, and extent. 





F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be 

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy 

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for 

specialists. 

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the 

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according 

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where 

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory 

Accreditation Program. 

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer 

who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of 

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for 

this Project. 

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing 

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the 

following: 

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: 

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing 

results to prevent delaying the Work. 

c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods 

of construction indicated for the completed Work. 

d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups; do not 

reuse products on Project. 

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, 

and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests 

and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies 

with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each 

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using 

materials indicated for the completed Work: 

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by 

Architect. 

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be 

constructed. 

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for 

judging the completed Work. 

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 





1.7 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, 

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing 

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged 

to perform. 

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work 

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the 

Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are 

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the 

Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing 

agency to perform these quality-control services. 

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in 

writing by Owner. 

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires 

testing or inspecting will be performed. 

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a 

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract 

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, 

when they so direct. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to 

observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of 

substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the 

Work, and submittal of written reports. 

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's 

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for 

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. 

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of 

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the 

Work during performance of its services. 

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests 

are conducted. 

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and 

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol 

service through Contractor. 

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or 

approve or accept any portion of the Work. 

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. 





F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and 

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify 

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the 

following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and 

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing 

agency. 

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project 

site. 

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance 

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing 

construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 



3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair 

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched 

areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible 

as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching 

in Division 01 Section "Execution." 

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. 

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of 

responsibility for quality-control services. 






SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES 



A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, 

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the 

Conditions of the Contract. 

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," 

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." 

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on 

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," 

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." 

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having 

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control 

performance of the Work. 

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, 

installation, and similar operations. 

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, 

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, 

protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site 

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which 

Project is to be built. 

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent 

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if 

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards 

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents 

unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with 

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not 

bound with the Contract Documents. 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1/12




1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain 

copies directly from publication source. 

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson 

Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional 

Associations of the U.S." 

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 

AA 

AAADM 

AABC 

AAMA 

AASHTO 

AATCC 

ABAA 

ABMA 

ACI 

ACPA 

AEIC 

AF&PA 

AGA 

AGC 

AHA 

AHAM 

AI 

AIA 

AISC 

AISI 

AITC 

Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) 

American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers 

Associated Air Balance Council 

American Architectural Manufacturers Association 

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 

American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists 

Air Barrier Association of America 

American Bearing Manufacturers Association 

American Concrete Institute 

American Concrete Pipe Association 

Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) 

American Forest & Paper Association 

American Gas Association 

Associated General Contractors of America (The) 

American Hardboard Association 

(Now part of CPA) 

Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 

Asphalt Institute 

American Institute of Architects (The) 

American Institute of Steel Construction 

American Iron and Steel Institute 

American Institute of Timber Construction 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2/12




ALCA 

ALSC 

AMCA 

ANSI 

AOSA 

APA 

APA 

APA EWS 

API 

ARI 

ARMA 

ASCE 

ASCE/SEI 

ASHRAE 

ASME 

ASSE 

ASTM 

AWCI 

AWCMA 

AWI 

AWPA 

AWS 

AWWA 

BHMA 

Associated Landscape Contractors of America 

(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) 

American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated 

Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 

American National Standards Institute 

Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. 

Architectural Precast Association 

APA - The Engineered Wood Association 

APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems 

(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association) 

American Petroleum Institute 

Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute 

Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association 

American Society of Civil Engineers 

American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute 

(See ASCE) 

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers 

ASME International 

(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) 

American Society of Sanitary Engineering 

ASTM International 

(American Society for Testing and Materials International) 

Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry 

American Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

(Now WCMA) 

Architectural Woodwork Institute 

American Wood Protection Association 

(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) 

American Welding Society 

American Water Works Association 

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3/12




BIA 

BICSI 

BIFMA 

BISSC 

BWF 

CCC 

CDA 

CEA 

CEA 

CFFA 

CGA 

CIMA 

CISCA 

CISPI 

CLFMI 

CRRC 

CPA 

CPPA 

CRI 

CRSI 

CSA 

CSA 

CSI 

CSI 

CSSB 

CTI 

Brick Industry Association (The) 

BICSI, Inc. 

BIFMA International 

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) 

Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee 

Badminton World Federation 

(Formerly: IBF - International Badminton Federation) 

Carpet Cushion Council 

Copper Development Association 

Canadian Electricity Association 

Consumer Electronics Association 

Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. 

Compressed Gas Association 

Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association 

Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association 

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 

Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 

Cool Roof Rating Council 

Composite Panel Association 

Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association 

Carpet and Rug Institute (The) 

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 

Canadian Standards Association 

CSA International 

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) 

Cast Stone Institute 

Construction Specifications Institute (The) 

Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau 

Cooling Technology Institute 

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 4/12




DHI 

EIA 

EIMA 

EJCDC 

EJMA 

ESD 

ETL SEMCO 

FIBA 

FIVB 

FM Approvals 

FM Global 

FMRC 

FRSA 

FSA 

FSC 

GA 

GANA 

GRI 

GS 

GSI 

HI 

HI 

HMMA 

HPVA 

HPW 

Door and Hardware Institute 

Electronic Industries Alliance 

EIFS Industry Members Association 

Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee 

Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. 

ESD Association 

(Electrostatic Discharge Association) 

Intertek ETL SEMCO 

(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA) 

Federation Internationale de Basketball 

(The International Basketball Federation) 

Federation Internationale de Volleyball 

(The International Volleyball Federation) 

FM Approvals LLC 

FM Global 

(Formerly: FMG - FM Global) 

Factory Mutual Research 

(Now FM Global) 

Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. 

Fluid Sealing Association 

Forest Stewardship Council 

Gypsum Association 

Glass Association of North America 

(Part of GSI) 

Green Seal 

Geosynthetic Institute 

Hydraulic Institute 

Hydronics Institute 

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 

(Part of NAAMM) 

Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association 

H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 5/12




IAS 

IBF 

ICEA 

ICRI 

IEC 

IEEE 

IESNA 

IEST 

IGCC 

IGMA 

ILI 

ISO 

ISSFA 

ITS 

ITU 

KCMA 

LMA 

LPI 

MBMA 

MFMA 

MFMA 

MH 

MHIA 

MIA 

MPI 

International Approval Services 

(Now CSA International) 

International Badminton Federation 

(Now BWF) 

Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. 

International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. 

International Electrotechnical Commission 

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) 

Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 

Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology 

Insulating Glass Certification Council 

Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance 

Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. 

International Organization for Standardization 

Available from ANSI 

International Solid Surface Fabricators Association 

Intertek Testing Service NA 

(Now ETL SEMCO) 

International Telecommunication Union 

Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association 

Laminating Materials Association 

(Now part of CPA) 

Lightning Protection Institute 

Metal Building Manufacturers Association 

Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. 

Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. 

Material Handling 

(Now MHIA) 

Material Handling Industry of America 

Marble Institute of America 

Master Painters Institute 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 6/12




MSS 

NAAMM 

NACE 

NADCA 

NAGWS 

NAIMA 

NBGQA 

NCAA 

NCMA 

NCPI 

NCTA 

NEBB 

NECA 

NeLMA 

NEMA 

NETA 

NFHS 

NFPA 

NFRC 

NGA 

NHLA 

NLGA 

NOFMA 

NOMMA 

NRCA 

NRMCA 

Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 

NACE International 

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) 

National Air Duct Cleaners Association 

National Association for Girls and Women in Sport 

North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 

National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. 

National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) 

National Concrete Masonry Association 

National Clay Pipe Institute 

National Cable & Telecommunications Association 

National Environmental Balancing Bureau 

National Electrical Contractors Association 

Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association 

National Electrical Manufacturers Association 

InterNational Electrical Testing Association 

National Federation of State High School Associations 

NFPA 

(National Fire Protection Association) 

National Fenestration Rating Council 

National Glass Association 

National Hardwood Lumber Association 

National Lumber Grades Authority 

NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association 

(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) 

National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association 

National Roofing Contractors Association 

National Ready Mixed Concrete Association 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 7/12




NSF 

NSSGA 

NTMA 

NTRMA 

NWWDA 

OPL 

PCI 

PDCA 

PDI 

PGI 

PLANET 

PTI 

RCSC 

RFCI 

RIS 

SAE 

SDI 

SDI 

SEFA 

SEI/ASCE 

SGCC 

SIA 

SIGMA 

SJI 

SMA 

NSF International 

(National Sanitation Foundation International) 

National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association 

National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) 

National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association 

(Now TRI) 

National Wood Window and Door Association 

(Now WDMA) 

Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. 

(Now ITS) 

Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 

Painting & Decorating Contractors of America 

Plumbing & Drainage Institute 

PVC Geomembrane Institute 

Professional Landcare Network 

(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) 

Post-Tensioning Institute 

Research Council on Structural Connections 

Resilient Floor Covering Institute 

Redwood Inspection Service 

SAE International 

Steel Deck Institute 

Steel Door Institute 

Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association 

Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers 

(See ASCE) 

Safety Glazing Certification Council 

Security Industry Association 

Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 

(Now IGMA) 

Steel Joist Institute 

Screen Manufacturers Association 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 8/12




SMACNA 

SMPTE 

SPFA 

SPIB 

SPRI 

SSINA 

SSPC 

STI 

SWI 

SWRI 

TCA 

TCNA 

TIA/EIA 

TMS 

TPI 

TPI 

TRI 

UL 

UNI 

USAV 

USGBC 

USITT 

WASTEC 

WCLIB 

WCMA 

WCSC 

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' 

National Association 

Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers 

Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance 

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray 

Polyurethane Foam Division) 

Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) 

Single Ply Roofing Industry 

Specialty Steel Industry of North America 

SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings 

Steel Tank Institute 

Steel Window Institute 

Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute 

Tile Council of America, Inc. 

(Now TCNA) 

Tile Council of North America, Inc. 

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance 

The Masonry Society 

Truss Plate Institute, Inc. 

Turfgrass Producers International 

Tile Roofing Institute 

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 

Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association 

USA Volleyball 

U.S. Green Building Council 

United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. 

Waste Equipment Technology Association 

West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 

Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

Window Covering Safety Council 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 9/12




(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) 

WDMA 

WI 

WIC 

WMMPA 

WSRCA 

WWPA 

Window & Door Manufacturers Association 

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) 

Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) 

Woodwork Institute of California 

(Now WI) 

Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association 

Western States Roofing Contractors Association 

Western Wood Products Association 

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 

IAPMO 

ICC 

ICC-ES 

International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials 

International Code Council 

ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. 

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications 

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the 

following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are 

believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

CE 

CPSC 

DOC 

DOD 

DOE 

EPA 

FAA 

FCC 

FDA 

GSA 

HUD 

LBL 

NCHRP 

Army Corps of Engineers 

Consumer Product Safety Commission 

Department of Commerce 

Department of Defense 

Department of Energy 

Environmental Protection Agency 

Federal Aviation Administration 

Federal Communications Commission 

Food and Drug Administration 

General Services Administration 

Department of Housing and Urban Development 

Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory 

National Cooperative Highway Research Program 

(See TRB) 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 10/12




NIST 

OSHA 

PBS 

PHS 

RUS 

SD 

TRB 

USDA 

USPS 

National Institute of Standards and Technology 

Occupational Safety & Health Administration 

Public Buildings Service 

(See GSA) 

Office of Public Health and Science 

Rural Utilities Service 

(See USDA) 

State Department 

Transportation Research Board 

Department of Agriculture 

Postal Service 

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or 

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and 

regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to 

change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract 

Documents. 

ADAAG 

CFR 

DOD 

DSCC 

FED-STD 

FS 

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 

Available from U.S. Access Board 

Code of Federal Regulations 

Available from Government Printing Office 

Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards 

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point 

Defense Supply Center Columbus 

(See FS) 

Federal Standard 

(See FS) 

Federal Specification 


Available from Defense Standardization Program 

Available from General Services Administration 

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences 

FTMS 

Federal Test Method Standard 

(See FS) 

REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 11/12




MIL 

MIL-STD 

MILSPEC 

UFAS 

(See MILSPEC) 

(See MILSPEC) 

Military Specification and Standards 


Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 

Available from Access Board 




REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 12/12




SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and 

protection facilities. 

B. Related Section: 

1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 

1.2 USE CHARGES 

A. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is 

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections 

and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 

B. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is 

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections 

and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for 

construction personnel. 

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA 

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary 

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each 

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume 

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its 

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned 

responsibilities. 

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1/8





2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 50-mm (2-inch), 3.8-mm- (0.148-inch-) thick, galvanized steel, 

chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 1.8 m (6 feet) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 

60-mm- (2-3/8-inch-) OD line posts and 73-mm- (2-7/8-inch-) OD corner and pull posts. 

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 50-mm (2-inch), 3.8-mm- (0.148-inch-) thick, galvanized 

steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 1.8 m (6 feet) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; 

minimum 60-mm- (2-3/8-inch-) OD line posts and 73-mm- (2-7/8-inch-) OD corner and pull 

posts, with 42-mm- (1-5/8-inch-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for 

supporting posts. 

C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 1.8 m (6 feet) high, framed with four 50-by-100-mm (2-by-4- 

inch) rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 2.4 m (8 feet) apart. 

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature 

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and 

construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other 

Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. 

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to 

accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 

2.3 EQUIPMENT 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by 

locations and classes of fire exposures. 

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, 

self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating 

units is prohibited. 

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for 

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in 

system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in 

Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 






3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference 

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the 

Work. 

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." 

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities 

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be 

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water 

service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these 

facilities to condition existing before initial use. 

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of 

construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, 

number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities 

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from 

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a 

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction 

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction 

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on 

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to 

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 

G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain 

equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. 

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for 

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements 

without operating entire system. 





I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all 

construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. 

a. Police and fire departments. 

b. Ambulance service. 

c. Contractor's home office. 

d. Architect's office. 

e. Engineers' offices. 

f. Owner's office. 

g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when 

away from field office. 

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. General: Comply with the following: 

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction 

area or within 9 m (30 feet) of building lines that is noncombustible according to 

ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. 

Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial 

Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to 

Owner. 

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas 

adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within 

construction limits indicated on Drawings. 

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment 

as required to minimize dust. 

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. 

D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. 

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining 

properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. 

F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 

2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and 

individuals seeking entrance to Project. 





a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. 

G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle 

waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 

I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and 

equipment" and not temporary facilities. 

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct 

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible 

air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and 

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent 

properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit 

or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 

C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide 

barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of 

stormwater from heavy rains. 

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line 

of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root 

systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. 

E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and 

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control 

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial 

Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using 

environmentally safe materials. 

F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure 

fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by 

entrance gates. 

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined 

sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized 

personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. 

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas 

of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, 

and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. 





H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 

I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in 

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and 

similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate 

temporary enclosures. 

J. Temporary Partitions: Provide temporary fire-rated closures for the two corridor openings until 

such time as the two doors 300G and 300N can be procured and installed to maintain the 3 

hour fire protection of the openings that is required for the final construction. 

1. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by 

authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 

2. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 

3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security 

locks where openings are required. 

K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types 

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with 

NFPA 241. 

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar 

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel 

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be 

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL 

A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible 

signs of mold that may appear during construction. 

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are 

subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water 

damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with 

concrete. 

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full 

enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of 

moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high 

organic content, into partially enclosed building. 

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 

3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 

4. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 

5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before 

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. 





D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building 

enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 

2. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture 

level within 48 hours. 

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and 

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, 

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated 

results and to avoid possibility of damage. 

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and 

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has 

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than 

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may 

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, 

clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during 

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 

Section "Closeout Procedures." 











SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in 

Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on 

products; special warranties; and comparable products. 

B. Related Section: 

1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 


A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or 

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," 

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or 

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product 

literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or 

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new 

products. 

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal 

process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service 

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or 

exceed those of specified product. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's 

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or 

model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, 

dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics 

for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the 

specification. 


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. 

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification 

Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. 

Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product 

request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional 

information or documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." 

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1/6




b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a 

comparable product request within time allocated. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more 

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if 

previously selected products were also options. 

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, 

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Delivery and Handling: 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent 

overcrowding of construction spaces. 

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that 

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other 

losses. 

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original 

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for 

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and 

to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight 

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 

4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of 

installation and concealment. 

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, 

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other 

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on 

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a 

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 





2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide 

specific rights for Owner. 

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and 

identification, ready for execution. 

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and 

properly executed. 

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a 

written document using indicated form properly executed. 

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and 

particular requirements for submitting special warranties. 

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 


2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES 

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, 

are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items 

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are 

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used 

successfully in similar situations on other projects. 

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make 

selection. 

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications 

establish salient characteristics of products. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: 

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the 

named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions 

for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, 

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 

Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be 

considered. 

3. Products: 

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both 

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with 

requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience 

will not be considered. 

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available 

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed 

product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in 

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 





4. Manufacturers: 

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, 

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with 

requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience 

will no] be considered. 

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, 

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed 

manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in 

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's 

product. 

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product 

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or 

indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. 

Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other 

characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in 

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the 

other named manufacturers. 

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", 

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's 

decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other 

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution 

Procedures" for proposal of product. 

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by 

Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with 

requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's 

product line that includes both standard and premium items. 

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS 

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable 

product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, 

Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these 

requirements: 

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract 

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the 

indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the 

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, 

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and 

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 

5. Samples, if requested. 





PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)If reference to a special warranty form was added where a single 

warranty must cover work by several contractors, insert form here and delete "Not Used" above. 











SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the 

Work including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Construction layout. 

2. Field engineering and surveying. 

3. Installation of the Work. 

4. Cutting and patching. 

5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 

6. Progress cleaning. 

7. Starting and adjusting. 

8. Protection of installed construction. 

9. Correction of the Work. 


1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with 

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines 

and levels, and final cleaning. 

2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated 

construction. 


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of 

construction elements. 

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of 

locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. 

Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and 

patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or 

increase deflection 

a. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related 

components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as 

intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or 

safety. 

2. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or 

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in 

reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance 

or decreased operational life or safety. 

3. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual 

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a 

manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. 

EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1/8




Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually 

unsatisfactory manner. 

1.3 WARRANTY 

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or 

damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials 

so as not to void existing warranties. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and 

procedures, utilize products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01 

Section "Sustainable Design Requirements." 

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed 

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent 

possible. 

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when 

installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional 

performance of in-place materials. 


3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and 

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate 

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical 

systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of 

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, 

and other utilities. 

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities 

serving Project site. 

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the 

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where 

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance. Record observations. 

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing 

finishes or primers. 

EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 2/8




2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of 

connections before equipment and fixture installation. 

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are 

to be installed. 

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 

3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck 

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to 

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before 

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the 

Work. 

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown 

diagrammatically on Drawings. 

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for 

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of 

the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in 

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT 

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on 

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are 

discovered, notify Architect promptly. 

B. General: Lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of 

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain 

required dimensions. 

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 

5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable 

tolerances. 

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill 

and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. 

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building 

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and 

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. 

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 

EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 3/8




3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING 

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference 

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control 

points during construction operations. 

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, 

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having 

jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 

3.5 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and 

elevation, as indicated. 

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance 

and ease of removal for replacement. 

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in 

applications indicated. 

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. 

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. 

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or 

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. 

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be 

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that 

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated 

requirements. 

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate 

size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned 

with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify 

size and type required for load conditions. 

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at 

heights directed by Architect. 

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and 

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver 

such items to Project site in time for installation. 

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, 

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered 

hazardous. 

EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 4/8




3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. 

Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance 

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their 

original condition. 

2. No exterior concrete or asphalt paving will be cut for any reason without the expressed 

written permission of the School District. Directional boring is to be utilized when 

practical to do so. 

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. 

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be 

exposed during cutting and patching operations. 

D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free 

passage to adjoining areas. 

E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems 

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before 

cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 

F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar 

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or 

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply 

with original Installer's written recommendations. 

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not 

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with 

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a 

diamond-core drill. 

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections 

where required by cutting and patching operations. 

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be 

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent 

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 

G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations 

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as 

practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Sections, where applicable. 

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to 

demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish 

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of 

patching and refinishing. 

EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 5/8




3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area 

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even 

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall 

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and 

appearance. 

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane 

surface of uniform appearance. 

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a 

weathertight condition. 

H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, 

mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING 

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce 

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and 

debris. 

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if 

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C) . 

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. 

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for 

proper execution of the Work. 

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the 

entire work area, as appropriate. 

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written 

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials 

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning 

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed 

surfaces. 

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. 

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to 

ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials 

down sewers or into waterways. 

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining 

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from 

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 

EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 6/8




I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through 

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure 

operability without damaging effects. 

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the 

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or 

otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove 

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation 

without binding. 

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section 

"Quality Requirements." 

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or 

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK 

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and 

finishes. 

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up 

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. 

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. 

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired 

without visible evidence of repair. 

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components 

that cannot be repaired. 

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. 


EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 7/8





EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 8/8




SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, 

but not limited to, the following: 

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 

2. Final completion procedures. 

3. Warranties. 

4. Final cleaning. 


1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance 

manual requirements. 

2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record 

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 

3. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's 

personnel. 

4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements 

for the Work in those Sections. 

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial 

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on 

the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final 

certifications, and similar documents. 

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to 

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar 

releases. 

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, 

final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement 

surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by 

Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's 

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, 

construction tools, and similar elements. 

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1/4




12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and 

maintenance. 

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual 

defects. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of 

request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled 

requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or 

will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by 

Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as 

incomplete is completed or corrected. 

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, 

complete the following: 

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment 

Procedures." 

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be 

completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy 

of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for 

acceptance. 

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance 

requirements. 

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 

5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, 

equipment, and systems. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, 

Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 

Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of 

construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as 

incomplete is completed or corrected. 

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) 

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by 

construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if 

necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, 

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 

3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: 

a. One paper copy, unless otherwise indicated. Architect. 





1.5 WARRANTIES 

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the 

Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is 

indicated. 

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the 

Project Manual. 

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, 

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 215-by-280-mm 

(8-1/2-by-11-inch) paper. 

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark 

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or 

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone 

number of Installer. 

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," 

Project name, and name of Contractor. 

4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal 

package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each 

item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document. 

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or 

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially 

hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 


3.1 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply 

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution 

regulations. 

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each 

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and 

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification 

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, 

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and 

other foreign substances. 





b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other 

foreign deposits. 

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured 

surface. 

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from 

Project site. 

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, 

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural 

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original 

condition. 

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, 

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 

h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; 

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 

i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. 

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. 

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 

Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. 

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or 

that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 

1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including 

mechanical and electrical nameplates. 

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. 

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign 

substances. 

m. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede 

operation or reduce longevity. 

n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains 

resulting from water exposure. 

o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed 

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. 

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and 

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply 

with requirements for new fixtures. 

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid 

Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. 






SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and 

maintenance manuals, including the following: 

1. Emergency manuals. 

2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, 

systems and equipment. 

B. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual 

requirements for the Work in those Sections. 

1.2 SUBMITTALS 

A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. 

Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 2 copies of 

each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 


2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL 

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for 

each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a 

system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents. 

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 

1. Subject matter included in manual. 

2. Name and address of Project. 

3. Name and address of Owner. 

4. Date of submittal. 

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 

6. Name and address of Architect. 

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to 

the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project 

Manual. 

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1/6




D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by 

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, 

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to 

accommodate contents, sized to hold 215-by-280-mm (8-1/2-by-11-inch) paper; with 

clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside 

covers to hold folded oversize sheets. 

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND 

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. 

Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each 

tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of 

equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification 

Section number and title of Project Manual. 

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic 

software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. 

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and 

use as foldouts. 

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled 

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in 

manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, 

and drawing locations. 

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency 

instructions, and emergency procedures. 

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include 

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component 

for fire, water leak, power failure and equipment failure. 

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, 

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for 

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. 

D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type 

of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and required 

sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS 

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in 

individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating 

procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements. 

B. Descriptions: Include the following: 





1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 

4. Equipment function. 

5. Operating characteristics. 

6. Limiting conditions. 

7. Performance curves. 

8. Engineering data and tests. 

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal 

shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and 

required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls 

as installed. 

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for 

identification. 

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. 

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and 

sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and 

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and 

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference 

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Color, pattern, and texture. 

4. Material and chemical composition. 

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection 

procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and 

maintenance, and repair instructions. 

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and 

related services. 

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include 

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, 





maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance 

service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, 

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each 

product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance 

service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation 

including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of 

parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of 

equipment: 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, 

disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions that detail essential maintenance 

procedures: 

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of 

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine 

maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with 

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local 

sources of maintenance materials and related services. 

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and 

telephone number of service agent. 

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 


3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION 

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures 

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies 

indicated. 

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care 

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance 

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment 

not part of a system. 

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include 

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each 

product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a 

tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. 

Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 





E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the 

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence 

and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings 

to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance 

manuals. 

F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation 

and maintenance documentation. 











SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record 

Documents, including the following: 

1. Record Drawings. 

2. Record Specifications. 

3. Record Product Data. 

B. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance 

manual requirements. 

C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents 

of the Work in those Sections. 


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. 

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: 

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will review 

for completeness. 

b. Final Submittal: Submit one final set of marked-up Record Prints. 

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and 

contract modifications. 

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 


2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and 

Shop Drawings. 

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies 

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, 

whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the 

marked-up Record Prints. 

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be 

difficult to identify or measure and record later. 

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1/4




b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup 

before enclosing concealed installations. 

2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing 

actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, 

show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish 

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order 

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 

B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD 

DRAWING" in a prominent location. 

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into 

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification 

on cover sheets. 

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation 

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that 

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and 

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to 

provide a record of selections made. 

4. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA 

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation 

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that 

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in 

manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 

3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS 

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous 

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file 

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 






3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE 

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project 

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as 

they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. 

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in 

the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project 

Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and 

in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to 

Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 











SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's 

personnel, including the following: 

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

B. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and 

training for products in those Sections. 


2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM 

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training for each 

system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, 

and as follows: 

B. Training Modules: For each module, include instruction for the following: 

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include system and 

equipment descriptions, operating standards, regulatory requirements, equipment 

function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, and performance curves. 

2. Documentation: Review emergency, operations, and maintenance manuals; Project 

Record Documents; identification systems; warranties and bonds; and maintenance 

service agreements. 

3. Emergencies: Include instructions on stopping; shutdown instructions; operating 

instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits; instructions on meaning of 

warnings, trouble indications, and error messages; and required sequences for electric or 

electronic systems. 

4. Operations: Include startup, break-in, control, and safety procedures; stopping and 

normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating 

instructions; operating procedures for emergencies and equipment failure; and required 

sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

5. Adjustments: Include alignments and checking, noise, vibration, economy, and efficiency 

adjustments. 

6. Troubleshooting: Include diagnostic instructions and test and inspection procedures. 

7. Maintenance: Include inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of 

cleaning, procedures for preventive and routine maintenance, and instruction on use of 

special tools. 

8. Repairs: Include diagnosis, repair, and disassembly instructions; instructions for 

identifying parts; and review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. 

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1/2





3.1 INSTRUCTION 

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain 

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires 

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. 


DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 2/2

Anderson Engineers, P.A. 

12041 – ROSEMARY BEACH OWNER’S CENTER 

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 

2. Formwork accessories. 

3. Form stripping. 

4. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. 

5. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete for the following: 

a. Foundations, footings. 

b. Slabs on grade. 

c. Equipment pads and bases. 

d. Columns and beams. 

e. Retaining walls. 

6. Concrete curing. 


1. Unit Masonry: Division 4. 


A. Unexposed Finish: A general-use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed 

concrete concealed from view after completion of construction. 

B. Exposed Finish: A general-use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and 

including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any). 


A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement of the following: 

1. Reinforcement: Comply with ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, 

arrangement of concrete reinforcement, and splices. Show construction joints. 

B. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance 

requirements specified: Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete 

operations begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been 

selected. 

1. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, standard 

deviation, and required average compressive strength (f’c) calculations. 

2. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and 

graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength (f’c). 

3. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. 

4. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 

5. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified. 

CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1



6. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all 

materials furnished under this section conform to specifications. 

7. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that chloride 

content complies with specified requirements. 

8. Submit batch tickets complying with ASTM C 685 or delivery tickets complying with ASTM 

C 94, as applicable, for each load of concrete used in the work. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the 

contract documents or of governing authorities are more stringent: 

1. ACI 301. 

2. ACI 318. 

3. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 

B. Testing Agency Services: 

1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the Architect to 

perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance. 

a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements. 

C. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. 

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths and 

other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 

1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of 

dirt or rust. 

2. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weather tight location. Maintain accurate records of 

shipment and use. 

B. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or 

other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. 

C. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. 


2.01 FORM WORK 

A. Facing Materials: 

1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound 

concrete. Exposed finish concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain-free 

final appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide materials with sufficient strength 

to resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances, and 

as follows: 

a. Plywood: PS-I "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade, mill-oiled 

and edge sealed. 




B. Form Work Accessories: 

1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfaces or 

prevent subsequent application of concrete coatings. 

2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable bolt, or 

other type which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches from surface of concrete when 

forms are removed, leaving not more that a 1 inch diameter hole in concrete surface. 

3. Fillets: Wood or plastic fillets for chamfered corners, in maximum lengths possible. 

2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS 

A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise 

indicated: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 

B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, cold-drawn steel, plain. 

C. Reinforcing Accessories: 

1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. 

2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard 

Practice". 

Class I (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to weather. 

Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed surfaces 

which will be exposed to view but not to weather. 

Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of concrete 

or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be cast against earth. 

Concrete masonry units will not be accepted. 

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 

1. Type I. 

2. Fly Ash: Not to be used. 

3. Water: Potable 

4. Gray and White cement locations as shown on Plans and Details 

B. Aggregates: 

1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. 

a. Class IN. 

b. Gradation as specified below under mix design. 

C. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by 

weight of cement are prohibited. 

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix 

components. 

E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 

2.04 GROUT MIXES FOR UNIT MASONRY 

A. Comply with ASTM C476. Use grout of consistency that will completely fill spaces intended to 

receive grout. Grout shall be 3000 psi minimum and shall be capable of passing through a 1" 

diameter pump hose. 




2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Waterstops, General: Provide waterstops at construction joints and as otherwise indicated, sized and 

configured to suit joints. 

1. Polyvinyl chloride waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 

B. Vapor Retarder: Membrane for installation beneath slabs on grade, resistant to decay when tested in 

accordance with ASTM E 154, and as follows: 

1. 6 mil polyethylene. 

C. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107. 

1. Type: Provide nonmetallic type only. 

D. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth. 

E. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 

1. Curing paper. 

2. Polyethylene film. 

3. White burlap-polyethylene sheeting. 

F 

Liquid Curing Compounds: 

1. Material - curing compounds: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type I. 

a. Non-yellowing formulation where subject to ultraviolet light. 

b. Curing and sealing compound: Where indicated, provide curing and sealing 

formulation with long-lasting finish that is resistant to chemicals, oil, grease, deicing 

salts, and abrasion. 

G. Bonding Compound: Non-redispersable acrylic bonding admixture, ASTM C 1059, Type II. 

H. Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade and class as required for project conditions. 

2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN 

A. Review: Do not begin concrete operations until proposed mix has been reviewed by the Architect. 

B. Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with recommendations of AC I 211.1. 

C. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on the 

basis of either field experience or trial mixtures as specified in ACI 301, and proportion mixes 

accordingly. If trial mixtures method is used, employ an independent testing agency acceptable to 

the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix design. 

D. Admixtures: 

1. Air-entraining admixture: Add at rate to achieve specified air content. 

a. Do not use in slabs-on-grade scheduled to receive topping, unless manufacturer of 

topping recommends use over air-entrained concrete. 

2. Water-reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability. 

3. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. 

E. Design mix to meet or exceed each requirement specified. Where more than one criterion is 

specified, the most stringent shall apply. For example, a minimum cement content or maximum 

water-cement ratio may be required in order to achieve the required strength. 

1. Specified compressive strength (f' c) (ASTM C 39): 4000 psi at 28 days. Maximum water- 




cement ratio by weight: 0.46 maximum for air-entrained concrete. Maximum slump: 4" + 1” 

2. Maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate: As recommended in ACI 211. I. 

3. Total air content (ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231): 3 percent. 

F. Mix adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may submit 

for Architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances 

such as changed project conditions, weather or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory 

test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. 

2.07 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD 

A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above that specified will be permitted for I batch in 5 consecutive 

batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used, provided proper placing and 

consolidation is obtained. 

1. No addition of water will be acceptable after initial batching of the concrete at the batching plant. 

B. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. 

2.08 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. On-Site Equipment: Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum type batch machine mixer, in 

compliance with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch minimum of 1-1/2 minutes and maximum of 5 

minutes before discharging concrete. Clean thoroughly at end of day and before changing concrete 

type. 

B. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 

94. 


3.01 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION 

A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for form work, and as herein specified. The 

contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of form work, and for its timely 

removal. 

B. Earth Forms: Hand-trim bottoms and sides of earth forms to profiles indicated on the drawings. 

Remove loose dirt before placing concrete. 

C. Design: Design and fabricate forms for easy removal, without impact, shock, or damage to concrete 

surfaces or other portions of the work. Design to support all applied loads until concrete is 

adequately cured, within allowable tolerances and deflection limits. 

D. Construction: Construct and brace form work to accurately achieve end results required by contract 

documents, with all elements properly located and free of distortion. Provide for necessary 

openings, inserts, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. 

1. Joints: Minimize form joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of concrete. 

2. Align joints symmetrically at exposed conditions. 

3. Chamfers: Provide chamfered edges and comers at exposed locations, unless specifically 




indicated otherwise on the drawings. 

4. Permanent openings: Provide openings to accommodate work of other trades, sized and 

located accurately. Securely support items built into forms; provide additional bracing at 

openings and discontinuities in form work. 

5. Temporary openings: Provide temporary openings for cleaning and inspection in most 

inconspicuous locations at base of forms, closed with tight-fitting panels designed to 

minimize appearance of joints in finished concrete work. 

E. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Comply with minimum tolerances established in ACI 117, unless 

more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. 

F. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with factory-applied nonabsorptive liner or fieldapplied 

form coating. If field-applied coating is employed, thoroughly clean and recondition form 

work and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is unacceptable. 

3.02 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION 

A. General: Place vapor retarder sheet over prepared base material, aligning longer dimension parallel 

to direction of pour and lapped 6 inches. Seal joints with appropriate tape. 

3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. 

B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which 

adversely affect bond with concrete. 

C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for 

protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Provide 

Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do not field-bend 

partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. 

1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or 

penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not permitted. 

2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than one 

full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice laps with 

tie wire. 

3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A 

Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on drawings. If construction 

joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not impair strength and will have least impact on 

appearance, as acceptable to the Architect. The surface of concrete construction joints shall be 

cleaned and laitance removed. Immediately before new concrete is placed, construction joints shall 

be wetted and standing water removed. 

1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1-1/2 inches deep. 

2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to construction joints, 

unless details specifically indicate otherwise. 

3. Waterstops: Provide waterstops as indicated, installing to form continuous, watertight dam, 

with field joints fabricated in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Control Joints: Construct contraction joints in slabs poured on grade to form panels of sizes indicated 

on drawings, but not more than 15 feet apart in either direction. 




1. Saw cuts: Form control joints by means of saw cuts one-fourth the depth of the slab, 

performed within 12 hours after slab finishing without dislodging aggregate. 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. General: Set anchorage devices and other items required for other work connected to or supported 

by cast-in-place concrete, using templates, setting drawings, and instructions from suppliers of 

items to be embedded. 

1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screeds as necessary to achieve l 

elevations indicated for finished slab surfaces. 

3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect form work, reinforcing steel, and items to 

be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. 

1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations where form coatings 

are not used. 

B. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 

1. Schedule continuous placement on concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 

2. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or component cannot be placed 

in continuous operation. 

3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. 

C. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but in no 

event greater than 24 inches. 

1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertical in freshly placed 

concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed concrete to 

ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together. 

2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of coarse 

aggregates. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally. 

D. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned 

construction joints. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded 

items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to 

Architect. 

Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges, darbies, or bull floats before 

bleed water can collect on surface. Do not work concrete further until finishing operations are 

commenced. 

3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 

A. Repairs - General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing form 

work. 

1. Remove honeycombed areas and other defective concrete down to sound concrete, cutting 

perpendicular to surface or slightly undercutting. Dampen patch location and area 

immediately surrounding it prior to applying bonding compound or patching mortar. 

2. Before bonding compound has dried, apply patching mixture matching original concrete in 

materials and mix except for omission of coarse aggregate, and using a blend of white and 

normal portland cement as necessary to achieve color match. Consolidate thoroughly and 

strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 




B. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off forms or 

other raised areas exceeding 1/4 inch height. 

C. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely 

removed and smoothed. 

1. Smooth rubbed finish: Apply to surfaces indicated no later than 24 hours after form removal. 

a. Wet concrete surfaces to be finished and rub with Carborundum brick or other 

abrasive until uniform color and texture are achieved. 

b. Do not apply separate grout mixture. 

2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls, 

horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces 

across unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specifically indicated. 

3.08 FINISHING SLAB 

A. Finishing Operations - General: 

1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 

2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R. 

3. Screeding: Strike off to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify 

conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 

4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to 

eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface 

tolerances. 

5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared 

and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4 inch indentation or weight of 

power floats without damaging flatness. 

6. Final Floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to 

consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct 

surface tolerances. 

7. Trowel Finish: All slabs that receive resilient floor coverings shall be trowel finished. 

B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the Architect before application. 

1. Apply final finishes in the locations indicated on the drawings. 

C. Float Finish: As specified above. 

D. Slab Surface Tolerances: 

1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains. 

2. Floated and trowel finishes: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 1/8 inch under 

a 10 foot straightedge. 

E. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance 

specified. 

1. Repair defects as follows: 

a. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 

b. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low 

areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. 

Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the Architect. 

2. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not 




exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective 

areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix, 

place, compact and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete. 

3. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in diameter. 

Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry pack or proprietary 

repair compound acceptable to Architect while bonding compound is still active: 

a. Dry-pack mix: one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough 

water as required for handling and placing. 

b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and 

matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely. 

3.09 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. General: 

1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot 

temperatures until concrete has cured. 

2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service conditions 

and type of applied finish in each case. 

B. Curing Period: 

1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. 

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing 

period or until forms are removed. 

1. Keep wooden or metal forms moist when exposed to heat of the sun. 

2. If forms are removed prior to completion of curing process, continue curing by one of the 

applicable methods specified. 

D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 

1. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. Place to 

protect adjacent concrete edges. Acceptable curing methods: 

a. Water ponding. 

b. Water-saturated sand. 

c. Water-fog spray. 

d. Saturated burlap: provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints. 

e. Moisture-retaining cover: Lap not less than 3-inches at edges and ends, and seal with 

waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with same tape 

or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete surface. Secure to 

avoid displacement. 

1. Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of the slab. 

2. Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when 

in service. 

3. Curing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with 

moisture-retention requirements specified, using second, immediate 

application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by 

rain. 

4. Curing and sealing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform 

with moisture-retention requirements specified, using second, immediate 

application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain. 

Apply additional coat near substantial completion to act as sealer. 

5. Use curing compounds only in locations permitted or required. Do not apply 




E. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. 

to surfaces to receive other finishes, coating, or coverings. 

F. General: Comply with recommendations of ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory 

construction. 

G. Low-Rise Construction: Extend shoring from ground to roof. 

H. Reshoring: Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence, to avoid damage to partly cured 

concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support work without excessive stress or 

deflection. 

3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Non-Load-Bearing Form Work: Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be 

damaged, forms not actually supporting weight of concrete or weight of soffit forms may be removed after 

concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours. Maintain curing and protection operations 

after form removal. 

B. Load-Bearing Form Work: Do not remove shoring and forms supporting weight of concrete, such as 

beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, until concrete has attained 75 percent of 

specified compressive strength. In addition, the contractor shall have determined that the actual 

compressive strength attained is adequate to support the weight of the concrete and superimposed 

loads. 

C. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, and longer if required, until 

concrete has attained 100 percent of specified compressive strength. In addition, the contractor shall 

have determined that the actual compressive strength attained is adequate to support the weight of 

the concrete and superimposed loads. 

D. Keep supports in place until heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. 

E. Test field-cured specimens to determine potential compressive strength of concrete for specific 

locations. 

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 

A. Fill-in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades after 

such work is in place. Place such fill-in concrete to blend with existing construction, using same mix 

and curing methods. 

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as 

indicated on drawings. Set anchor bolts at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates 

of equipment 

C. Manufacturer. 

1. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated with nonshrink grout. 

2. Use nonmetallic grout for exposed conditions, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.12 CONCRETE REPAIRS 

A. Perform cosmetic repairs of concrete surfaces as specified under concrete application. 

B. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the Architect for method and procedure, using epoxy 

bonding systems. The Architect's approval is required for repair methods using materials other than 




those specified. 

3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Concrete: Composite Sampling and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. 

1. Take samples at point of discharge. 

2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at 

point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency 

at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance 

of concrete. 

B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency changes. 

Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. 

C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength test 

performed on air-entrained concrete. 

D. Concrete Temperature: 

Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made. 

E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. 

1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each 

compressive strength required. 

2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as-delivered concrete: 

a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. 

b. Minimum frequency: 

1. One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each 

concrete class. 

2. One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or fraction thereof for each 

day's pour of each concrete class. 

3. When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests 

for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not less 

than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than five. 

3. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is required. 

4. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless other 

age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. If one specimen 

shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test result shall be the result 

of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, discard the test result and inform the 

Architect. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. 

5. Strength potential of as-delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the following 

criteria are met. 

a. No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 

psi. Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified 

compressive strength (f’c). 

b. Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds specified 

compressive strength (f'c). 

6. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action when strength 

results for field-cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for companion 

laboratory-cured specimens. 




J. Removal of forms or supports: Mold additional specimens and field-cure with concrete 

represented; test to determine strength of concrete at proposed time of form or support 

removal. 

F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and contractor within 24 

hours of test. 

1. Test reports shall contain the following data: 

a. Project name, number, and other identification. 

b. Name of concrete testing agency. 

c. Date and time of sampling. 

d. Concrete type and class. 

e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. 

f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 

2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at Architect's 

option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various locations or for 

selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for acceptance or 

rejection. 

3. The testing agency shall make additional test of in-place concrete as directed by the 

Architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics 

have not been attained. 

a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or 

tests as directed. 

b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable 

concrete has been verified. 

G. Grout: Test grout compressive strength per ASTM C 1019 for each 2000 square feet of wall area or 

portion thereof. 





SECTION 033816 - UNBONDED POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 



A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, 

detailing tendon layout and installation procedures. 

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For post-tensioning system. 

1. Sealed design calculations prepared by a qualified structural engineer indicating method 

of elongation calculation including values used for friction coefficients, anchorage seating 

loss, elastic shortening, creep, relaxation, and shrinkage. 


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. 

B. Product certificates. 

C. Mill Test Reports: For prestressing strand. 

D. Field quality-control reports. 

E. Stressing Records: Submit the same day as stressing operations. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Fabricating plant certified by PTI according to procedures set forth 

in PTI's "Manual for Certification of Plants Producing Unbonded Single Strand Tendons." 

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer whose full-time Project superintendent has 

successfully completed PTI's Level 1 - Field Fundamentals course or has equivalent verifiable 

experience and knowledge acceptable to Architect. 

1. Superintendent must receive training from post-tensioning supplier in the operation of 

stressing equipment to be used on Project. 

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

1. Testing Agency Inspector: Personnel performing field inspections and measuring 

elongations shall have successfully completed PTI's Level 1 - Field Fundamentals course 

or shall have equivalent verifiable experience and knowledge acceptable to Architect. 

UNBONDED POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 033816 - 1




A. Deliver, store, and handle post-tensioning materials according to PTI's "Field Procedures 

Manual for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons." 


2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 

"Quality Requirements," to design post-tensioned reinforcement. 

B. Structural Performance: Design cast-in-place, post-tensioned concrete reinforcement as 

indicated in this Section. Show final effective forces, tendon profiles, and nonprestressed 

reinforcement on design installation drawings. 

C. Design structure to withstand the loads indicated according to governing codes, within limits and 

under conditions indicated. 

D. Comply with ACI 318 requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

E. Fire Resistance: Design members such that thickness and concrete cover over reinforcement 

comply with fire-resistance requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

F. Fire Resistance: Design members such that thickness and concrete cover over reinforcement 

comply with the following fire-resistance requirements: 

1. Slabs: Two hours. 

2. Beam: Two hours. 

G. Deflection Limits Including Creep and Shrinkage Effects: 

1. Total Dead Load: L/600. 

2. Total Dead Plus Live Load: L/360. 

H. Closure Strips: Locate closure strips at midspan and adjust tendon forces and profiles 

accordingly. Calculate moments in spans with closure strips assuming a continuous slab. 

Provide only nonprestressed reinforcement within closure strips. Design reinforcement in 

closure strip to carry ultimate moment at midspan. 

2.2 PRESTRESSING TENDONS 

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 423.6, "Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons," 

unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 

B. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270, uncoated, seven-wire, low-relaxation, 

0.5-inch diameter strand. 

C. Post-Tensioning Coating: Compound with friction-reducing, moisture-displacing, and corrosioninhibiting 

properties; chemically stable and nonreactive with prestressing steel, nonprestressed 

reinforcement, sheathing material, and concrete. 




D. Tendon Sheathing: 

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.050 inch for polyethylene or polypropylene with a minimum 

density of 0.034 lb/cu. in. 

2. Continuous over length of tendon to provide watertight encapsulation of strand and 

between anchorages to prevent intrusion of cement paste or loss of coating for a nonencapsulated 

system. 

E. Anchorage Device and Coupler Assembly: Assembly of strand, wedges, and anchorage device 

or coupler complying with static and fatigue testing requirements and capable of developing 95 

percent of actual breaking strength of strand. 

F. Encapsulation System: Watertight encapsulation of prestressing strand consisting of the 

following: 

1. Wedge-Cavity Caps: Attached to anchorages with a positive mechanical connection and 

completely filled with post-tensioning coating. 

2. Sleeves: Attached to anchorage device with positive mechanical connection; overlapped 

a minimum of 4 inches with sheathing and completely filled with post-tensioning coating. 

2.3 NONPRESTRESSED STEEL BARS 

A. Support Bars, Reinforcing Bars, Hairpins: 

1. Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 

2. Low-Alloy Steel: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. 

B. Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening 

tendons and tendon support bars in place. Manufacture bar supports, according to CRSI's 

"Manual of Standard Practice," from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater 

compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 

1. For uncoated bars, use all-plastic bar supports. 

2.4 ACCESSORIES 

A. Pocket Formers: Capable of completely sealing wedge cavity; sized to provide the required 

cover over the anchorage and allow access for cutting strand tail. 

B. Anchorage Fasteners: Stainless steel nails, wires, and screws used to attach anchorage 

devices to formwork. 

C. Sheathing Repair Tape: Elastic, self-adhesive, moistureproof tape with minimum width of 2 

inches, in contrasting color to tendon sheathing; nonreactive with sheathing, coating, or 

prestressing steel. 

2.5 PATCHING MATERIAL 

A. One-component, polymer-modified, premixed patching material containing selected silica 

aggregates and portland cement, suitable for vertical and overhead applications. Do not use 

material containing chlorides or other chemicals known to be deleterious to prestressing steel or 

material that is reactive with prestressing steel, anchorage device material, or concrete. 





3.1 FORMWORK 

A. Provide formwork for post-tensioned elements as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place 

Concrete." Design formwork to support load redistribution that may occur during stressing 

operation. Ensure that formwork does not restrain elastic shortening, camber, or deflection 

resulting from application of prestressing force. 

B. Do not remove forms supporting post-tensioned elements until tendons have been fully stressed 

and elongations have been approved by Architect. 

C. Do not place concrete in supported floors until tendons on supporting floors have been stressed 

and elongations have been approved by Architect. 

3.2 NONPRESTRESSED STEEL REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT 

A. Placement of nonprestressed steel reinforcement is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place 

Concrete." Coordinate placement of nonprestressed steel reinforcement with installation of 

post-tensioning tendons. 

3.3 TENDON INSTALLATION 

A. Install tendons according to installation drawings and procedures stated in PTI's "Field 

Procedures Manual for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons." 

1. Tolerances: Comply with tolerances in ACI 423.6 for beams and slabs. 

B. Tendon Supports: Provide continuous slab bolsters or bars supported on individual high chairs 

spaced at a maximum of 42 inches o.c. to ensure tendons remain in their designated positions 

during construction operations and concrete placement. 

1. Support tendons as required to provide profiles shown on installation drawings. Position 

supports at high and low points and at intervals not exceeding 48 inches. Ensure that 

tendon profiles between high and low points are smooth parabolic curves. 

2. Attach tendons to supporting chairs and reinforcement without damaging tendon 

sheathing. 

3. Support slab tendons independent of beam reinforcement. 

C. Maintain tendon profile within maximum allowable deviations from design profile as follows: 

1. 1/4 inch for member depth less than or equal to 8 inches. 

2. 3/8 inch for member depth greater than 8 inches and less than or equal to 24 inches. 

3. 1/2 inch (13 mm) for member depth greater than 24 inches. 

D. Maintain minimum radius of curvature of 480-strand diameters for lateral deviations to avoid 

openings, ducts, and embedded items. Maintain a minimum of 2 inches of separation between 

tendons at locations of curvature. 

E. Limit tendon bundles to five tendons. Do not twist or entwine tendons within a bundle. Maintain 

a minimum distance of 12 inches between center of adjacent bundles. 




F. If tendon locations conflict with nonprestressed reinforcement or embedded items, tendon 

placement governs. Obtain Architect's approval before relocating tendons or tendon 

anchorages that interfere with one another. 

G. Deviations in horizontal spacing and location of slab tendons are permitted when required to 

avoid openings and inserts. 

H. Installation of Anchorage Devices: 

1. Place anchorage devices at locations shown on approved installation drawings. 

2. Do not switch fixed- and stressing-end anchorage locations. 

3. Attach pocket formers, intermediate anchorage devices, and stressing-end anchorage 

devices securely to bulkhead forms. Install stressing-end and intermediate anchorage 

devices perpendicular to tendon axis. 

4. Install tendons straight, without vertical or horizontal curvature, for a minimum of 12 

inches behind stressing-end and intermediate anchorages. 

5. Embed intermediate anchorage devices at construction joints in first concrete placed at 

joint. 

6. Minimum splice length in reinforcing bars at anchorages is 24 inches. Stagger splices a 

minimum of 60 inches. 

7. Place fixed-end anchorage devices in formwork at locations shown on installation 

drawings. Support anchorages firmly to avoid movement during concrete placement. 

8. Remove loose caps on fixed-end anchorages, refill with post-tensioning coating, and reattach 

caps to achieve a watertight enclosure. 

I. Maintain minimum concrete cover according to ACI 423.6. 

J. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between tendons and openings. 

K. Prior to concrete placement, mark tendon locations on formwork with spray paint. 

L. Do not install sleeves within 36 inches of anchorages after tendon layout has been inspected. 

M. Do not install conduit, pipe, or embeds requiring movement of tendons after tendon layout has 

been inspected. 

N. Do not use couplers unless location has been approved by Architect. 

3.4 SHEATHING INSPECTION AND REPAIR 

A. Inspect sheathing for damage after installing tendons. Repair damaged areas by restoring posttensioning 

coating and repairing or replacing tendon sheathing. 

1. Ensure that sheathing is watertight and there are no air voids. 

2. Follow tape repair procedures in PTI's "Field Procedures Manual for Unbonded Single 

Strand Tendons." 

B. Maximum length of exposed strand behind anchorages is as follows: 

1. Fixed End: 12 inches. 

2. Intermediate and Stressing End: 

1 inch. 

a. Cover exposed strand with sheathing repair tape to prevent contact with concrete. 




C. Immediately remove and replace tendons that have damaged strand. 

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Place concrete as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Ensure compaction of 

concrete around anchorages. 

B. Ensure that position of tendon and nonprestressed-steel reinforcement does not change during 

concrete placement. Reposition tendons and nonprestressed-steel reinforcement moved during 

concrete placement to original location. 

C. Ensure that method of concrete placement does not damage tendon sheathing. Do not support 

pump lines, chutes, or other concrete-placing equipment on tendons. 

3.6 TENDON STRESSING 

A. Calibrate stressing jacks and gages at start of project and at least every six months thereafter. 

Keep copies of calibration certificates for each jack-and-gage pair on Project site that are 

available for inspection. Exercise care in handling stressing equipment to ensure that proper 

calibration is maintained. 

B. Stress tendons only under supervision of a qualified post-tensioning superintendent. 

C. Do not begin stressing operations until concrete strength has reached 3000 psi as indicated by 

compression tests of field-cured cylinders. 

D. Complete stressing within 96 hours of concrete placement. 

E. If concrete has not reached required strength, obtain Architect's approval to partially stress 

tendons and delay final stressing until concrete has reached required strength. 

F. If detensioning and restressing of tendon is required, discard wedges used in original stressing 

and provide new wedges. 

G. Mark and measure elongations according to PTI's "Field Procedures Manual for Unbonded 

Single Strand Tendons." Measure elongations to closest 1/8 inch. 

H. Submit stressing records within one day of completion of stressing. If discrepancies between 

measured and calculated elongations exceed plus or minus 7 percent, resolve these 

discrepancies to satisfaction of Architect. 

I. Prestressing will be considered acceptable if gage pressures shown on stressing record 

correspond to required stressing force and calculated and measured elongations agree within 7 

percent. 

J. If measured elongations deviate from calculated elongations by more than 7 percent, additional 

testing, restressing, strengthening, or replacing of affected elements may be required. 

3.7 TENDON FINISHING 

A. Do not cut strand tails or cover anchorages until stressing records have been reviewed and 

approved by Architect. 




B. Cut strand tails as soon as possible after approval of elongations. 

C. Install caps and sleeves on intermediate anchorages within one day of stressing. 

D. Cut strand tails and install caps on stressing-end anchorages within one day of Architect's 

acceptance of elongations. 

E. Patch stressing pockets within one day of cutting strand tail. Clean inside surface of pocket to 

remove laitance or post-tensioning coating before installing patch material. Finish patch material 

flush with adjacent concrete. 

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

1. Before concrete placement, testing agency will inspect the following for compliance with 

post-tensioning installation drawings and the Contract Documents: 

a. Location and number of tendons. 

b. Tendon profiles and cover. 

c. Installation of backup bars, hairpins, and other nonprestressed reinforcement 

shown on post-tensioning installation drawings. 

d. Installation of pocket formers and anchorage devices. 

e. Repair of damaged sheathing. 

f. Connections between sheathing and anchorage devices. 

2. Testing agency will record tendon elongations during stressing. 

3. Testing agency will immediately report deviations from the Contract Documents to 

Architect. 

3.9 PROTECTION 

A. Do not expose tendons to electric ground currents, welding sparks, or temperatures that would 

degrade components. 

B. Protect exposed components within one workday of their exposure during installation. 

C. Prevent water from entering tendons during installation and stressing. 

D. Provide weather protection to stressing-end anchorages if strand tails are not cut within 10 days 

of stressing the tendons. 

3.10 REPAIRS 

A. Submit repair procedure to Architect for evaluation and approval. 

B. Do not proceed with repairs requiring removal of concrete unless authorized in writing by 

Architect. 





THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY 




SECTION 034100 - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes precast structural concrete. 

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at to be scheduled by Architect following 

contract award. 



B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. 

C. Shop Drawings: 

1. Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings, 

support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. 

2. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units, including 

connections at member ends and to adjoining construction. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with 

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the 

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 


A. Qualification Data: For installer and fabricator. 

B. Welding certificates. 

C. Material certificates. 

D. Material Test Reports: For aggregates. 

E. Source quality-control reports. 

F. Field quality-control reports. 

PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 1




A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural 

concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes preparation of 

Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 

1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant as follows: 

a. Group C, Category C2 - Prestressed Hollowcore and Repetitively Produced 

Products 

B. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures, testing requirements, and qualitycontrol 

recommendations for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for 

Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products." 

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." 


A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to 

other construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, 

instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. 




"Quality Requirements," to design precast structural concrete units. 

B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and with design recommendations in PCI MNL 120, 

"PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of precast 

structural concrete units indicated. 

C. Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall withstand 

design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. 

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615, Grade 60 

assembled with clips. 

deformed bars, 

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from galvanized-steel 

wire into flat sheets. 




E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M or ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, 

flat sheet. 

F. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other 

devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in 

place according to PCI MNL 116. 

2.3 PRESTRESSING TENDONS 

A. Strand: ASTM A 416, Grade 270 , uncoated, seven-wire, low-relaxation strand. 

1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with post-tensioning coating complying with 

ACI 423.7 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI 423.7. 

Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies. 

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: 

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 

2. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N. 

3. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 

4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 

5. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag 

cement. 

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33/C 33M, with 

coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type 

of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project. 

D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength 

of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 116. 

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other 

required admixtures. 

F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to 

not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of 

admixture. 

2.5 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS 

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, Grade 1010 through 1020, cold finished, 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of 

PCI MNL 116. 

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C. 




D. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 or Grade 35028. 

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30. 

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M. 

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B or Grade C. 

H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65. 

I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496/A 496M or ASTM A 706/A 706M. 

J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A ; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; 

carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563; and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844. 

K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Type 1, heavy hex steel structural 

bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563; and hardened carbon-steel washers, 

ASTM F 436. 

1. Do not zinc coat ASTM A 490 bolts. 

L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for 

galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or 

ASTM A 153/A 153M 

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less 

than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC- 

Paint 20. 

M. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized-steel items, except those surfaces to 

be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3, and shop apply lead- and 

chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79 

SSPC-Paint 25 according to SSPC-PA 1. 

2.6 BEARING PADS 

A. Provide bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended by precast 

fabricator for application. 

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand, 

ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by volume, 

with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble chloride ion content 

less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. 

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout 

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing 

and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade A for drypack and 

Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute 

working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement 

when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. 




C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, 

grade, and class to suit requirements. 

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required. 

1. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed 

to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not 

less than 40 percent. 

2. Limit use of fly ash to 20 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and ground 

granulated blast-furnace slag to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; metakaolin and 

silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified 

precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option. 

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by 

ACI 318 or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to ASTM C 1218. 

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion by either laboratory trial batch or field test data 

methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight 

concrete with the following properties: 

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi. 

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 

E. Water Absorption: Limit water absorption to 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested 

according to ASTM C 642, except for boiling requirement. 

F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of 

placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116. 

G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

H. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if characteristics 

of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 

2.9 FABRICATION 

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage 

hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. 

Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting 

operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement 

or concrete placement. 

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding." 

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, 

cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to 

supporting and adjacent construction. 




C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as 

indicated on the Contract Drawings. 

D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or 

prestressing strand without Architect's approval. 

E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and 

supporting reinforcement. 

F. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection 

stresses and specified in-place loads. 

G. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or posttensioning 

methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116. 

H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing, 

transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. 

I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from 

forming in precast concrete units. 

J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by vibration without dislocating or damaging 

reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air voids 

on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116. 

K. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement. 

L. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with 

permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or 

permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that does 

not show in finished structure. 

M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or 

by accelerated heat curing using live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until 

compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on 

performance or appearance of final product. 

N. Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, 

including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet 

requirements in PCI MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval. 

2.10 FABRICATION TOLERANCES 

A. Fabricate precast structural concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each 

finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product dimension tolerances as well as position 

tolerances for cast-in items. 

2.11 COMMERCIAL FINISHES 

A. Commercial Grade: Remove fins and protrusions larger than 1/8 inch and fill holes larger than 

1/2 inch. Rub or grind ragged edges. Faces must have true, well-defined surfaces. Air holes, 

water marks, and color variations are permitted. Limit form joint offsets to 3/16 inch. 




B. Screed or float finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating 

screeds to a uniform finish. Hand screed at projections. Normal color variations, minor 

indentations, minor chips, and spalls are permitted. Major imperfections, honeycombing, or 

defects are not permitted. 

C. Smooth, steel trowel finish unformed surfaces. Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level with 

straightedge, float, and trowel to a smooth, uniform finish. 

D. Apply roughened surface finish according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M) to precast concrete units that 

receive concrete topping after installation. 

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MNL 116 requirements 

and ASTM C 1610/C 1610M, ASTM C 1611/C 1611M, ASTM C 1621/C 1621M, and 

ASTM C 1712/C 1712M. 

B. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with 

requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range. 

Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval. 



A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast 

structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials. 

B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. 

Provide temporary structural framing, shoring, and bracing as required to maintain position, 

stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are complete. 

1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection 

progresses. 

2. Remove projecting lifting devices and use plastic patch caps or sand-cement grout to fill 

voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when 

recess is exposed. 

3. For hollow-core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align voids 

between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs. 

C. Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as 

otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as 

soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed. 

D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of Architect. 

E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to 

precast, prestressed concrete units. 

F. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M for 

welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting 

welding work. 




G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent 

loosening of nuts after final adjustment. 

H. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections and joints and open 

spaces at keyways, connections, and joints where required or indicated on Shop Drawings. 

Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces with 

stiff dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. 

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding 

the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135. 

B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other method 

recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect. 


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special 

inspections: 

1. Erection of precast structural concrete members. 

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

C. Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E 165 or to ASTM E 709 and 

ASTM E 1444. High-strength bolted connections are subject to inspections. 

D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. 

E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply 

with specified requirements. 

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine 

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

G. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.4 REPAIRS 

A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect. 

1. Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and 

appearance of units have not been impaired. 

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and 

uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between 

original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 

feet. 

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to 

ASTM A 780/A 780M. 




D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop 

primer. 

E. Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or 

when repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete 

surfaces and adjacent materials immediately. 

B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint 

treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's 

written recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning 

operations. 

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of 

exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials. 





THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY 




SECTION 042000 - CONCRETE MASONRY 


1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Conform to Division 1, Section 04000 and other sections of this division. 

1.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 

A. Florida Building Code - latest edition adopted in building area. 

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530-05 / ASCE 5-99 / TMS 402-99). 

Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530-02 / ASCE 6-99 / TMS 602-99). 


2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS 

A. Refer to Section 04000/Masonry, General. 

2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 


2.03 MASONRY WALL CLEANERS 


2.04 MASONRY WALL CONTROL EXPANSION JOINTS 


2.05 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. STANDARD WEIGHT CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

1. Conform to ASTM C90-01a, grade "N", Type II, 8" x 16" and 12” x 16” modular units, thickness 

as indicated on the drawings, minimum 1" face shells. Units 8" or more thick must have 

minimum 1 1/4" face shells. Aggregate is to be gravel, air-cooled blast furnace slag, or crushed 

stone. Units are to be acceptable visually, structurally, and free from undesirable defects 

resulting from either manufacturer or handling, as judged by ARCHITECT. 

The design compressive strength of the masonry, f'm = 1500 psi minimum (1900 PSI on net 

area). 

2. Units which have not been subjected to an approved method of steam curing must be stored for 

30 days prior to use. 

3. Sound transmission loss through 4" unpainted unplastered wall, must not measure less than 

36 decibels. 

4. Linear drying shrinkage must not be greater than 0.04% when tested as prescribed by National 

Bureau of Standards. 

5. Moisture content at time of delivery must not exceed 75% of relative humidity, as measured by 

approved methods of Portland Cement Association. 

6. Standard brick sized units are to be solid, but otherwise conform to these paragraphs. 

B. ACCESSORY UNITS 

1. 8" x 16" x 8" thick header block at locations indicated. 

2. 8" x 16" knock out cut-lintel units, thickness as indicated. 

CONCRETE MASONRY 042000-1



3. Furnish regular corner, half, and half corner units; and all lintel and half block units as required 

by conditions shown on architectural and structural drawings. 

C. CUSTOM MASONRY UNITS 

1. A1 Block Corporation, Unit No. 377 

2. Screen Wall Decorative Unit, nominal 12” x 12” x 4” thick 

3. Color: White 


A. Refer to Sections 03000/Concrete, General and 03300/Cast-In-Place Concrete. 

2.07 MORTAR PREPARATION 

A. Conform to ASTM C270 for procedures. Proportion as Florida Building Code, Type N, for concrete 

masonry, use a one bag mix as follows: 

3 bags high strength masonry cement 

13.5 – 5 gallon buckets sand. 

2.08 PRECAST LINTELS 

A. High strength precast and pre-stressed concrete lintels designed to be used unfilled or filled to form a 

composite reinforced concrete beam using concrete masonry units equal to 'Cast-Crete'. 


3.01 GENERAL 


B. Conform to referenced codes. 

C. No wetting of concrete masonry units is permitted. All openings in walls to have concrete-filled reinforced 

lintels, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 

D. Refer to Section 04000/Masonry, General for sample panel requirement. 

3.02 COURSING AND JOINTING 

A. Concrete Masonry - Lay all units plumb and true to line, with uniform 3/8" joints, and in running bond. 

Joints wider than 3/8" will be rejected. 

Lay to course out at 8 inch centers. 

B. Strike all joints flush, after mortar has partially set, and sack or float walls head joints to give smooth 

uniform appearance and tool all horizontal joints concave where walls are to be left exposed. At stucco 

or hard tile locations delete tooling of joints. 

3.03 LAYING MASONRY UNITS 

A. For bonding masonry to concrete foundation or floor slabs, concrete to be clean with laitance removed 

and aggregate exposed. 

B. Lay starting joint with full mortar coverage on the joint; except that areas where grout occurs are to be 

free of mortar so that grout will contact concrete. 




C. Units shall be laid to preserve vertical continuity of cells to be filled. The vertical alignment shall be 

sufficient to maintain a clean, unobstructed flue measuring not less than 3"x3". Place no units or cut 

pieces of masonry less than 4" nominal. 

D. In placing mortar in horizontal joints, completely cover the face shells of each unit with mortar. Solidly fill 

all head joints to the thickness of the face shell and shove units tightly in place. Solidly bed in mortar all 

head and cross web bed joints adjacent to cells to be grouted to prevent leakage of mortar. 

E. Lay designated walls in two separate wythes, with insulated cavity as indicated. 

F. Anchor and bond intersecting masonry walls with 50% masonry bond, except as noted otherwise on 

drawings. 

G. Install precast and/or composite steel lintels over all openings. Set lintels in place with joints pointed to 

match adjacent work. Build in lintels, reinforce and fill with structural concrete grout as work progresses. 

1. Steel lintels shall be provided with 3" minimum structural bearing each side of openings. 

2. Pre-cast concrete lintels shall be provided with 8" minimum structural bearing each side of 

openings. 

3. Typical steel and cut masonry lintels, even if not shown on structural or architectural drawings, 

shall be reinforced with a minimum of 1 #5 bar continuous (extend 12" minimum each end) and 

grouted solid. 

4. Concrete masonry work shall not proceed beyond the elevation of door and window headers 

until all vertical reinforced cells and reinforced horizontal lintels have been grouted. 

H. At hard tile locations take extra care in laying units such that wall will be suitable for thinset tile installation 

directly to wall. Grind any unevenness judged unacceptable by ARCHITECT. 

I. Install wall control/expansion joints at 20 ft. o.c. and/or as shown and detailed on 

architectural/engineering drawings. Refer to Sections 04000/Masonry, General and 07920/Sealants, 

Caulking and Seals for additional requirements. 

3.04 CUTTING 

A. Do all cutting of block with carborundum or equivalent saw. To facilitate proper coursing, half blocks may 

be used to reduce amount of cutting. No masonry will be permitted to be used if not cut properly. 

Masonry broken by "blows" will be replaced, even if found after the wall has been completed. 

3.05 PLACING STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. Reinforcing steel to be straight, except for bends around corners and as detailed otherwise on drawings. 

Lap reinforcing steel 48 bar diameters minimum. Place vertical bars in exact center of cells, or as 

otherwise indicated, and hold in position at top and bottom and at intervals not to exceed 96 bar 

diameters. Vertical cavity rebar to be run in maximum possible lengths, 5'-0" minimum, using low lift 

grouting procedures. 

B. Completely embed joint reinforcement in mortar or grout. Lap splices 6 inches minimum at all locations. 

C. Lap dowels in footings to vertical steel in masonry columns by placing in aligned cells, then grouting cells 

to obtain bonded lap between wall and footings. 

D. Reinforce and grout all reinforced horizontal block courses, as wall is built-up. 

3.06 DOUBLE WYTHE MASONRY CAVITY WALL INSULATION 




A. Refer to Section 07210/Thermal and Sound Insulation. 

3.07 PLACING GROUT 

A. Insure all walls are cured minimum of three (3) days, and are solid, or braced against movement, during 

grouting. No one is to "walk" the walls. Notify ARCHITECT minimum of 24 hours or one full working day 

before start of each grouting operation. 

B. CONTRACTOR is to use only low-lift grouting procedure unless otherwise authorized by ARCHITECT 

and OWNER. 

1. Grout lifts that exceed 5'-0" must have prior approval of the OWNER. Contractor shall neatly 

saw-cut cleanout/inspection holes or provide manufacturered inspection blocks at the bottom of 

all reinforced vertical cells for grout lifts greater than 5'-0". 

C. Grouting of reinforced vertical cells shall occur at intervals to allow grouting of all composite steel and/or 

precast lintels. Concrete masonry shall not be installed above lintels prior to grouting of all lintels. 

D. Consolidate all grout at time of pouring by puddling or vibrating and then reconsolidate by again puddling 

later before plasticity is lost. Stop grout pour 1 1/2" below top unit to form construction joint for 

subsequent pours. Neatly sawcut and provide cleanout/inspection hole at the bottom of all cells to be 

filled with grout when pour, if authorized, exceeds 5'-0" in height. 

E. CONTRACTOR has sole responsibility of completing masonry and grouting operations necessary to 

construct a sound load-bearing crack-free wall. 

F. Properly cure grout placed in horizontal reinforced precast concrete lintels minimum seven (7) days. 

3.08 All masonry walls, if not receiving a formed and poured concrete beam at top and even if not shown on 

structural or architectural drawings, are to receive, as a minimum, a top knockout lintel block course 

reinforced with 1 #5 bar continuous and filled with concrete grout. 

3.09 WATERPROOFING 

A. Refer to Division 7 for waterproof coating installed over concrete and masonry surfaces behind face 

veneer and elsewhere. 

B. Masonry CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing a uniformly regular surface prior to application of 

coating, with full and tight joints between concrete block units and around all brick ties or other embedded 

items. Remove projecting mortar and fill all joints and voids. 

3.10 WALL FLASHING 

A. Refer to Section 04000/Masonry, General for installation of wall flashings. 

3.11 POINTING AND CLEANING 







SECTION 04 72 00 - CAST STONE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cast stone trim, including the following: 

a. Coping. 

b. Wall Caps. 

c. Other hardscape features 


A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone. 


A. Product Data: Include dimensions of individual components. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include 

dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. 

C. Samples: For each color and texture of cast stone required. 

D. Colored Mortar Samples: For each mortar color required. 

E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 

F. Material Test Reports. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those 

indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. 

1. Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute. 

B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including 

color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source of 

producer for each aggregate. 


A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need for on-site 

storage and to avoid delaying the Work. 


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice 

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction 

requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ace 6/TMS 602. 

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 

deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but not less than 

7 days after completing cleaning. 

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

CAST STONE 04 72 00 - 1





2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following. 

1. Advanced Cast Stone, Inc. 

2. Architectural Cast Stone Corp. 

3. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 

2.2 CAST STONE UNITS 

A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast 

method. 

1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 

3. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Cure units by one of the following methods: 

1. Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F (41 deg C) or 

above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours. 

2. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 

percent relative humidity for 24 hours. 

3. Cure units to comply with one of the following: 

a. Not less than 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) or above. 

b. Not less than 6 days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F (16 deg C) or above. 

c. Not less than 7 days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above. 

d. Not less than 8 days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) or above. 

C. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. 

D. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 


A. Anchors and Dowels: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel 

complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666. 

B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner 

complying with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" and approved 

for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on 

cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. 

2.4 MORTAR 

A. Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar materials and mixes. 

1. For setting mortar, use Type S. 

2. For pointing mortar, use Type N. 

3. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. 


A. Employ an independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to 

ASTM C 1364. 

CAST STONE 04 72 00 - 2






A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR 

A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry 

Assemblies.” 

B Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Set units with joints 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) wide. 

2. Install anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments necessary to secure units in 

place. 

3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 

4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 

5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 

6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to 

receive sealant. 

7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. 

C. Hand rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch (19). Rake joints 

to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess 

mortar as joints are raked. Do not use drills or power tools for raking out existing joints. 

D. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (10mm). 

Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next 

layer. 

E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint 

thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 

Keep joints free of mortal and other rigid materials. 

G. Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated 

to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.” 

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 

A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 

mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm 

in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches (3 mm in 

900 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. 

D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with 

adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 

mm) , except due to warpage of units. 

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved 

Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 

1. Replace units in a manner that shows no evidence of replacement. 

B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 

1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 

CAST STONE 04 72 00 - 3




C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone to comply 

with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." 


CAST STONE 04 72 00 - 4




SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 


1. Load-bearing soffit framing. 


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory. 

B. LEED Submittals: 

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation 

indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. 

Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 

C. Shop Drawings: 

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; 

fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, 

bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining 

work. 


A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency. 

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, 

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 




following 

1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 

2. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 

3. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. 

4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 

5. Craco Mfg., Inc. 

6. Custom Stud Inc. 

7. Design Shapes in Steel. 

8. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. 

9. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1




10. MarinoWARE. 

11. MBA Building Supplies, Inc. 

12. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company. 

13. Olmar Supply, Inc. 

14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 

15. SCAFCO Corporation. 

16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 

17. State Building Products, Inc. 

18. Steel Construction Systems. 

19. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 

20. Steel Structural Systems. 

21. Steeler, Inc. 

22. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 

23. Telling Industries, LLC. 

24. United Metal Products, Inc. 

25. United Steel Manufacturing. 


A. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply 

with AISI S100 and AISI S200. 

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL 

1. Grade: [ST33H 

2. Coating: G90 

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc 

coated, of grade and coating as follows: 

1. Grade: [33 (230)] 

2. Coating: [ G90 (Z275)]. 

2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING 

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, 

with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) ] 

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) 

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, 

with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs. 

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and 

downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to 

stud web. 





1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 

the following 

a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 

b. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. 

c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. 

d. MarinoWARE. 

e. SCAFCO Corporation. 

f. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 

g. Steeler, Inc. 

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES 

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural 

Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. 

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration. 

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS 

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to 

ASTM A 123/A 123M. 

B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or 

strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or 

equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified 

testing agency. 

C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated 

from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC- 

ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 

conducted by a qualified testing agency. 

D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, 

steel drill screws. 

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. 

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. 

Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for 

placement and hydration. 

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout 

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and 





plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid 

consistency and 30-minute working time. 

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed 

steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims. 



A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and 

the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a 

uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. 

B. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of 

foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field 

assembled. 

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written 

instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

C. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with 

connections securely fastened. 

D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. 

E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in 

intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, 

undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent 

connections to framing are secured. 

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame 

both sides of joints. 

G. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing 

members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are 

inaccessible on completion of framing work. 

H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved 

or standard punched openings. 

I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a 

maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 





1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from 

plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of 

sheathing or other finishing materials. 

3.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION 

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to 

supporting structure as indicated. 

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as 

follows: 

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm) 

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or 

warped surfaces and similar requirements. 

3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and 

installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and 


B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and 

Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time 

of Substantial Completion. 










SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 

2. Shelf angles. 

3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 

4. Steel weld plates and angles. 

5. Metal bollards. 

6. Loose steel lintels. 

7. Metal ladder 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Grout. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their 

connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 

C. Templates: For anchors and bolts. 


2.1 METALS 

A. All material in the exterior walls and exposed to the weather shall be galvanized, 

unless noted otherwise. 

B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. 

C. Ferrous Metals: 

1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 

3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is 

indicated or required by structural loads. 

4. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels complying with MFMA-3, 1-5/8 by 

1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). Channels made from galvanized steel complying with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 

0.079-inch (2-mm) nominal thickness. 

5. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by 

structural loads. 

2.2 FASTENERS 

A. General: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and at exterior walls. Select 

fasteners for grade, and class required. 

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either 

ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and 

shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1





A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal modified alkyd primer 

complying with MPI #79, as indicated in Division 09 Section “Exterior Painting” for the metal 

bollards. Refer to Division 09 Section “High Performance Coating” for all exterior and exposed 

steel. 

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds 

in steel. 

C. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous 

grout complying with ASTM C 1107. 

D. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in- 

Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day 

compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) , unless otherwise indicated. 


A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that 

maintain structural value of joined pieces. 

1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. 

Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 

2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize 

distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion 

without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds 

smooth and blended. 

3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed 

fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to 

exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 

5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with 

integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 

B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other 

Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars 

of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar 

items. 

C. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated 

for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. 

1. Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanize, unless noted otherwise. 

D. Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate 

with horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 

inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 

1. Shelf Angles in Exterior Walls: Galvanize, unless noted otherwise. 

2. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to 

cast-in-place concrete. 

E. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items 

bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. 

F. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 

G. Metal Ladders: 

1. General: Provide ladder in one piece but no more then 2 sections. Ladder shall be 

designed and approved through shop drawings. Ladder shall be designed for parapet 

wall access to roof with over rail extension and steps on both sides. Ladder should 

extend from wall 8-inches as indicated on the drawings. 

2. Side rails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12.7-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased 

edges. Space side rails 24 inches apart, as indicated on the drawings. 





3. Steel Ladder Construction: Flat bar side rails, with 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bar 

rungs fitted in centerline of side rails, plug-welded, and ground smooth on outer rail 

faces. 

4. Exterior Steel Ladders: Galvanize. 

5. Finish: Refer to Division 09 Section “Exterior Painting” for field finishing. 

2.5 FINISHES 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after 

assembly. 

B. Steel and Iron Finishes: 

1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or 

ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. 

2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with 

requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal 

fabrications: 

a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC- 

SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 

3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except 

those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on 

fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification 

No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. 

C. Refer to Division 09 Section “High Performance Coatings,” for exterior painted finishes. 



A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set 

metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 

1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as 

exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of 

exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be 

fastened to in-place construction. 

3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into 

concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. 

After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack 

solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. 

C. Bollards: 

1. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for 

consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. Prior to 

installing bollards coordinate with bank equipment size. 

D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 

1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch 

up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and 

repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 











SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Stainless-steel pipe and tube railings. 



A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 

2. Railing brackets. 

3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the 

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 


A. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing 

agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 



A. Stainless-Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the 

Work include the following: 

a. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. 

b. Stainless Fabricators, Inc. 

c. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc; Div. of Kane Manufacturing.. 

d. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. 

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1




e. Wagner, R & B, Inc. 



"Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction. 

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand 

the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under 

conditions indicated: 

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Infill of Guards: 

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. 

(0.093 sq. m) . 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2.3 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as 

supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded 

hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage] and that provides 1-1/2-inch 

(38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. 

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL 

A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304 

B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304 

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20. 

D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 

2.5 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide the following: 

1. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 





2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 

(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 

(ASTM F 836M) . 


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy 

welded. 

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. 

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 

complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by 

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 


A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 

approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on 

exposed surfaces. 

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings 

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 

resistance of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness 

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 

D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. 

Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 

E. Form changes in direction by bending. 

F. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each 

repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend 

without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. 

G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. 

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, 

and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 





1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant 

fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural 

supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 

2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES 

A. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. 



A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines 

and levels and free of rack. 

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished 

after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means 

without further cutting or fitting. 

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m) . 

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel 

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 

mm in 3.5 m) . 

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals 

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in 

contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals. 

3.2 ANCHORING POSTS 

A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted 

into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with [nonshrink, nonmetallic grout] 

[or] [anchoring cement], mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's 

written instructions. 

B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than 

OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill 

annular space between post and concrete with [nonshrink, nonmetallic grout] [or] [anchoring 

cement], mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by 

conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members. 





3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS 

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets[, except where end flanges are used]. Locate 

brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 

B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or 

lag bolts. 

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 

3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between 

studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 

4. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to 

concealed steel reinforcements. 

5. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or 

through concealed steel reinforcements. 


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop 

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair 

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. 










SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Framing with dimension lumber. (Stage Framing) 

2. Framing with dimension lumber. (Cabana Framing) 

3. Wood blocking and nailers. 

4. Plywood backing panels. 


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. 

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements 


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 

2. Power-driven fasteners. 

3. Powder-actuated fasteners. 

4. Expansion anchors. 

5. Metal framing anchors. 


2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on 

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade 

compliance issued by grading agency. 

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) 

thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless 

otherwise indicated. 

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1




2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER 

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior 

construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in 

contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground]. 

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no 

arsenic or chromium. 

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use 

material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board 

of Review. 

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar 

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry 

or concrete. 

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior 

masonry or concrete walls. 

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in 

crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other 

construction, including the following: 

1. Blocking. 

2. Nailers. 

3. Stage Floor Framing 

4. Cants. 

5. Furring. 

6. Grounds. 

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any 

of the following species and grades: 

1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 

2. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 

3. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 

4. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. 





2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other 

construction, including the following: 

1. Cabana Framing: 

B. Grade: Premium 

C. Wood Species: Ipe, 

D. Finish: Apply Ipe Oil to all surfaces. 

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS 

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, 

not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. 

2.6 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in 

this article for material and manufacture. 

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative 

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating 

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 

C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); 

with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS 

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings 

B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by 

manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated 



A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and 

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other 

construction. 





B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame 

Construction," unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with 


D. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing 

agency exposed to view. 

E. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written 

instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. 

F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated 

lumber. 

H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install 

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 

I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, 

complying with the following: 

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), 

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two- 

Family Dwellings. 






SECTION 061516 - WOOD ROOF DECKING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes solid-sawn wood roof decking, 




2.1 WOOD ROOF DECKING, GENERAL 

A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies 

certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 

2.2 SOLID-SAWN WOOD ROOF DECKING 

A. Standard for Solid-Sawn Wood Roof Decking: Comply with AITC 112. 

B. Roof Decking Species: Ipe 

C. Roof Decking Nominal Size: 2 by 6. 

D. Roof Decking Grade: Premium 

E. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. Apply grade stamp 

to surfaces that are not exposed to view. 

F. Face Surface: Smooth. 

G. Edge Pattern: Vee grooved & Tongue & Groove . 

H. Finish: Apply Ipe Oil to all surfaces. 

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Fastener Material: Stainless Steel 

WOOD ROOF DECKING 061516 - 1




B. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable 

requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and 

manufacturer of substrates for intended application. 

1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 or less. 



A. Install solid-sawn wood roof decking to comply with AITC 112. 

1. Locate end joints for combination simple and two-span continuous lay-up. 

B. Apply joint sealant to seal roof decking at exterior walls at the following locations: 

1. Between roof decking and supports located at exterior walls. 

2. Between roof decking and exterior walls that butt against underside of roof decking. 

3. Between tongues and grooves of roof decking over exterior walls and supports at exterior 

walls. 


A. Provide water-resistive barrier over roof decking as the Work progresses to protect roof decking 

until roofing is applied. 


WOOD ROOF DECKING 061516 - 2




SECTION 061533 - WOOD DECKING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wood decking for Stage and Side Stage. 

2. Sliding Doors with wood louvers 

3. Support framing for elevated Stage. 


A. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products and metal framing anchors. 


A. Material Certificates: 

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 

1. Preservative-treated wood products. 

Metal framing anchors. 

2. Decking fasteners. 


2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL 

A. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by 

ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the 

applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 

1. Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. 

2. For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, mark grade stamp on end or 

back of each piece. 

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.2 WOOD DECKING 

A. Dimension Lumber Decking of the following species: 

1. Ipe 

WOOD DECKING 061533 - 1




2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING 

A. Stage Framing: Select Structural No. 1 grade of the following species: 

1. Southern pine; SPIB. 

2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 

3. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. 

4. Spruce-pine-fir (South); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 

2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT 

A. Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to 

AWPA U1; Use Category UC4a 

B. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use 

Category UC4a. 

C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium, except for timber posts. 

D. Use process that includes water-repellent treatment. 

E. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's 

Board of Review. 

F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and the following: 

1. Framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade. 

2. Sills and ledgers. 

3. Members in contact with masonry or concrete. 

4. Posts. 

5. Round wood poles. 

6. Decking. 

2.5 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and 

manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches 

(38 mm) into wood substrate. 

1. Use stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners. 





2.6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following 

B. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, G185 (Z550) coating designation. 

2.7 CONCEALED DECKING FASTENERS 

A. Deck Splines: Corrosion-resistant metal or plastic splines that fit in grooves routed into the sides 

of decking material and are fastened to deck framing with screws. Splines provide uniform 

spacing of decking material. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following 

a. Ipe Clip Fastener Company Inc. (The); Ipe Clip. 

B. Deck Clips: Black-oxide-coated, stainless-steel clips designed to be fastened to deck framing 

with screws, and to secure decking material with teeth that also provide uniform spacing of 

decking material. 



A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit work 

to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Install wood decking with crown up (bark side down). 

D. Install plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Secure decking to framing with deck clips. 

F. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. 

H. 

I. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as 

indicated, complying with the following: 





1. ICC-ES AC70 for power-driven fasteners. 

2. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code. 

3. "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members" and "Alternate Attachments" in ICC's 

International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 

3.2 ELEVATED DECK JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 

1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches (76 mm) on masonry. Attach 

floor joists where framed into wood supporting members by using wood ledgers as indicated or, 

if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. Do not notch joists. 

B. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams or girders not less than 4 inches (102 mm,) 

or securely tie opposing members together. 






SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Roof sheathing. 


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component 

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. 

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. 



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide 

materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per 

ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance 

Directory." 

2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS 

A. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 

2.3 ROOF SHEATHING 

A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 

2.4 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in 

this article for material and manufacture. 

SHEATHING 061600 - 1




1. For roof[ and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with 

ASTM A 153/A 153M. 



A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to 

use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces 

do not span between fewer than three support members. 

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting 

construction unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 

D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so 

these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing 

through completed assembly. 

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of 

structural support elements. 

3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 

2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts 

structural elements. 

3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials 

that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. 

B. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount 

of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations 

and openings. 

2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and 

trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to 

exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other 

penetrations and openings. 


SHEATHING 061600 - 2


12041 ROSEMARY BEACH OWNERES CENTER 


SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 

2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 

3. Plastic-Laminate shelving 

B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips 

unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 


A. Product Data: For cabinet hardware and accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

C. Samples: 

1. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and 

color, with exposed surface finished. 

2. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork. 

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork 

Quality Standards”. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet 

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative 

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress 

to avoid delaying the Work. 

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field 

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Wood Products: 

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no 

urea formaldehyde. 

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 

5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive 

containing no urea formaldehyde. 

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 23 - 1




B. Melamine: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamineimpregnated 

decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as 

required by woodwork quality standard. 

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural 

woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware”. 

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, self-closing. 

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. 

D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A 156.9, B04071; with shelf rest, B04081 and 

BHMA A 156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets. B04112. 

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 

1. Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted and extending under 

bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel or epoxy-coated steel with 

polymer rollers. 

2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravelextension 

type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 

3. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 

inches (600 mm) wide 

4. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 

24 inches (600 mm) wide. 

5. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24 

inches (600 mm) wide. 

6. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1; for computer keyboard shelves. 

F. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. Provide locks at all doors unless noted otherwise. 

G. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. Provide locks at all drawers unless noted otherwise. 

H. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, molded-plastic 

grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “SG series” by Doug Mockett 

& Company, Inc. 

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with 

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. 

J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies with product 

class requirements in BHMA 156.9. 


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fire-retardanttreated, 

kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 

B. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 


A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. 

Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

1. Fabricate to AWI Premium quality standards. 

2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove 

splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 

B. Shelving: Plastic laminate 3/4-inch (19-mm) particle board shelving with PVC front edge. 

Plastic laminate and paint color of brackets to be selected by Architect. 





C. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 

1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for Laminate cabinets. 

2. Grade: Custom. 

3. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 

4. Grain or Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 

5. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate over ¾- 

inch particleboard as follows: 

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 

b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 

c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 

d. Edges: Lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and cut on 

cabinet surfaces PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3-mm) thick, matching laminate in 

color, pattern and finish. 

1) All edge banding must be fee of delamination, bubbles, and all adhesive 

residues. 

2) All edges must be banded. 

6. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Melamine, over 3/4-inch 

particleboard. High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade HGS. 

a. To include, but not limited to the following: 

1) Interior shelving. 

b. Melamine Color: 

1) To be selected by Architect. 

c. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3-mm) thick, 

matching laminate in color, pattern and finish. 

1) All edge banding must be free of delamination, bubbles, and all adhesive 

residue. 

2) All edges must be banded. 

7. Drawer Sides and Backs: High pressure decorative laminate (melamine) on 7 ply veneer 

core substrate; all visible surfaces with drawer in normal open position, compatible with 

interior finish or solid hardwood lumber (minimum of 1/2-inch thick). 

a. Melamine Color: 


8. Drawer Bottoms: Melamine, over 1/4-inch veneer core panel product “B” face hardwood 

veneer or thermoset decorative overlay panel product. 

a. Melamine Color: 


9. Joinery for Case Body Members: 

a. Tops, Exposed Ends and Bottoms: 

1) Stop dado, glued under pressure and either nailed, or screwed (fasteners 

will not be visible on exposed parts). 

2) Doweled, glued under pressure (approximately 4 dowels per foot of joint). 

3) European assembly screws (37 mm from end, 128 mm on center, fasteners 

will not be visible on exposed parts). 

b. Exposed End Corner Details and Face Frame Attachment: 

1) Mitered joint: lock miter or spline or biscuit, glued under pressure (no visible 

fasteners). 

2) Non-mitered joints, i.e. 90 degree applications: butt joint glued under 

pressure (no visible fasteners). 

c. Cabinet Backs – Wall Hung: Wall hung cabinet backs must be relied upon to 

support the full weight of the cabinet and its anticipated load for hanging/mounting 

purposes. Hanging/mounting mechanisms should transfer load to case body 

members. 





1) Full bound, captured in grooves on cabinet sides, top and bottom. 

2) Full overlay, plant-on backs: Minimum 1/2-inch thick attached with minimum 

#12 plated (not case-hardened) screws spaced minimum 3-inches on 

center. Anchor strips not required for backs 1/2-inch and thicker so 

attached. Edge of back should not be exposed on finished ends. 

d. Cabinet Backs – Floor Standing: 

1) Side bound, captured in grooves; glued and fastened to top and bottom. 

2) Full overlay, plant-on backs: minimum 1/2-inch thick attached with minimum 

#12 plated (not case-hardened) screws spaced minimum 3-inches on 

center. Anchor strips not required for back 1/2-inch and thicker so attached. 

Edge of back should not be exposed on finished ends. 

e. Anchor Strips for cabinet backs less than 1/2-inch thick: Minimum 1/2-inch thick 

lumber or panel product, minimum 2-1/2-inches width; securely attached to the 

wall side of the cabinet back – top and bottom for wall hung cabinets, top only for 

floor standing cabinets. 

10. Drawer Construction Techniques and Supports: 

a. Multiple Dovetail (all corners), French Dovetail front/dadoed back, glued under 

pressure. 

b. Doweled, glued under pressure (minimum 32 mm dowel spacing to 4-inch high, 64 

mm dowel spacing above 4-inches. 

c. Lock Shoulder, glued and pin nailed. 

d. Bottoms shall be set into sides, back and front, 1/4-inch deep groove with 

minimum 3/8-inch standing shoulder. 

11. Drawer Hardware Static Load: Combination metal and roller bearing drawer slides. 

12. Adjustable Shelf Techniques and Support: Metal shelf standards (recessed flush) or 

Multiple holes (minimum 5-mm diameter with pins). 

13. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer’s 

full range of solid colors, wood grains or pattern finishes. 

14. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above 

compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 

D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: 

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer’s 

full range. 

3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 

4. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue. 

2.5 SHOP FINISHING 

A. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, 

regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation. The extent to which the final 

finish is applied at fabrication shop is Contractor’s option, except shop apply at least the prime 

coat before delivery. Refer to Division 9 Section “Painting” for final finishing of installed 

architectural woodwork and for stain, varnish and sealer. 

B. Final touchup, filling countersunk fasteners, cleaning and polishing after installation. 



A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation 

areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including 

removal of packing and backpriming. 

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for 

fabrication of type of woodwork involved. 





C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 

2400 mm) . Shim as required with concealed shims. 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish 

at cuts. 

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with 

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use 

fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with 

woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are 

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide 

unencumbered operation. 

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 

inches (400 mm) o.c. 

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other 

supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant 

specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 


‘LEFT BLANK” 









SECTION 064800 - WOOD DOOR FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior frames and jambs. 

2. Interior frames and jambs. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

C. Samples: 

1. Lumber for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 


A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program 

certificates. 


2.1 WOOD FRAMES, GENERAL 

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork 

Standards" for grades of wood frames indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other 

requirements. 

1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that 

woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 

2.2 EXTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 

A. Grade: Premium. 

B. Wood Species: Ipe, 

WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 1




C. Finish: Apply Ipe Oil to all surfaces. 

2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 

A. Grade: Premium. 

B. Wood Species: Ipe 

C. Finish: Apply Ipe Oil to all surfaces. 

2.4 WOOD MATERIALS 

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard 

for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Exterior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, pressure-preservative 

treated, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 

1. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b. 

a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 

b. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the 

American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 

B. Interior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber , kiln dried to less than 

15 percent moisture content. 

C. Nails for Exterior Use: stainless steel. 

D. Screws for Exterior Use: stainless steel. 

E. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports. 

F. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 

Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal 

or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. 

G. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 


A. Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius 

indicated for the following: 





1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) 

indicated. 

unless otherwise 



A. Before installation, condition wood frames to average prevailing humidity conditions in 

installation areas. 


A. Grade: Install wood frames to comply with same grade as item to be installed. 

B. Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. 

Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) . 

C. Scribe and cut wood frames to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged 

finish at cuts. 

D. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply 

with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used 

to install woodwork. 

E. Anchor wood frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure 

with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing 

screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 

1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. 










SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Board insulation. 

2. Concealed batt insulation. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Product test reports. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse 

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method 

indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting 

agency. 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 


2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION 

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m) with 

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. DiversiFoam Products. 

b. Dow Chemical Company. 

c. Owens Corning. 

d. Pactiv Building Products Division. 

2.2 OPENED CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION 

A. Manufacturer: 

1. Demilec (USA) LLC Arlington, TX, SEALECTION 500 

B. Application sprayed with Blazelok IB4 Intumescent Coating on the top of all foam surfaces 

covered with a minimum nominal thickness of 3 dry mils, 5 wet mils of Blazelok IB4. 

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 

2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 

3. Johns Manville. 

4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 

THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1




5. Owens Corning. 

B. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without 

membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed 

indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 

C. Location: Install where batt insulation is indicated on the drawings. 

2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS 

A. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without 

damaging insulation and substrates. 



A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application 

indicated. 

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any 

time to ice, rain, and snow. 

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly 

around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with 

placement. 

D. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from 

manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units 

to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make 

up total thickness. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BOARD INSULATION 

A. On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 

inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit 

courses of insulation with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against 

inside substrates indicated. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION 

A. Install batt insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following 

requirements: 

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If 

more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit 

between ends. 

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between 

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 

3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm) , 

support unfaced blankets mechanically to metal studs. 

B. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. 

Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of 

approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) . 


THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2



ROSEMARY BEACH,FL 

SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels. 

B. Panel system requirements include the following components: 

1. Aluminum-faced composite panels with mounting system. Panel mounting system 

including anchorages, furring, fasteners, gaskets and sealants, related flashing adapters 

and masking for a complete installation. 

2. Shop-installed aluminum stiffeners on all panels of 20 square feet or larger. Minimum 

stiffener recommendation is one per 20 square feet of panel area. 

3. Parapet coping, column covers, soffits, sills, border and filler items may be indicated as 

integral components of the panels system or as designed. 

4. System to be fabricated and installed per Florida Building Code requirements. 


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; 

details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, 

trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 

C. Samples: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated. 


A. Product test reports. 

B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. 

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Maintenance data. 

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - 1





A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and 

approved by manufacturer. 

B. Composite panel manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years’ architectural experience in 

the manufacture of this product and be located within the continental USA. 

C. Fabrication and installation of composite panels shall be from a single source. 

D. Fabricator shall be acceptable to composite panel manufacturer. 

E. Fabricator and installer shall have a minimum 5 years’ experience in architectural metal panel 

work similar in scope and size to this project. 

F. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the contractor to 

avoid delay of work. 

G. Shop drawings shall show the preferred joint details providing a watertight and structurally 

sound wall panel system that allows no uncontrolled water penetration, on the inside face of the 

panel system as determined by ASTM E331. 

H. Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels: 6 mm (1/4") in 6 

m (20') non-accumulative. 

I. Panel fabricator and installer shall assume undivided responsibility for all components of the 

exterior panel system, including but not limited to, attachment to sub-construction, panel-topanel 

joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery and joint seal associated with the panel 

system. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of 

deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 

1. Finish Warranty Period: The aluminum composite material manufacturer shall warrant 

for a period of 30 years against Max 5 fade based on ASTM D2244 and Max 8 chalk 

based on ASTM D4212 and delamination of the paint from date of Substantial 

Completion. 







A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of 

withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: and 

the Florida Building Code. 

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 

2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 

3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. 

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested 

according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference: 

1. Test-Pressure Difference: [ 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa)] [6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) ]. 

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to 

ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference: 

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature 

changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint 

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface 

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C) , ambient. 

2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS




finish coat and 0.5 mil (approx) optional clear coat for special finishes. containing 

70% Kynar 500 ® resins. (If Colorweld ® 500XL, coating shall consist of a 0.2 mil 

(approx.) barrier prime coat, a 0.80 mil (approx.) color coat, containing 70% Kynar 

500 ® resins and a 0.5 mil (approx.) clear coat containing 70% Kynar 500 ® 

resins.) 

Nominal dry film thickness is 1.50 mils. 

c. Gloss: ASTM D523 standard at 60º shall be 5–50 based on color system. 

d. Pencil hardness: ASTM D3363 shall be F-2H minimum. 

e. Flexibility T-Bend: ASTM D4145 shall be 0-2T-Bend; no pick-off. 

f. Adhesion: ASTM D3359 reverse impact 1/16" crosshatch shall show no cracking 

or adhesion loss. 

g. Reverse Impact: ASTM D2794 1500 x metal thickness aluminum shall show no 

cracking or adhesion loss. 

h. Acid Resistance: ASTM D1308, 10% muriatic acid, 24 hrs., shall show no effect. 

20% sulfuric acid, 18 hrs, shall show no effect. 

i. Acid Rain Test: Kesternich SO2, DIN 500180, 10 cycles min. No objectionable 

color change. 

j. Alkali Resistance: ASTM D1308, 10%, 25% NaOH, 1 hr., shall show no effect. 

k. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B117, 5% salt fog at 95°F. Pass 4,000 hrs. less than 

1/16" average creep from scribe; up to a few #8 blisters. 

l. Humidity Resistance: ASTM D714 & ASTM D2247 100% relative humidity at 

95ºF, shall pass 4,000 hrs., # 8 blisters. 

m. Exterior Exposure: 10 years at 45º, South Florida. ASTM D2244 shall be Max. 5 

fade and ASTM D4214 shall be Max. 8 chalk. 

n. Paint system shall meet the requirements of AAMA 2605-11 specifications. 

o. (FEVE) Megaflon ® , Coraflon ® , Valflon ® or any Lumiflon ® -based paint systems are 

not acceptable. 

p. Paint system shall have more than 20 years of architectural field use. 

C. Formed from extruded aluminum. 

D. Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard. 


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel 

sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or 

ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation 

unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and 

alignment of metal composite material panel system. 

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system 

including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, 

fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material 

panels unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite 

material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. 

Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed 

openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with 

same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels. 





D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed 

fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic 

caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. 

E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel 

manufacturer. Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with 

panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 


A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, by 

manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance 

requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with 

dimensional and structural requirements. 

B. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or 

separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that 

minimize noise from movements. 

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's 

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" 

that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 

D. System Characteristics 

1. System must not generally have any visible fasteners, telegraphing or fastening on the 

panel faces or any other compromise of a neat and flat appearance. 

2. Fabricate panel system to dimension, size and profile indicated on the drawings based on 

a design temperature of 68ºF (20ºC). 

3. Fabricate panel system to avoid compressive skin stresses. The installation detailing shall 

be such that the panels remain flat regardless of temperature changes and at all times 

remain air- and watertight. 

4. The finish side of the panel shall have a removable protective film applied prior to 

fabrication, which shall remain on the panel during fabrication, shipping and erection to 

protect the surface from damage. 

2.5 FINISHES 

A. Panels and Accessories: 

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to 

exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written 

instructions. 







A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support 

members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

3.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION 

A. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal 

composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including 

subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels. 

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material 

joinery, and panel-system joint seals. 

B. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings, and 

with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements specified. 

1. Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite 

material wall panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant 

according to requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 

2. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite 

materialwall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket system. 

3. Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight 

mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other 

components. 

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation 

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners 

where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, 

and seams that are permanently watertight. 

3.3 CLEANING 

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite 

material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation 

instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished 

surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean 

condition during construction. 

END OF SECTION 074213.23 





SECTION 075419 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Adhered polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) roofing system. 

2. Roof insulation. 


A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA 

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section. 


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site 



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments 

to other work. 

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 

1. Sheet roofing, of color required. 


A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES. 

B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING 075419 - 1





A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing 

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive 

manufacturer's special warranty. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that 

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners, for roofing system 

from manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. 


A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested 

according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. 

B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to 

ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272. 

C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift 

pressures: 

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: See Structural Drawings 

2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: See Structural Drawings 

3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: See Structural Drawings 

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify 

products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

2.3 PVC ROOFING 

A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434/D 4434M, Type III, fabric reinforced 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sarnafil Inc. 

2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm) , nominal Retain one color in "Exposed Face Color" 

Subparagraph below. Although white is standard, verify availability of other colors with 

manufacturers if required. 

3. Exposed Face Color: White. 





2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use 

and compatible with roofing. 

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 

d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 

e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. 

f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 

g. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L 

h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 

i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 

j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 

l. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L. 

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, 

thickness, and color as PVC sheet. 

C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance 

provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and 

acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 

D. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, 

preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, 

T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. 

2.5 ROOF INSULATION 

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 lt or glass-fiber 

mat facer on both major surfaces. 


following 

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. 

b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 

c. Dyplast Products. 

d. Firestone Building Products. 

e. GAF Materials Corporation. 





f. Hunter Panels. 

g. Insulfoam LLC; a Carlisle company. 

h. Johns Manville. 

i. Rmax, Inc. 

B. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where 

indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES 

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance 

provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation[ and cover 

boards] to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof 

insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. 


3.1 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from 

entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast. 

Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 

C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness 

of transition 

3.2 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION 

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes 

with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 

1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, 

perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers' written 

instructions. 

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or 

left exposed at the end of the workday. 

B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 





C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation 

thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each 

succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in 

each direction. 

1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install 

noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, 

and install composite board insulation for top layer. 

D. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 

1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. 

(0.3 L/sq. m) , and allow primer to dry. 

2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus 

or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 

3. Set each layer of insulation in insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining 

insulation in place. 

E. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using 

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof 

insulation to deck type. 

1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 

F. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck using 

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof 

insulation to deck type. 

1. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of 

roof. 

2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and 

maintaining insulation in place. 

3.4 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written 

instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining. 

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036. 

B. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions 

required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by 

manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of 

roofing. 

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and 

perimeter of roofing. 





E. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and 

sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam 

installation. 

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut 

edges of sheet. 

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas. 

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements. 

F. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with 

clamping ring. 

3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to 

roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow 

to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. 

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet 

flashing. 

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side 

and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. 

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings[ and mechanically anchor to substrate through 

termination bars]. 

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When 

remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and 

damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. 

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair 

substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration 

at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. 





Rosemary Beach,FL. 

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by 

reference to this Section: 

1. Provide sealant/caulk at all dissimilar materials on the exterior and interior surfaces. 

When joints or the connection of dissimilar materials are large enough provide backer rod 

and sealant. 

2. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. 

b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 

c. Joints in siding and trim. 

d. Joints in stucco systems. 

e. Joints between different materials listed above. 

f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and 

louvers. 

g. Other joints as indicated. 

3. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 

4. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. 

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. 

c. Tile control and expansion joints. 

d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior 

5. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 

b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. 

B. See Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous 

joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and waterresistant 

continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 

B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants 

in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material 

matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 

1. Provide a minimum of 6 different colors as selected by Architect from manufacturers full 

color range. 

2. All sealant colors shall match adjacent material. 

C. Preconstruction field test reports. 

D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. 

E. Product certificates or test reports. 

JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1





A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will 

contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to 

ASTM C 1087 manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other 

specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint 

sealants to joint substrates. 

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their 

adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate 

for the types of Project joints. 

C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made 

under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for 

materials and execution: 

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive 

elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or 

replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements 

specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant 

manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not 

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified 

warranty period. 



2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible 

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as 

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each 

liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 

classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be 

nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to 

ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 

C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints 

that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing 

according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to 

ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless 


D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will 

come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 

E. Multi-component Sealant is permitted but must be compatible and equivalent to specified 

sealants. 





F. Low-Modulus Neutral-Curing Polyurethane Sealant (JS-1): Where joint sealants of this type are 

indicated, provide products complying with the following: 

1. Available Products: 

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. 

b. Tremco; Dymonic. 

c. Tremco; Vulkem 921. 

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 

3. Class: 25. 

4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates 

indicated, O. 

a. Coated glass, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, color anodic 

aluminum, galvanized steel, brick, limestone, marble, granite, plastic, tile, wood. 

G. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant (JS-2): Where joint sealants of this type are 



a. GE Silicones; Silglaze II SCS2800. 

b. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 

c. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. 

d. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 895. 


3. Class: 25. 

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates 

indicated, O. 


aluminum, galvanized steel, brick, limestone, marble, granite, plastic, tile, wood. 

6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 

1248. 

H. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant (JS-3): Where joint sealant 

of this type are indicated, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for 

sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service 

exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following: 


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. 

b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. 

c. Tremco; Tremsil 200 White. 


3. Class: 25. 

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 

O. 


aluminum galvanized steel, marble, granite, plastic and tile. 

I. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant (JS-4): Where joint sealants of this type are 



a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201. 

b. Polymeric Systems Inc.; Flexiprene 952. 

c. Tremco; Tremflex S/L. 

d. Tremco; Vulkem 45. 

e. Sonneborn Building Products, Div., ChemRex Inc.; SL 1. 

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable). 

3. Class: 25. 

4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 





5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 

O. 

a. Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with high-performance coating, 

galvanized steel, brick, granite, marble, ceramic tile and wood. 

2.3 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1311 or FS TT-S-00230. 


a. Tremco; Mono 555. 

B. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1085. 


a. Bostik Findley; Bostik 300. 

b. Fuller, H. B. Company; SC-0296. 

c. Fuller, H. B. Company; SC-0288. 

d. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. 

e. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-301. 

f. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant. 

g. Tremco; Tremco Butyl Sealant. 

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: For Interior Use Only. 

B. Latex Sealant (JS-5): Comply with ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 

C. Available Products: 

1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. 

2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 

3. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 

4. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 

2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: For Interior Use Only. 

B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints (JS-6): Manufacturer's standard nonsag, 

paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces 

airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as 

demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 

b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible 

with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications 

indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings (Backer Rod): ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a 

surface skin) polyurethane foam rod, oversized 20 – 50 percent larger than joint width as 

approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and 

density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant 

performance: 

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant 

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint 

surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive 

tape where applicable. 






A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of 

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate 

tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants 

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or 

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to 

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces 

adjacent to joints. 



A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of 

joint sealant. 

a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, 

mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, 

sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove 

loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing 

out joints with oil-free compressed air. 

2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, 

harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint 

sealants. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant 

manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply 

primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas 

of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining 

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by 

cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling 

without disturbing joint seal. 


A. General: All Dissimilar Materials are to be caulked. 

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint 

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for 

use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and 

conditions indicated. 

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position 

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint 

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application 

and replace them with dry materials. 

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between 

sealants and backs of joints. 





F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time 

backings are installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow 

optimum sealant movement capability. 

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or 

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform 

beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of 

sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not 

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

H. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by 

methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and 

of products in which joints occur. 

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE 

A. Joint-Sealant Application: All exterior wall penetrations shall be finished with sealant for a water 

and weathertight installation. 

1. Joint Sealant: JS-1, Low Modulus-neutral-curing sealant. 

2. Joint Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers full color range. 

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior siding and trim. 

1. Joint Sealant: JS-1, Low-Modulus neutral curing sealant. 

2. Joint Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers full color range. 

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic construction joints in cast-inplace 

concrete. 

1. Joint Sealant: JS-1, Low-Modulus-neutral-curing sealant. 

2. Joint-Sealant color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers full color range. 

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and contraction joints 

in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 

1. Joint Sealant: JS-4, Single-component pourable urethane sealant. 

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers full color range. 

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 

1. Joint Sealant: JS-1, Low-Modulus neutral-curing sealant. 


F. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in stucco systems. 



G. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above. 



H. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints between substrate material and frames of 

doors, windows, and louvers. 



I. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead 

surfaces. 


2. Joint Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufactures full color range. 





J. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior control and expansion joints in horizontal traffic surfaces of 

ceramic tile. 



K. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of 

exterior walls. 

1. Joint Sealant: JS-5 Latex sealant. 


L. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 

1. Joint Sealant: JS-5, Latex sealant. 


M. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior ceramic tile expansion, control, contraction, and isolation 

joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 



N. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, 

and counters. 

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant acid-curing silicone sealant. 


O. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and 

partitions. 



P. Joint-Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces ad frames of interior 

doors, windows, and elevator entrances. 


2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architects from Manufacturers full color range. 











SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes hollow-metal frames. 


1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow-metal frames. 


A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to 

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for 

hardware, and other details. 

C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for 

details and openings as those on Drawings. 


A. Product test reports. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] 

[provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that 

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 

1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

3. Republic Doors and Frames. 

4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 

HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 - 1




2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and 

temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 

or UL 10C. 

2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES 

A. Standard-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level. 

1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4. 

2. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) . 

3. Construction: Full profile welded. 

4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL FRAMES 

A. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame 

Schedule. 

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 

2. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with 

minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. 

3. Construction: Full profile welded. 

4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS 

A. Jamb Anchors: 

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not 

less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 

inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 

inch (4.5 mm) thick. 

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 

inch (1.0 mm) thick. 

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 

mm) , and as follows: 

2.6 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B., exterior 

applications. 





C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) 

designation; mill phosphatized. 

coating 

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M 

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, 

Class B. 

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials. 

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm) , as measured 

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) 

thickness per coat. 

dry film 


A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form 

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, 

fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly 

identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. 

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling 

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal 

as frames. 

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners 


2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be 

grouted. 

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per 

anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at 

bottoms of jambs. 

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: 

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and 

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match 

coursing. 

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and 

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. 

5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers. 

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised 

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to 

SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 





1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for 

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 

2.8 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10. 


A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick. 



A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with 

SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent 

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving 

surfaces smooth and undamaged. 

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. 

d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been 

properly set and secured. 

e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as 

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 

f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout 

containing antifreezing agents. 

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, 

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled 

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space 

between frames and masonry with grout. 

5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber 

insulation. 

6. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place 

according to manufacturer's written instructions. 





7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, 

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) , measured at door rabbet on a line 

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) , measured at jambs on a horizontal 

line parallel to plane of wall. 

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) , measured at opposite face corners of 

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) , measured at jambs at floor. 


A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is 

warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after 

installation. 

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of 

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. 

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint 

according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in 

painting Sections. 






THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 





SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Solid-core Doors with wood-veneer faces and factory finishing. 

2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 

3. Factory machining for hardware. 

B. Related Sections 


A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; 

construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; mortises, holes, and cutouts; 

requirements for veneer matching; factory finishing; fire ratings; and other pertinent data. 

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors. 

D. Florida Product approval Number. 


A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural 

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Protect door during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. 

Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer’s written instructions. 

1. Individually package doors in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic 

sheeting. 

B. March each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable 

tags of concealed markings. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet-work is 

complete and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at 

occupancy level during the remainder of the construction period. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and 

Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in 

materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup or twist) more than 1/4-inch in a 42-by-84- 

inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 

3-inch span. 

1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or 

replacement of defective doors. 

2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial 

Completion. 

a. 2 years. 

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1







following: 

1. Flush Wood Doors: 

a. ETO Doors – Impact-Hurricane Approved 2 panel Square V-Groove. FL Approval 

No.15125 

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL 

A. Doors for Transparent Clear Finish: 

1. Grade: Premium, except Grade A faces are acceptable. 

2. Species and Cut: IPE. 

3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 

4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 

5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by 

mullions. 


A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. 

B. Job fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of 

referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated 

doors. 

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply 

with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, 

DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 

1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and 

alignment before factory machining. 

D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 

2.4 FINISHING 

A. Field Finish – Refer to section 099000 



A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the 

referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim 

stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine 

doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and 

machining. 

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. 

Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering 

unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch 

(6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 





D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at 

Project site. 






PAGE LEFT BLANK 





SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior 

a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 

2. Exterior manual-swing aluminum doors. 

3. Exterior aluminum door frames. 

B. Door hardware to be furnished and installed by aluminum framed entrance manufacturer. 


A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, 

without failure, the effects of the following: 

1. Structural loads. 

2. Thermal movements. 

3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, 

story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 

4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 

5. Failure includes the following: 

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. 

b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. 

c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and 

structural movements, to glazing. 

d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. 

e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. 

f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 

g. Sealant failure. 

h. Failure of operating units to function properly. 

B. Structural Loads: 

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 

C. Deflection of Framing Members Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for 

spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for 

spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) ] 

D. Structural-Test Performance: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not 

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, 

including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent 

deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds. 

E. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance-Test Performance: provide aluminum framed entrances 

and storefront that pass large missile –impact test and cyclic – pressure test according to the 

requirements of the Florida building Code. 

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 1




F. Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 

deg F (100 deg C) , material surfaces. 

G. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of systems of 

0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 

at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) . 

H. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through 

fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-airpressure 

difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 

lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) . 



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer 

responsible for their preparation. 

2. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, 

functions, quantities, and locations. 

C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 

D. Product test reports. 

E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 

F. Florida Product Approval Numbers 


A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparation of data for 

aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis 

of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for 

testing indicated. 

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for 

fabrication and installation. 

1. Build mockups. 

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of 


1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to 

repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with 

requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 

b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. 

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering. 

d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 

e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. 





f. Failure of operating components to function properly. 

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair 

or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does 

not include normal weathering. 




A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems is based on Subject to 

compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of 

the following: 

1. YKK AP America Inc. – (BASIS OF DESIGN) 

2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 

3. Vistawall Architectural Products 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish 

indicated. 

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) . 

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) . 

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer. 

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness 

required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 

1. Construction: Non-thermal Framing members are one-piece members that are internally 

slotted at regular intervals 

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, 

nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding 

fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 

1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural 

movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 

3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing 

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts 

complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. 





E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing 

compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to 

match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible 

deflection. Providing full sill pans and dams. 

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer 

for joint type. 

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS 

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, 

that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. 

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. 

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to 

which sealants will not develop adhesion. 

2.5 DOORS 

A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation. 

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, thick 

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten 

corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded 

or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width [ (127-mm) nominal 

width. 

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed 

gaskets. 

a. Provide non-removable glazing stops on outside of door. 

2.6 DOOR HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements 

in this Section. 

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide named manufacturers’ products 

2. Opening-Force Requirements: 

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more that 

30 lbf (133 N) to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open 

the door to its minimum required width. 

B. Pivot Hinges: 

1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide offset pivots top, bottom, and intermediate at each door 

leaf. 

C. Manual Flush Bolts: 

1. Provide one pair of flush bolts in the inactive leaf of a pair doors as required to comply 

with large missile impact requirements. 

2. Cylinders: As specified in Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.” 

D. Strikes: Provide strike with black plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for 

aluminum framing. 





E. Operating Trim: 

1. Provide Traditional Wire pull and Concealed Vertical Rod Push Pad 

F. Closers: 

1. Concealed overhead door closer, with accessories required for a complete installation, 

sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; 

adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 

G. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer’s standard replaceable components. 

H. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer’s standard exterior door bottom sweep with concealed 

fasteners on mounting strip. 

I. Silencers: BHMA A156.16. Grade 1 

J. Thresholds: A 4” wide raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more that 1:2, with 

maximum Height of ½ inch (13mm). 

2.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

A. REFER TO THE DRAWINGS 

1. ALL HARDWARE TO BE PART OF A TESTED ASSEMBLY TO COMPLY WITH 

HURRICANE CODE AND INDICATED DESIGN PRESSURE. 

2.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in 

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per 

coat. 


A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration 

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or 

grinding. 

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following 

characteristics: 

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 

3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, 

and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 

4. Physical isolation of glazing from framing members. 

5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to 

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 

6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. Fasteners, anchors, and 

connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. 

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). 





E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for 

installing hardware. 

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 

2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install 

three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames 

for pairs of doors. 

F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip 

mortised into door edge. 

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. 

G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and 

tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to 

Shop Drawings. 

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Anodizing conforming to AA-M12C22A31, AAMA 607.1, Anodic Coating. Color shall be 

selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s full range of colors. 



A. General: 

1. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 

2. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 

3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic 

deterioration. 

4. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Metal Protection: 

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by 

painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing 

nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 

a. Refer to Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”. 

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting 

contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing 

members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section 

"Joint Sealants" and to produce weather-tight installation. 

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp 

or rack. 

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 

1. Structural-Sealant Glazing: 





a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant 

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. 

Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 

b. Install weather-seal sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and 

according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof 

joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 

G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 

1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weather-tight 

closure. 

2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware 

manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 

H. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 

I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to 

produce weather-tight installation. 

J. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum 

tolerances: 

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet 

(3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 

2. Alignment: 

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) . 

b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch 

(0.8 mm) . 

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch 

(3 mm). 











SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: 

a. Swinging doors. 


1. 084113 – Aluminum Framed Storefronts and Entrances. 



B. Shop Drawings 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 

D. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing 

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and 

diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work 

to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers 

as in the Contract Documents. 

b. Content: Include the following information: 

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each 

door and frame. 

2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor 

plans and to door and frame schedule. 

3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, 

function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 

4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and 

interfaces with other building control systems. 

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's 

final keying instructions for locks. 

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1





A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved 

by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the 

course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and 

keying. 

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing 

consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and 

extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows: 

1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door 

hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive 

pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) 

Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 

to release the latch. 

E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with 

the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA 

Accessibility Guidelines and the FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. 

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the 

wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) . 

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: 

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to 

door. 

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more 

than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door 

will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured 

to the leading edge of the door. 

F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 


A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 

B. Deliver keys to Owner by hand delivery, registered mail or overnight package service. 

C. Install permanent cores immediately prior to substantial completion. 





1.5 WARRANTY 


replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified 

warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

a. Exit Devices: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE 

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" 

Article to comply with requirements in this Section. 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named 

manufacturers' products. 

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive 

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" 

Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for 

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. 

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 

2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations 

and requirements for description, quality, and function. 

2.2 HINGES 

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollowmetal 

doors and hollow-metal frames. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in the 

schedule or comparable product by one of the following: 

a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of the Stanley Works. 

2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES 

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with 

requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended 

to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by 

manufacturer. 





2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 

3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum 

framing. 

4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. 

2.4 SURFACE BOLTS 

A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16. 

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in the 


a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 

2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS 

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated in the 


a. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. 

B. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. 

Provide 10 construction master keys. 

2.6 KEYING 

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, 

Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 

1. Change keys, a master key, to operate cylinders. 

B. Keys: Brass. 

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include 

the following notation: 

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: 

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. 

b. Master Keys: Five. 

2.7 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM 

A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing keyholding 

hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, 

and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks. 





1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 


a. GE Security, Inc. 

b. HPC, Inc. 

c. MMF Industries. 

2. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding 

panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock. 

2.8 SURFACE CLOSERS 

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and 

latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with 

manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, 

exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable 

to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.All closers shall have parallel arms. 



2.9 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS 

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum 

base metal. 

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule 

or comparable product by one of the following: 


2.10 DOOR GASKETING 

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. 

m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to 

ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily 

available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 



a. National Guard Products. (Basis of Design) 

b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 

2.11 THRESHOLDS 

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product 

indicated in the schedule or comparable product by one of the following: 

a. National Guard Products. 





2.12 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS 

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick 

stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product 

indicated in the schedule or comparable product by one of the following: 


2.13 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE 

A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16. 



a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. (Basis of Design) 

b. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of the Stanley Works. 

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared 

for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially 

recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not 

permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door 

hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, 

except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for 

installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means 

of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door 

and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 

2. Fire-Rated Applications: 

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames. 

2) Strike plates to frames. 

3) Closers to doors and frames. 

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 

1) Surface hinges to doors. 

2) Closers to doors and frames. 

3) Surface-mounted exit devices. 

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 

4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended 

Fasteners for Wood Doors." 

5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and 

elsewhere as indicated. 





2.14 FINISHES 

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. 

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 



A. Steel Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to 

ANSI/SDI A250.6. 

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations 

for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." 

C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless 

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 

3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for 

Wood Flush Doors." 

D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where 

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be 

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface 

protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes 

have been completed on substrates involved. 

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment 

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space 

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 

E. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than 

the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 

inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of 

support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. 

F. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction 

period. 

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. 

2. Contractor shall furnish and install permanent cores as directed. Coordinate installation 

schedule with Architect. 





G. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system 

cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. 

H. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant, 

filling all voids in threshold completely with sealant, and complying with requirements 

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 

I. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless other type stops are indicated in door hardware 

schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 

J. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 

K. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 

L. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure 

proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as 

intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and 

ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent 

Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

A. NOTES: ALL CLOSERS SHALL HAVE PARALLEL ARMS 

B. MANUFACTURERS 

CODE 

BEST 

FENC 

IVES 

KABA 

NGP 

RUST 

STA 

MANUFACTURER 

Stanley/ Best Access Systems 

Fence Max.com 

Ives/ Ingersoll Rand 

Kaba Ilco 

National Guard Products 

RusticaHardware 

Stanley Commercial Hardware 

FINISHES CODE FINISH DESCRIPTION BASE MATERIAL 





ALUM 

Mill Finish Aluminum 

GRAY Gray Vinyl 

MILL FIN. Mill Finish Aluminum Aluminum 

626 Dull (Satin) Chromium Brass 

630 Satin Stainless Steel Stainless Steel 

689 Aluminum Painted Aluminum 

C. HARDWARE SETS 

HARDWARE SET NO. 1 

Door Opening # 

1 EA Lock Cylinder 1E72-BC4-RP3 BEST 626 

3 EA HINGES CB1960R 

4.5”x4.5” NRP 

STA 630 

1 EA ENTRANCE 

LOCKSET 

9K37AB16CSTK BEST 626 

1 EA DOOR CLOSER D4551 DA 

MC SNB 

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8”x2” 

LDW 

STA 689 

IVES 630 

1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 IVES 630 

1 SET SEALS 362 NGP GRAY 

1 EA THRESHOLD 896 x 

LENGTH 


NGP 

MILL FIN. 


3 EA HINGES CB1960R 4.5”x 4.5” STA 630 

1 EA PASSAGE LOCK 9K37N16CSTK BEST 626 





1 EA DOOR CLOSER D4551 DA MC SNB STA 689 

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8”x 2” LDW IVES 630 


1 EA PLUNGER DOOR 

HOLDER 

FS1153 IVES 630 

3 EA SILENCERS SR64 IVES GRAY 



3 EA HINGES CB1961R 4.5”x 4.5”NRP STA 630 

1 EA SERVICE 

STATION LOCK 

9K37E16CSTK BEST 626 




1 SET SEALS 362 NGP GRAY 

1 EA THRESHOLD 896 x LENGTH NGP MILL 

FIN. 



6 EA HINGES CB1961R 4.5”x 4.5” NRP STA 626 

1 EA STORAGE LOCK 45H7D16H BEST 626 

2 EA SURFACE BOLTS 

TOP/ BOTTOM 

(INACTIVE LEAF) 

SB453 w/ 

1 TOP STRIKE & 1 

BOTTOM STRIKE 

IVES 603 

1 

SET 

SEALS 362 NGP GRAY 






FIN. 



3 EA HINGES CB1961R 4.5”x 4.5” NRP STA 626 



1 

SET 



FIN. 



3 EA HINGES CB1961R 4.5”x 4.5” STA 626 



3 EA SILENCERS SR64 IVES GRAY 



3 EA HINGES CB1961R 4.5”x 4.5”NRP STA 626 

1 EA ONE WAY 

DEADBOLT 

83T7LSTK-CS BEST 626 

1 EA PULL PLATE 8302 3/5” x 15” 

TYPE F MOUNT 

IVES 626 

1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 3.5”x 15” IVES 626 








1 

SET 



FIN. 



4 EA GATE HINGE 2173.100 FENC ALUM 

1 EA *MECHANICAL 

PUSHBUTTON 

DEADLOCKING 

LATCH * 

900 SERIES w/ OPTIONAL 

EXIT DEVICE ON THE 

INTERIOR 

KABA 626 

2 EA SURFACE BOLT SB453 IVES 652 



3 EA GATE HINGE TCHD1AL2-MK2 FENC METAL 

1 EA *MECHANICAL 

PUSHBUTTON 

DEADLOCKING 

LATCH * 


900 SERIES w/ OPTIONAL 

EXIT DEVICE ON THE 

INTERIOR 

KABA 626 


1 EA BARN DOOR 

HARDWARE 

SET 

NOTE: 1. 

83T7LSTK-CS RUST 630 





WEIGHT LIMITED TO 500lbs. PER HANGER PAIR. COORDINATE WEIGHT 

OF EA. DOOR PRIOR TO BIDDING AND ORDERING. ADD ADDITIONAL 

HANGERS IF REQUIRED. 



2 EA CONTINUOUS 

HINGE 

662HD STA ALUM 







This page intentionally blank. 




Rosemary Beach FL 

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those 

specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this 

Section: 

1. Windows. 

2. Doors. 


A. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a 

specified gas. 

B. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the 

manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for 

maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and 

blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind 

and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable 

to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or 

gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in 

construction. 

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. 

Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass 

lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than 

thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the 

following criteria: 

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, 

according to the following requirements: 

a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings, but not less 

than wind loads applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7 "Minimum Design 

Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.0 "Wind Loads." 

b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically 

or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 

c. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set more than 

15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action. 

d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 

e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for 

each tint color indicated throughout Project. 

f. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance-Test Performance: Provide glazing for 

aluminum-framed systems that pass large and small missile-impact tests and 

cyclic-pressure tests according to the requirements of The Florida Building Code. 

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the 

following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass 

framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface 

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), 

material surfaces. 

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1




D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties 

specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures 

indicated below: 

1. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 

2. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for 

the following methodologies: 

a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K) . 

b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. 

c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. 

B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than 

monolithic clear float glass. 

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 

D. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, 

design and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass 

installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass 

installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association’s Program. 

B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant 

manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM c 1087, samples of each glazing material type, 

tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect 

elastomeric glazing sealants. 

C. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door and Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with 

NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to 

NFPA 257. 

D. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II 

materials. 

E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers 

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these 

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 

1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" 

and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out 

to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass 

units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to 

Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2





2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class 

indicated. 

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, 

kind, and condition indicated. 

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion 

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where 

needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites 

and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance 

Requirements" Article. 

3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 

4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 

5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heatstrengthened) 

float glass where safety glass is indicated. 

C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the 

following: 

1. Interlayer: Manufacturer’s standard of required thickness with a proven record of no 

tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating 

glass lites and installation. 

D. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (Fully tempered), Type I (Transparent flat glass) 

Quality-Q-1, Class I (clear). 

1. Safety glazing locations are defined by the Florida Building Code for specific required 

locations. 

2.2 FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS 

A. Fire-Protection Rating: 20 minute to 90 minute fire-rating, as indicated for the assembly in 

which glazing material is installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Supplier: FireLite NT as supplied by Technical Glass Products, Kirkland, Washington ph: 1- 

800-426-0279, fax 1-800-451-9857, email: sales@fireglass.com, web site: www.fireglass.com. 

1. Architect approved equal. 

C. Properties: 

1. Thickness: 3/16-inch. 

2. Film: 3M Scotchshield Ultra Film or as required per manufacturer. 

3. Fire Rating: 

a. 20-minutes. 

b. 45-minutes. 

c. 90-minutes. 

4. Surface Finish: Standard (unpolished). 

D. Labeling: Permanently label each piece of FireLite NT with the FireLite Logo and fire rating in 

sizes up to 3,325 sq. inch, and with the FireLite label only for sizes that exceed the listing (as 

approved by the local authority having jurisdiction). 

E. Fire Rating: Fire rating listed and labeled by UL for fire rating scheduled at opening on 

drawings, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2074, ASTM E2010, NFPA 252, NFPA 257, 

UL 9, UL 10B, UL 10C. 

F. Glazing compound for Fire-Rated Glazing Materials: 

1. Glazing Tape: Closed call polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam, coiled on release paper over 

adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent. Glass panels 

that exceed 1,393 sq. inches for 90-minute ratings must be glazed with fire-rated glazing 

tape supplied by manufacturer. 

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3




G. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone: tested for compatibility with glazing compound, of 

70 to 90 Shore A Hardness. 

H. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by manufacturer of glass and gaskets. 

I. Fabrication: 

1. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated 

for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite 

complying with system performance requirements. 

J. Installation: Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS 

A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Aluminum door and window manufacturer’s standard extrusions in size 

and shape required, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and lock stirps, complying 

with ASTM C 542, black. 

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of 

material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and 

hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 

1. Neoprene. 

2. EPDM. 

3. Silicone. 

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 

5. Any material indicated above. 

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS 

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with 

other materials they will contact, including glass products, and glazing channel 

substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant 

manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for 

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at 

time of installation. 

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full 

range. 

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for 

each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing 

ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint 

substrates. 

1. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants: 

a. Products: 

1) Dow Corning Corporation; 790. 

2) GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 

3) GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. 

4) Pecora Corporation; 964. 

5) Pecora Corporation; 890 

6) Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641. 

7) Soneborn, Div. Of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal. 

8) Tremco; Spectrem 3. 

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 

c. Class: 50. 

d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 

e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing 

substrates indicated, O. 

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4




C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test 

assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating. 

2.5 GLAZING TAPES 

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids 

content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with 

or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for 

application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with 

ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous 

pressure. 

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive 

on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with 

AAMA 800 for the following types: 

1. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of 

liquid sealant. 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing 

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application 

indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or 

minus 5. 

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer 

hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation 

indicated. 

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side 

walking). 

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface 

skin)), polyurethane foam rod, oversized 20 to 50 percent larger than joint width, as approved in 

writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to 

control glazing sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant 

performance. 

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to 

obtain fire-resistance rating. 

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS 

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and 

face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of 

product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance 

requirements. 


3.1 GLAZING 

A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, 

gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, 

including those in referenced glazing publications. 

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5




1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, 

minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable 

tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. 

2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged 

glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass 

with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and 

impair performance and appearance. 

3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by 

preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. 

4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing 

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course 

of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 

5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 

6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 

mm) . 

7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving 

sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and 

according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 

B. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed 

edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but 

not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. 

1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. 

Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. 

2. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not 

lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 

3. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting 

dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of 

removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of 

openings. 

C. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket 

manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 

1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in 

place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. 

2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression 

gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place 

against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward 

centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without 

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by 

gasket manufacturer. 

3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 

D. Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant 

backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent 

sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. 

Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed 

sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. 

1. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or 

bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 

2. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed 

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove 

GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6




nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating 

substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such 

protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances 

immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. 

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from 

natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 

3.3 GLASS SCHEDULE 

A. Type “A”: All exterior glazing shall be impact rated laminated glazing as required per The Florida 

Building Code. 

Nominal Thickness: 9/16-inch thick float glass. 

B. Type “B”: All interior non-fire rated locations. 

Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch thick clear fully tempered float glass. 

C. Type “D” Provide at interior 20 to 90 minute fire-rated openings. 

Nominal 3/16-inch thick glazing, impact safety rated, which meets ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 

1201 (Category I and II) clear glass. 

See Paragraph 2.2, Fire-Rated Glazing Products. 


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7





GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8




SECTION 08 90 00 - LOUVERS AND VENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fixed galvanized hollow metal louvers. 

B. See Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment. 


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria 

indicated. 

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following 

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation 

of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or 

permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. 

2. Comply with Florida Building Code & Wind Loads. 

C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as 

demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length 

and width according to AMCA 500-L. 



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing 

specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. 

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified 

professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

E. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and 

indicated measurements of Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction 

progress to avoid delaying the work. 

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying 

the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field 

measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions 

correspond to established dimensions. 

LOUVERS AND VENTS 08 90 00 - 1





2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 

B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 

1. For fastening galvanized steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 

2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. 

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances 

made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter 

sealant joints. 

B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from 

view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between 

frame members necessary. 

2.3 FIXED LOUVERS 

A. Storm-Resistant Louver: 

1. Manufacturer’s: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

a. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek Inc. 

b. Construction Specialists, Inc. 

c. Ruskin Company; Tompkins PLC. 

2. Louver Depth: 5 inches (125 mm). 

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.52 mm) for blades and 

0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames. 

4. Louver Performance Ratings: Maximum standard airflow not less than 8500 cfm with not 

more than 0/20-inch static pressure loss. 

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS 

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens 

are attached. 

C. Louver Screening: 

1. Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.041-inch (1.04- 

mm) wire. 

2.5 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and 

other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to 

be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair 

according to ASTM A 780. 

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply 

manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting 

topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. Comply with coating 

manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film 

thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) . 

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 







A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. 

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws 

where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. 

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as 

indicated. 

D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot 

be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new units. 

E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, 

or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of 

bituminous paint. 

F. Caulk around perimeter of louver to provide a weather and water tight installation. 











SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGGENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 

2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits. 





A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested 

according to ASTM E 119. 

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly 

indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413. 

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel 

studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) . 

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide one of the 

following: 

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 

2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 

B. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, 

with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 

1. Depth -1/2 inches . 

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm) , thick, galvanized steel. 

C. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.018 inch (0.45 mm)] 

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1




2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm 

D. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 

1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum 

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm) . 

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59- 

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. 



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply 

to framing installation. 

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, 

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing 

members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than 

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior 

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural 

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to 

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above 

ceiling. 

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to 

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished 

assemblies. 

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install 

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 





b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch 

(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in 

finished assembly. 

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead 

structure. 

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required 

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to 

match framing required above door heads. 

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 

E. Direct Furring: 

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, 

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 

1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 

G. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. 

H. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 

mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely 

between parallel members that will receive finishes. 











SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on unit masonry and monolithic 

concrete. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, 

elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 

C. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated. 


A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) in surface area to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of 



A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. 

B. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for 

environmental conditions for applying finishes. 


2.1 METAL LATH 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip 

galvanized zinc coating. 

1. Diamond-Mesh Lath Self-furring, 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. mRib lath is more rigid than 

diamond lath; it is not suitable for contour lathing. 

CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1





A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with 

thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. 

B. Metal Accessories: 

1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 

2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip 

galvanized zinc coating. 

3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 

G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 

4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. 

a. Small-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated. 

5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with 

expanded flanges. 

6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded 

pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and 

removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 

7. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of 

unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 


A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging 

plaster, lath, or accessories. 

B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) 

free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. 

long, 

C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. 

D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required 

by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths 

required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads. 

E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. 

F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21- 

mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I 

1. Color for Finish Coats: White. 





B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N. 

1. Color for Finish Coats: White. 

C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. 

D. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and 

proprietary ingredients. 

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

E. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated 

with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base 

coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based 

finishes. 

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.5 PLASTER MIXES 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two 

minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in 

mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious 

materials. 

B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork 

as follows: 

1. Portland Cement Mixes: 

a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and [0 to 3/4] 

[3/4 to 1-1/2] parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious 

material. 

b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and [0 to 3/4] 

[3/4 to 1-1/2] parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious 

material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 

2. Masonry Cement Mixes: 

a. Scratch Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. 

b. Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less than 

volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 

3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes: 

a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part 

masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 





b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part 

masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but 

not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 

4. Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes: 

a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part 

portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 

b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part 

portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but 

not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 

C. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: 

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 

part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 

2. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland 

cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of 

cementitious material. 

3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. 

D. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: 

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 

1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 

2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. 

3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. 

E. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: 

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and [3/4 to 

1-1/2] [1-1/2 to 2] parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious 

material. 

2. Masonry Cement Mix: 1 part masonry cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate. 

3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland 

cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of 

cementitious material. 

4. Plastic Cement Mix: 1 part plastic cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate. 

F. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with 




A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects 

caused by plastering. 





B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability 

required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 

3.2 INSTALLING METAL LATH 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 

1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-meshlath. 

2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-meshlath. 

3. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-meshlath. 

3.3 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES 

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. 

B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 

1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 

2. Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations. 

C. Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Architect for visual 

effect as follows: 

1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: 

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m) . 

b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 

100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) . 

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 

3. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 

4. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas 

(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension 

change. 

3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 

B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete] plaster bases. 

C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat on 

masonry , on concrete ; 3/4-inch (19-mm) thickness. 

1. Portland cement mixes. 

2. Masonry cement mixes. 

3. Portland and masonry cement mixes. 

4. Portland and plastic cement mixes. 





D. Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork[, 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick on 

concrete masonry , 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick on concrete. 

1. Portland cement mixes. 

2. Masonry cement mixes. 

3. Portland and masonry cement mixes. 

E. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide floatfinish to match Architect's sample. 

F. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and 

sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

G. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhered 

finishes, omit finish coat. 

3.5 PLASTER REPAIRS 

A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, 

dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 






SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum board. 





A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and 

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an 

independent testing agency. 

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical 

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to 

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL 

A. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) 

of Project site. 

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 


following: 

1. CertainTeed Corp. 

2. National Gypsum Company. 

3. USG Corporation. 

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 

1. Thickness: Type ‘X’ - 5/8 inch 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1





D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and 

mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 

1. Core: regular type 5/8 inch. 


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 

E. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paperfaced 

galvanized steel sheet. 

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's 

standard edges. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following: 

a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. 

b. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. 

c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 

2.5 According to the 2006 International Building Code, water-resistant gypsum backing board is 

not permitted for use as a backing board for tile in tub and shower areas or as wall board or 

ceiling panels in JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible 

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

1. ." 

B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 

1. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer 

recycled content. 





C. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission 

through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide 

one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work 

include, but are not limited to, the following]: 

a. Pecora Corporation; [AC-20 FTR] [AIS-919]. 

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." 


3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold 

damaged. 

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural 

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these 

locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between 

edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used 

for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific 

locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 

E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. 

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not 

intended to receive tape. 

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to 

ASTM C 840: 

1. Level 5:At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior 

Painting." 

H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove 

from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise 

damaged during drywall application. 





I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 

END OF SECTION 092900 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 




Rosemary Beach FL. 

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Ceramic tile. 

2. Stone thresholds. 



B. Samples: 

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 

2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for 

each color and finish required. 

3. Stone thresholds and window stools in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 

1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and 

that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount 

installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 


2.1 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for 

types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

B. Floor Tile: Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 

1. See Floor Finish Plan for product. 

C. Wall Tile: Glazed wall tile. 

1. See Floor Finish Plan for product 

TILING 09 30 00 - 1/4




2.2 SETTING MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 


following: 

a. C-Cure. 

b. Custom Building Products. 

c. Laticrete International, Inc. 

d. MAPEI Corporation. 

e. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 

2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added. 

3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. 


A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10. 

B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 


following: 

a. C-Cure. 

b. Custom Building Products. 

c. Laticrete International, Inc. 

d. MAPEI Corporation. 

e. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 

2. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for 

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 

performance of installed tile. 

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are 

incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances 

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by 

ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 

TILING 09 30 00 - 2/4





A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site 

before installing. 


A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods 

specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series 

"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, 

specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete 

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at 

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring 

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight 

aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so 

plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center 

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize 

the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise 

indicated. 

E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) . 

2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) . 

F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, 

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting 

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above 

them. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section 

"Joint Sealants." 

G. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless 


1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent 

floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). 

H. Stone Window Stools: Install stone window stools in bed of construction adhesive. 

3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 

1. Tile Installation F112: Cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to concrete; TCA F112. 

TILING 09 30 00 - 3/4




a. Tile Type: Floor tile. 

b. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex-] portland cement mortar. 

c. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. 

B. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete: 

1. Tile Installation W202: Thin-set mortar; TCA W202. 

a. Tile Type: Wall tile. 

b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. 

c. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. 


TILING 09 30 00 - 4/4




SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 

1. Concrete. 

2. Steel. 

3. Wood. 

4. Gypsum board. 



A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify 

preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set 

quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint 

system specified in Part 3. 

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) . 

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. 

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional 

colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 



A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other Part 2 articles for the 

paint category indicated. 

1. SHERWIN WILLIAMS – NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1




2.2 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and 

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of 

topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

B. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for 

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 

2. Wood: 15 percent. 

3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and 

primers. 

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to 

substrates indicated. 

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be 

painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied 

protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items 

that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and 

incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as 

required to produce paint systems indicated. 





3.3 APPLICATION 

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller 

tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other 

trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an 

undamaged condition. 

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted 

surfaces. 

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

ROOF DECK IN SALES AREA 

EXPOSED 

ROOF 

STRUCTURE 

EXPOSED 

HVAC 

COLOR SURFACE 

B42W2 - 

Tint to SW 

6106 Kilim 

Beige 

B42W2 - 

Tint to SW 

6106 Kilim 

Beige 

Steel - 

Red Iron 

Galvanize 

d Metal 

Aluminu 

m 

Galvanize 

d Metal 

PRIMER 

DESCRIPTION 

DTM Acrylic 

Primer B66W1 

DTM Acrylic 

Primer B66W1 

DTM Acrylic 

Primer B66W1 

DTM Acrylic 

Primer B66W1 

Steel DTM Acrylic 

Primer B66W1 

# FINISH 

COATS DESCRIPTION 

1 Waterborne 

Acrylic Dryfall 

Eg-Shel 

1 Waterborne 


Eg-Shel 

1 Waterborne 


Eg-Shel 

1 Waterborne 


Eg-Shel 

1 Waterborne 


Eg-Shel 

# 

COATS 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 





WALLS 

ROOMS WALLS COLOR SURFACE PRIMER 

101 & 102 

Sales/Service 

Area 

102 Service 

Area 

101 & 102 

T-Wall and 

Half Wall 

103 & 104 

Office & 

Restroom 

Hall 

105 & 106 

Restrooms 

107 & 108 

Stockroom 

& J. Closet 

Front & 

Side 

Walls 

incl. 

Outside 

Office 

Walls 

Back 

Wall 

Only 

T-Wall 

Front 

Only 

Half 

Wall 

Both 

Sides 

All 

Walls 

All 

Finished 

Drywall 

All 

Finished 

Drywall 

SW 6408 - 

Wheat 

Grass 

SW 6349 - 

Pennywise 

SW 6221 - 

Moody 

Blue 

SW 6408 - 

Wheat 

Grass 

SW 6106 - 

Kilim 

Beige 

White 

Gypsum 

Board 

Gypsum 

Board 

Gypsum 

Board 

Gypsum 

Board 

Gypsum 

Board 

Gypsum 

Board 

DESCRIPTION 

High Build 

Interior Latex 

Primer 

B28 W 8601 

High Build 


Primer 

B28 W 8601 – 

Must Tint to 

Color Prime 

System P5 

High Build 


Primer 

B28 W 8601 

High Build 


Primer 

B28 W 8601 

High Build 


Primer B28 W 

8601 

High Build 


Primer 

B28 W 8601 

# 

COAT 

FINISH 

DESCRIPTION 

1 Duration Home 


Matte A96 



Matte A96 



Matte A96 



Satin A97 



Satin A97 

1 ProMar 400 


EgShel 

(B20W400) 

# 

COAT 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 





DOORS AND TRIM 

ROOM COLOR SURFACE FINISH 

All except room 107 

Note: For Eliason or 

Rubbair door, only 

paint doorframe. 

Includes trim on Halfwall 

& T-wall 

Stockroom, EXIT and 

Receiving Doors - 

Inside and Outside 

SW 7038 - 

Tony 

Taupe 

Match 

Building 

Exterior 

Wood 

Metal 

Metal 

DESCRIPTION 

Wall & Wood 

Primer B49W2 

If not factory 

primed, use Alkyd 

metal primer 

If not factory 

primed, use Alkyd 

metal primer 

# FINISH 

COATS DESCRIPTION 

1 ProClassic Interior 

Alkyd Semi- 

Gloss B34 

1 Pro Classic Interior 

Alkyd Semi 

Gloss B34 

1 Industrial Enamel 

B54- Custom 

Match 

# 

COATS 

2 

2 

2 

FLOORS 

ROOM COLOR SURFACE FINISH # COATS 

DESCRIPTION 

NOTES 

Service Area 

Haze Gray Concrete B65A60- 

Armorseal 

Rexthane 

Urethane 

Coating 

I 

Floor 

2 May apply first coat w/ 

up to 10% Reduction 

using R7K65 

Add H&C Shark-Grip 

in 2 nd coat as anti-skid 

additive. 

Stockroom 

Haze Gray Concrete B65A60- 

Armorseal 

Rexthane 

Urethane 

Coating 

I 

Floor 

2 May apply first coat w/ 

up to 10% Reduction 

using R7K65 

Add H&C Shark-Grip 

in 2 nd coat as anti-skid 

additive 






THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK. 




ROSEMARY BEACH, FL 

SECTION 102113.17 - PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.. 



B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachment details. 

C. Samples for each type of toilet compartment material indicated. 


A. Product certificates. 


A. Maintenance data. 



A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing 

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for 

Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 

PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.17 - 1




2.2 PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARMENTS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick Washroom 

Equipment, Inc or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 

2. All American Metal Corp. 

3. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 

4. Ampco, Inc. 

5. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

6. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 

7. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 

8. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 

9. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 

10. Marlite. 

11. Partition Systems Incorporated of South Carolina; Columbia Partitions. 

12. Tex-Lam Manufacturing, Inc. 

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced 

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung 

D. Door, Panel, Screen] and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with 

melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately 

laminated), and with eased and polished edges and no-sightline system Provide minimum 3/4- 

inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels. 

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves Caps: Formed from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch 

(0.79-mm) nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware. 

F. Brackets (Fittings): 

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, [chrome-plated zamac] [clear-anodized aluminum] 

[stainless steel] [chrome-plated brass]. 

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; [stainless steel] 

[aluminum]. 

G. Phenolic-Panel Finish: 

1. Facing Sheet Finish: Same color and pattern in each room. 

2. Color and Pattern: As indicated, with manufacturer's standard through-color core 

matching face sheet. 

3. Edge Color: Through-color matching facing sheet color. 

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories. 

1. Material: Stainless steel. 





2. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments 

designated as accessible. 

B. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty stainless steel operating hardware and 

accessories. 

1. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments 

designated as accessible. 

C. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with 

antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. 

D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished 

to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for 

through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, 

or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials. 


A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate 

requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for 

attachment of toilet accessories. 

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling 

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to 

conceal supports and leveling mechanism. 

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring 

assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide 

shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. 

D. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies 

with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished 

ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to 

finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage. 

E. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant 

anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide 

shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. 

F. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies 

with leveling adjustment nuts at[ tops and] bottoms of posts. Provide shoes[ and sleeves 

(caps)] at posts to conceal anchorage. 

G. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide inswinging 

doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging 

doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments designated as 

accessible. 







A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, 

straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring 

devices. 

1. Maximum Clearances: 

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1 inch (13 mm) . 

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm) . 

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three 

brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. 

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. 

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. 

3. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with fullheight 

brackets. 

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. 

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. 

3.2 ADJUSTING 

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's 

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open 

approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging 

doors[ to return doors to fully closed position. 

END OF SECTION 102113.17 





SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 

2. Underlavatory guards. 

3. Custodial accessories. 



B. Product Schedule: 

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 

2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. 


2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES 


following: 


2. Bradley Corporation. 


B. Refer to the drawings for the accessories noted on the enlarged plans and elevations. 

2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS 


following: 

1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 

2. TCI Products. 

3. Truebro, Inc. 

B. Under-lavatory Guard: 

1. Description: Provide insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that 

prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without 

removing coverings at all exposed under counter lavatories. 

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white. 

2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject 

to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of 



2. Bradley Corporation. 


B. Utility Shelf: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-239. 

2. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) and 

supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside. 

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1





A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. 

Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 



A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate 

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and 

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 


TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2




SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. 



B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 

D. Maintenance data. 


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in 

ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 

B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers 

indicated are accommodated. 

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 

B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, 

Class 1 (clear). 

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET 

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 

1. Basis of Design Products: J L Industries, Inc., Ambassador 1017F with FE Letters and 

SAF-T-LOK. Provide products by one of the following: 

a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

c. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc. 

B. Cabinet Construction: Rated or non-rated as indicated on drawings. 

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 

0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16- 

mm-) thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 

D. Semi-recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style 

of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping 

surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 

Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to 

accommodate semi-recessed cabinet installation. 

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) 

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. 

F. Door Material: Steel sheet/Tempered Glass. 

backbend depth. 

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 13 - 1




G. Door Style: Steel-Framed with Full Glass. 

H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet 

type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 

I. Accessories: 

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to 

fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers 

indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply 

on door handle. Provide SAF-T-LOK offered by J.L. Industries or approved equal. 

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, 

size, spacing, and location. 

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE 

EXTINGUISHER”. 

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 

2) Application Process: Decals. 

3) Lettering Color: Red. 

4) Orientation: Vertical. 

J. Finishes: Baked enamel or Powder coat factory finish. 

1. Color: White. 


A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, 

and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints 

and grind smooth. 



A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed 

cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim 

style. 

B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not 

indicated, at heights indicated below: 

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. 

2. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 

C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 

D. Identification: Apply decals as approved on shop drawings by Architect. 

E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral 

locking devices operate properly. 

F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond 

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 


FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 13 - 2




SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire 

extinguishers. 



B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire 

Extinguishers." 

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent 

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and 

function. 

1.4 WARRANTY 


replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. 

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting 

bracket indicated. 


following: 

a. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. 

b. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 

c. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 

d. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

f. Potter Roemer LLC. 

g. Watrous; Division of American Specialties, Inc. 

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, 

Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, 

maintenance, and recharging. 

3. All portable fire extinguishers shall be tested, serviced and maintained in accordance with 

NFPA 10, 1994. LSC 7-7.4, 1.3.13.1. 

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 1




a. All fire extinguishers shall be serviced, sealed and tagged by a certified fire 

extinguisher company. 

B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet 

and mounting bracket indicated. 

1. Valves: Manufacturer’s standard. 

2. Handles and levers: Manufacturer’s standard. 

C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A: 10-BC, 5-lb (2.3 kg) nominal capacity, with 

mono-ammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled 

container. 

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS 

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall 

or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with 

plated or black baked-enamel finish. 


following: 

a. Amerex Corporation. 

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. 

c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. 

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 

f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

h. Potter Roemer LLC. 



A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. 

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) 

above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations 

indicated. 


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 2




SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Refrigeration appliances. 

2. Dishwasher 






A. Operation and maintenance data. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 




following: 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated 

or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Amana; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. 

2. General Electric Company (GE). (BASIS OF DESIGN) 

3. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. 

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 1




2.2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS 

A. Refrigerator/Freezer Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top and complying with 

AHAM HRF-1. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: General Electric 21.7 Cu. Ft. (total) Stainless Top-Freezer 

Refrigerator Model # GTS22SBXSS 

2. Type: Freestanding. 

3. Storage Capacity: 

a. Refrigeration Compartment Volume15.38 CU. FT> 

b. Freezer Volume: 6.35 CU. FT. 

4. General Features: 

a. Interior light in refrigeration compartment. 

b. \Automatic defrost. 

c. Interior light in freezer compartment. 

5. Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE 

ENERGY STAR product labeling program. 

2.3 DISHWASHER 

A. Dishwasher, under counter with front controls 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: General Electric Stainless Steel under counter Dishwasher 

Model no. GDF520PSDSS 

2. Type: Under counter. 

3. Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE 

ENERGY STAR product labeling program. 



A. Built-in Equipment: Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough 

openings are completely concealed. 

B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in 

each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. 

C. Utilities: Comply with electrical requirements. 






A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

components. 






PAGE LEFT BLANK 





SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators. 


A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and 

similar information. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each 

landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with 

other construction, and locations of equipment. 

2. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of 

support, and maximum and average power demands. 

C. Samples: For exposed finishes. 


A. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and 

machine room control closet layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical 

service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and 

maintenance manuals. 

B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities 

having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to 

Owner, in the form of a standard two-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial 

maintenance service is concluded. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator 

work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 142100 - 1




1. Warranty Period: one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable 

product by one of the following: 

1. .KONE Inc. ECOSTAR (BASIS OF DESIGN) 

2. .Schindler Elevator Corp. 

3. .ThyssenKrupp Elevator. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 

B. Florida Elevator Code. 

C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply Florida Building Code and with Section 407 in the U.S. 

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility 

Guidelines and with ICC A117.1. 

2.3 ELEVATORS 

A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise 

indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator 

systems and as required for complete system. 

B. Elevator Description: 

1. Elevator Number(s): ‘ONE’ as shown on Drawings>. 

2. Machine Location: Machine room (see drawings) 

3. Machine Type: Geared traction. 

4. Rated Load: 2500 lb. 

5. Rated Speed: 150 fpm. 

6. Operation System: Selective-collective automatic operation. 

7. Auxiliary Operations: 

a. Battery-powered lowering. 

b. Inside Depth: Refer to the drawings. 

c. Inside Height: 92 inches to underside of ceiling. 

d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

g. Door Faces (Interior): Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish. 

h. Ceiling: Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish. 

i. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides 

j. Floor prepared to receive Resilient Tile Flooring LVT. 





8. Hoistway Entrances: 

a. Width: 42 inches. 

b. Height: 84 inches. 

c. Type: Single-speed side sliding. 

d. Frames at First Floor and at Other Floors Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish. 

e. Doors and Transoms at First Floor and at Other Floors, Polished stainless 

steel, No. 8 finish. 

9. Hall Fixtures at First Floor, at Other Floors: Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish 

10. Additional Requirements: 

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame 

made from polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish. 

2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS 

A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines and solidstate 

power converters. 

1. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519. 

B. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves 

from the building structure. Comply with Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for materials and 

fabrication. 

C. Guides: Roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides . Provide guides at 

top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. 

D. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to 

provide type of operation indicated. 

E. Group Automatic Operation with Demand-Based Dispatching: Provide reprogrammable 

group automatic system that assigns cars to hall calls based on a dispatching program designed 

to minimize passenger waiting time. System automatically adjusts to demand changes for 

different traffic conditions including heavy incoming, heavy two-way, heavy outgoing, and light 

off-hours as variations of normal two-way traffic. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. KONE Inc.; KCM 831. 

b. Schindler Elevator Corp.; Miconic TX. 

c. ThyssenKrupp Elevator; Traflomatic. 

F. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following 

operational features for elevators where indicated: 





1. Single-Car Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails and car is at a floor, it remains at 

that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it is lowered to the 

next floor below, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery 

and automatic recharging system. 

G. Security Feature: Security feature shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 

1. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches 

at car-control stations. 

2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES 

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more 

microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of 

one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. 

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, 

through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to 

close at reduced kinetic energy. 

2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES 

A. General: steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with removable car 

roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 

1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where 

required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 

B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 

1. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainlesssteel 

sheet. 

2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel 

sheet. 

3. .Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 

4. Sills: Extrudedaluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 

5. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or 

other permanent rigid plastic. 

6. Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with four low-voltage downlights in each panel. Align 

ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels. 

7. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated. 

2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES 

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame 

hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size 

and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction. 

B. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 





1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 

2. Stainless-Steel Doors and Transoms]: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from 

stainless-steel sheet. 

3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 

4. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) 

thick. 

5. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous 

grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. 

2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT 

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call 

has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs. 

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in 

return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, with text and graphics as 

required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible 

signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset 

use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and 

battery backup power supply. 

D. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above 

car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that 

car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if 

not provided in car-control station. 

E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. 

F. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. 

Provide one of the following: 

1. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame[ for each elevator]. 

G. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and 

direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 

H. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by 

ASME A17.1/CSA B44, where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that 

indicates when normal power supply has failed. For each elevator, provide illuminated 

signals that indicate when they are operational and when they are at the designated 

emergency return level with doors open. 

I. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with 

text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide one sign at each hall 

push-button station unless otherwise indicated. 

J. Emergency Access Door at approximately mid-height of shaft. Provide a relay that operates in 

conjunction with elevator power so that when the elevator has power the mag-lock (provided by 





others) has power to secure the shaft door. When the elevator does not have power, power to the 

mag lock is cut off allowing emergency personnel to access the shaft. 

2.9 FINISH MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte 

finish. 

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. 

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. 

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. 



A. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to 

minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system. 

B. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers. 

C. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch (3 mm) , up or down, regardless of load and travel direction. 

D. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, 

nonmetallic grout. 

E. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated: 

1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations to the right side of the elevator 

car door and most convenient for approaching passengers. 

2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 

3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor. 


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use 

(either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by 

ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies. 


A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. Comply 

with the following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes: 





1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished 

car, to protect finishes from damage. 

2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to 

protect elevator and elevator equipment. 

3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. 

4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of 

correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required 

repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. 

3.4 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). 

3.5 MAINTENANCE 

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall 

include twelve (12) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include 

monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, 

lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and 

capacity. 











SECTION 21 13 13 - BUILDING SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEM 

1 GENERAL 

1.1 Drawings and General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2 Division-15 Basic Mechanical Requirements and Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 

sections apply to work of this section. 

1.3 Provide for the design and installation of a wet pipe sprinkler system and all underground 

piping out to and including the post indicator valve and backflow preventer. 

1.4 Codes and Standards: 

1.4.1 NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA 13 "Standard for 

the Installation of Sprinkler Systems". 

1.4.2 UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL standards; provide UL 

label on each product. 

1.4.3 Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with local 

regulations of fire department or fire marshal. 

1.4.4 Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department/Fire Marshal regulations for 

sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to sprinkler 

systems. 

1.5 Test Reports and Verification Submittals: 

1.5.1 Certificate: Submit certificates of Aboveground and Underground Installation upon completion 

of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with 

NFPA 13 and that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 

1.5.2 Tag: Submit a copy of the sprinkler system tag. The installing fire sprinkler contractor shall be 

licensed in accordance with State Fire Marshal (SFM) Rule 4A-46. At the conclusion of the 

project and prior to the final inspection by the SFM the Contractor shall tag the fire sprinkler 

system in accordance with 4A-46.041. 

1.6 O&M Data Submittals: 

1.6.1 Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed fire protection piping 

and products. 

1.6.2 Maintenance Data: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Submit maintenance data and 

parts lists for basic valves, special valves. 

1.6.3 NFPA 25: Provide a copy of NFPA 25 in each O&M Manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

BUILDING SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEM 21 13 13 - 1/2




2.1 General: Provide materials and factory-fabricated products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, 

temperature ratings, and capacities as required. Provide proper selection as determined by 

Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and 

equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire 

protection systems. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 General: Examine areas and conditions under which fire protection materials and products are 

to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 

in manner acceptable to Installer. Install the system per NFPA-13 and the requirements of the 

Authority Having Jurisdiction. Any installation, modification, or alteration of the sprinkler 

system shall be performed only by a person under a certificate of competency issued by the 

State Fire Marshal. 

3.2 All sprinkler heads in acoustical tile ceilings shall be installed in the center of the tile both ways. 

3.3 All sprinklers in finished spaces shall utilize pendant heads. Coordinate type with Architect. 

3.4 Extra Stock: 

3.4.1 Heads: For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional sprinkler heads, 

amounting to one unit for every 100 installed units, but not less than 5 units of each. 

3.4.2 Wrenches: Furnish 2 spanner wrenches for each type and size of valve connection and fire 

hose coupling. Obtain receipt from Owner that extra stock has been received. 

3.4.3 Testing: Refer to Division 22 for pressure testing requirements. 

3.5 Owner Instruction: Provide technical services for one 4-hour period to instruct Owner’s 

personnel in operation and maintenance of building sprinkler systems. Schedule training date 

with Owner. Provide at least 7-day notice to Engineer and Owner of training date. 


BUILDING SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEM 21 13 13 - 2/2




SECTION 22 01 00 - PLUMBING GENERAL 

1 GENERAL 

1.1 The work covered by this division consists of providing all labor, equipment and materials and 

performing all operations necessary for the installation of the plumbing work as herein called 

for and shown on the drawings. 

1.2 Related Documents: 

1.2.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2.2 This is a Basic Plumbing Requirements Section. Provisions of this section apply to work of all 

Division 22 sections. 

1.2.3 Review all other contract documents to be aware of conditions affecting work herein. 

1.2.4 Definitions: 

1.2.4.1 Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 

1.2.4.2 Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for subsequent requirements. 

1.2.4.3 Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, 

anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar 

requirements. 

1.3 Permits and Fees: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, meters, and inspections 

required for his work and pay all fees and charges incidental thereto. 

1.4 Verification of Owner's Data: Prior to commencing any work the Contractor shall satisfy 

himself as to the accuracy of all data as indicated in these plans and specifications and/or as 

provided by the Owner. Should the Contractor discover any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions 

in the data, he shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer in order that proper adjustments 

can be anticipated and ordered. Commencement by the Contractor of any work shall be held 

as an acceptance of the data by him after which time the Contractor has no claim against the 

Owner resulting from alleged errors, omissions or inaccuracies of the said data. 

1.5 Delivery and Storage of Materials: Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, 

unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. All material shall be stored to provide 

protection from the weather and accidental damage. 

1.6 Extent of work is indicated by the drawings, schedules, and the requirements of the 

specifications. Singular references shall not be constructed as requiring only one device if 

multiple devices are shown on the drawings or are required for proper system operation. 

1.7 Field Measurements and Coordination: 

1.7.1 The intent of the drawings and specifications is to obtain a complete and satisfactory 

installation. Separate divisional drawings and specifications shall not relieve the Contractor or 

subcontractors from full compliance of work of his trade indicated on any of the drawings or in 

any section of the specifications. 

PLUMBING GENERAL 22 01 00 - 1/8




1.7.2 Verify all field dimensions and locations of equipment to insure close, neat fit with other trades' 

work. Make use of all contract documents and approved shop drawings to verify exact 

dimension and locations. 

1.7.3 Coordinate work in this division with all other trades in proper sequence to insure that the total 

work is completed within contract time schedule and with a minimum cutting and patching. 

1.7.4 Locate all apparatus symmetrical with architectural elements. Install to exact height and 

locations when shown on architectural drawings. When locations are shown only on plumbing 

drawings, be guided by architectural details and conditions existing at job and correlate this 

work with that of others. 

1.7.5 Install work as required to fit structure, avoid obstructions, and retain clearance, headroom, 

openings and passageways. Cut no structural members without written approval. 

1.7.6 Carefully examine any existing conditions, piping, and premises. Compare drawings with 

existing conditions. Report any observed discrepancies. It shall be the Contractor's 

responsibility to properly coordinate the work and to identify problems in a timely manner. 

Written instructions will be issued to resolve discrepancies. 

1.7.7 Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets and fittings 

or to locate every accessory. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Study carefully the sizes 

and locations of structural members, wall and partition locations, trusses, and room 

dimensions and take actual measurements on the job. Locate piping, equipment and 

accessories with sufficient space for installing and servicing. Contractor is responsible for 

accuracy of his measurements and for coordination with all trades. Contractor shall not order 

materials or perform work without such verification. No extra compensation will be allowed 

because field measurements vary from the dimensions on the drawings. If field measurements 

show that equipment or piping cannot be fitted, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted. 

Remove and relocate, without additional compensation, any item that is installed and is later 

found to encroach on space assigned to another use. 

1.8 Guarantee: 

1.8.1 The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials and equipment for a period of one (1) year 

from Substantial Completion, or from Owner's occupancy, whichever is earlier. Contractor 

shall make good any defects and shall include all necessary adjustments to and replacement 

of defective items without expense to the Owner. 

1.8.2 Owner reserves right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation 

without voiding Contractor's Guarantee Bond nor relieving Contractor of his responsibilities 

during guarantee period. 

1.9 Approval Submittals: 

1.9.1 When approved, the submittal control log and submittals shall be an addition to the 

specifications herewith, and shall be of equal force in that no deviation will be permitted except 

with the approval of the Architect/Engineer. 

1.9.1.1 Shop drawings, product literature, and other approval submittals will only be reviewed if they 

are submitted in full accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 

1 Specification sections and the following. 

1.9.1.1.1 Submittals shall be properly organized in accordance with the approved submittal control log. 





1.9.1.1.2 Submittals shall not include items from more than one specification section in the same 

submittal package unless approved in the submittal control log. 

1.9.1.1.3 Submittals shall be properly identified by a cover sheet showing the project name, Architect 

and Engineer names, submittal control number, specification section, a list of products or item 

names with model numbers in the order they appear in the package, and spaces for approval 

stamps. A sample cover sheet is included at the end of this section. 

1.9.1.1.4 Submittals shall have been reviewed and approved by the General Contractor (or Prime 

Contractor). Evidence of this review and approval shall be an "Approved" stamp with a 

signature and date on the cover sheet. 

1.9.1.1.5 Submittals that include a series of fixtures or devices (such as plumbing fixtures or valves) 

shall be organized by the fixture number or valve type and be marked accordingly. Each 

fixture must include all items associated with that fixture regardless of whether or not those 

items are used on other fixtures. 

1.9.1.1.6 The electrical design shown on the drawings supports the plumbing equipment basis of design 

specifications at the time of design. If plumbing equipment is submitted with different electrical 

requirements, it is the responsibility of the plumbing contractor to resolve all required electrical 

design changes (wire and conduit size, type of disconnect or overload protection, point(s) of 

connection, etc.) and clearly show the new electrical design on the plumbing submittal with a 

written statement that this change will be provided at no additional cost. Plumbing submittals 

made with no written reference to the electrical design will be presumed to work with the 

electrical design. Any corrections required will be at no additional cost. 

1.9.2 If the shop drawings show variation from the requirements of contract because of standard 

shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention of such variation in 

writing in his letter of transmittal and on the submittal cover sheet in order that, if acceptable, 

Contractor will not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with 

the contract. 

1.9.3 Review of shop drawings, product literature, catalog data, or schedules shall not relieve the 

Contractor from responsibility for deviations from contract drawings or specifications, unless he 

has in writing called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer each such deviation in writing at 

the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop 

drawings, product literature, catalog data, or schedules. Any feature or function specified but 

not mentioned in the submittal shall be assumed to be included per the specification. 

1.9.4 Submit shop drawings as called for in other sections after award of the contract and before any 

material is ordered or fabricated. Shop drawings shall consist of plans, sections, elevations 

and details to scale (not smaller than ¼" per foot), with dimensions clearly showing the 

installation. Direct copies of small scale project drawings issued to the Contractor are not 

acceptable. Drawings shall take into account equipment furnished under other sections and 

shall show space allotted for it. Include construction details and materials. 

1.10 Test Reports and Verification Submittals: Submit test reports, certifications and verification 

letters as called for in other sections. Contractor shall coordinate the required testing and 

documentation of system performance such that sufficient time exists to prepare the reports, 

submit the reports, review the reports and take corrective action within the scheduled contract 

time. 

1.11 O&M Data Submittals: Submit Operation and Maintenance data as called for in other sections. 

When a copy of approval submittals is included in the O&M Manual, only the final “Approved” 

or “Approved as Noted” copy shall be used. Contractor shall organize these data in the O&M 





Manuals tabbed by specification number. Prepare O&M Manuals as required by Division 1 

and as described herein.. Submit manuals at the Substantial Completion inspection. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 All materials shall be new or Owner-supplied reused as shown on the drawings, the best of 

their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at the building 

and shall be of reputable manufacturers. The description, characteristics, and requirements of 

materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditions established in the 

following sections. 

2.2 Equipment and Materials: 

2.2.1 Shall be new and the most suitable grade for the purpose intended. Equipment furnished 

under this division shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture 

of such items for a period of three years. Where practical, all of the components shall be 

products of a single manufacturer in order to provide proper coordination and responsibility. 

Where required, Contractor shall furnish proof of installation of similar units or equipment. 

2.2.2 Each item of equipment shall bear a name plate showing the manufacturer's name, trade 

name, model number, serial number, ratings and other information necessary to fully identify it. 

This plate shall be permanently mounted in a prominent location and shall not be concealed, 

insulated or painted. 

2.2.3 The label of the approving agency, such as UL, IBR, ASME, ARI, AMCA, by which a standard 

has been established for the particular item shall be in full view. 

2.2.4 The equipment shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged 

in the production of such equipment and shall be a product of the manufacturer's latest design. 

2.2.5 A service organization with personnel and spare parts shall be available within two hours for 

each type of equipment furnished. 

2.2.6 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Place in service by a factory 

trained representative where required. 

2.2.7 Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple manufacturers to 

indicate quality, material and type of construction desired. Manufacturer's products shown on 

the drawings have been used as basis for design; it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to 

ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products, or the particular products of named 

manufacturers, meet the detailed specifications and that size and arrangement of equipment 

are suitable for installation. 

2.2.8 Model Numbers: Catalog numbers and model numbers indicated in the drawings and 

specifications are used as a guide in the selection of the equipment and are only listed for the 

contractor's convenience. The contractor shall determine the actual model numbers for 

ordering materials in accordance with the written description of each item and with the intent of 

the drawings and specifications. 

2.3 Requests for Substitution: 

2.3.1 Where a particular system, product or material is specified by name, consider it as standard 

basis for bidding, and base proposal on the particular system, product or material specified. 





2.3.2 Requests by Contractor for substitution will be considered only when reasonable, timely, fully 

documented, and qualifying under one or more of the following circumstances. 

2.3.2.1 Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract time requirements. 

2.3.2.2 Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non-compatible, 

or cannot be properly coordinated, warranted or insured, or has other recognized disability as 

certified by Contractor. 

2.3.2.3 Substantial cost advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages including 

delays, additional compensation for redesign, investigation, evaluation and other necessary 

services and similar considerations. 

2.3.3 All requests for substitution shall contain a "Comparison Schedule" and clearly and specifically 

indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as the basis of 

design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include but shall not be 

limited to data as follows for both the specified and substituted products: 

Principal of operation. 

Materials of construction or finishes. 

Thickness of gauge of materials. 

Weight of item. 

Deleted features or items. 

Added features or items. 

Changes in other work caused by the substitution. 

Performance curves. 

If the approved substitution contains differences or omissions not specifically called to the 

attention of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner reserves the right to require equal or similar 

features to be added to the substituted products (or to have the substituted products replaced) 

at the Contractor's expense. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed and completed in a first-class 

workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best modern methods and practice. Any 

materials installed which do not present an orderly and reasonably neat and/or workmanlike 

appearance, or do not allow adequate space for maintenance, shall be removed and replaced 

when so directed by the Architect/Engineer. 

3.2 Coordination: 

3.2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for full coordination of the plumbing systems with shop 

drawings of the building construction so the proper openings and sleeves or supports are 

provided for piping or other equipment passing through slabs or walls. 

3.2.2 Any additional steel supports required for the installation of any plumbing equipment or piping 

shall be furnished and installed under the section of the specifications requiring the additional 

supports. 

3.2.3 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that all equipment such as valves, dampers, 

filters and such other apparatus or equipment that may require maintenance and operation are 

made easily accessible, regardless of the diagrammatic location shown on the drawings. 





3.2.4 All connections to fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings shall be considered 

diagrammatic unless otherwise indicated by detail. The actual connections shall be made to 

fully suit the requirements of each case and adequately provide for expansion and servicing. 

3.2.5 The contractor shall protect equipment, material, and fixtures at all times. He shall replace all 

equipment, material, and fixtures which are damaged as a result of inadequate protection. 

3.2.6 Prior to starting and during progress of work, examine work and materials installed by others 

as they apply to work in this division. Report conditions which will prevent satisfactory 

installation. 

3.2.7 Start of work will be construed as acceptance of suitability of work of others. 

3.3 Interruption of Service: Before any equipment is shut down for disconnecting or tie-ins, 

arrangements shall be made with the Architect/Engineer and this work shall be done at the 

time best suited to the Owner. This will typically be on weekends and/or holidays and/or after 

normal working hours. Services shall be restored the same day unless prior arrangements are 

made. All overtime or premium costs associated with this work shall be included in the base 

bid. 

3.4 Phasing: Provide all required temporary valves, piping, equipment and devices as required. 

Maintain temporary services to areas as required. Remove all temporary material and 

equipment on completion of work unless Engineer concurs that such material and equipment 

would be beneficial to the Owner on a permanent basis. 

3.5 Cutting and Patching: Notify General Contractor to do all cutting and patching of all holes, 

chases, sleeves, and other openings required for installation of equipment furnished and 

installed under this section. Utilize experienced trades for cutting and patching. Obtain 

permission from Architect/Engineer before cutting any structural items. 

3.6 Equipment Setting: Bolt equipment directly to concrete pads or vibration isolators as required, 

using hot-dipped galvanized anchor bolts, nuts and washers. Level equipment. 

3.7 Painting: Touch-up factory finishes on equipment located inside and outside shall be done 

under Division 22. Obtain matched color coatings from the manufacturer and apply as 

directed. If corrosion is found during inspection on the surface of any equipment, clean, prime, 

and paint, as required. 

3.8 Clean-up: Thoroughly clean all exposed parts of apparatus and equipment of cement, plaster, 

and other materials and remove all oil and grease spots. Repaint or touch up as required to 

look like new. During progress of work, contractor is to carefully clean up and leave premises 

and all portions of building free from debris and in a clean and safe condition. 

3.9 Start-up and Operational Test: Start each item of equipment in strict accordance with the 

manufacturer's instructions; or where noted under equipment specification, start-up shall be 

done by a qualified representative of the manufacturer. Alignment, lubrication, safety, and 

operating control shall be included in start-up check. 

3.10 Record Drawings: 

3.10.1 During the progress of the work the Contractor shall record on their field set of drawings the 

exact location, as installed, of all piping, equipment, and other systems which are not installed 

exactly as shown on the contract drawings. 





3.10.2 Upon completion of the work, record drawings shall be prepared as described in the General 

Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 sections. 

3.11 Acceptance: 

3.11.1 Punch List: Submit written confirmation that all punch lists have been checked and the 

required work completed. 

3.11.2 Instructions: At completion of the work, provide a competent and experienced person who is 

thoroughly familiar with project, for one day to instruct permanent operating personnel in 

operation of equipment and control systems. This is in addition to any specific equipment 

operation and maintenance training. 

3.11.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish four complete manuals bound in ring binders 

with Table of Contents, organized, and tabbed by specification section. Manuals shall contain: 

Detailed operating instructions and instructions for making minor adjustments. 

Complete wiring and control diagrams. 

Routine maintenance operations. 

Manufacturer's catalog data, service instructions, and parts lists for each piece of operating 

equipment. 

Copies of approved submittals. 

Copies of all manufacturer's warranties. 

Copies of test reports and verification submittals. 

3.11.4 Record Drawings: Submit record drawings. 











SECTION 22 05 23 - VALVES 

1 GENERAL 

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 

1.2 This section is a Division-22 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-22 

section making reference to or requiring valves specified herein. 

1.3 Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other 

Division-22 sections. 

1.4 Quality Assurance: 

1.4.1 Valve Dimensions: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged or welding-end valve 

bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10. 

1.4.2 Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer. 

1.5 Approval Submittals: When required by other Division-22 sections, submit product data, catalog 

cuts, specifications, and dimensioned drawings for each type of valve. Include pressure drop 

curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit valves with Division-22 section using the 

valves, not as a separate submittal. For each valve, identify systems where the valve is intended 

for use. 

1.5.1 Gate Valves. Type GA. 

1.5.2 Ball Valves. Type BA. 

1.6 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of approval submittals. Submit installation instructions, 

maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of valve. Include this data in the O&M 

Manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service 

indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as 

determined by Installer to comply with specifications and installation requirements. Provide sizes 

as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. 

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide valves of one of the 

producers listed for each valve type. The model numbers are listed for contractor’s convenience 

only. In the case of a model number discrepancy, the written description shall govern. 

2.3 Gate Valves: 

2.3.1 Packing: Select valves designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened, equipped with 

non-asbestos packing suitable for intended service. Select valves designed so back seating 

protects packing and stem threads from fluid when valve is fully opened, and equipped with gland 

follower. 

2.3.2 Comply with the following standards: 

Cast Iron Valves: MSS SP-70. Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 

Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80. Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 

VALVES 22 05 23 - 1/4




Steel Valves: ANSI B16.34. Steel Standard Class Valve Ratings. 

2.3.3 Types of gate (GA) valves: 

1 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (GA1): Class 125, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising 

stem, solid wedge. Stockham B-100. Nibco T-111. Crane 428. Milwaukee 148. 

2 Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller (GA2): Class 125, bronze body, screwed bonnet, nonrising 

stem, solid wedge. Stockham B-108 or B-109. Nibco S-111. Crane 1334. 

Milwaukee 149. 

3 Flanged Ends 2½" and Larger (GA3): Class 125, iron body, bronze mounted, bolted 

bonnet, rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge. Stockham G-623. Nibco F617-0. Crane 465½. 

Milwaukee F2885. 

4 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (GA4): Class 150, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising 

stem, solid wedge. Stockham B-122. Nibco T-131. Crane 431. Milwaukee 1150. 

5 Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller (GA5): Class 150, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising 

stem, solid wedge. Stockham B-124. Nibco S-134. Milwaukee 1169. 

6 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (GA6): 175 WWP, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising 

stem, OS&Y, solid wedge, UL-listed. Stockham B-133. Nibco T-104-0. 

7 Flanged Ends 2½" and Larger (GA7): 175 WWP, iron body, bolted bonnet, rising stem, 

OS&Y, solid wedge, UL listed. Stockham G-634. Nibco F-607-0TS 

8 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (GA8): Class 200, bronze body, union bonnet, rising 

stem, solid wedge, renewable seat. Stockham B-132. Nibco T-154-SS. Milwaukee 

1174. 

9 Flanged Ends 2½" and Larger (GA9): Class 250, iron body bronze mounted, bolted 

bonnet, rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge. Stockham F-667. Nibco F-667-0. Crane 7½E. 

Milwaukee F-2894. 

10 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (GA10): Class 300, bronze body, union bonnet, rising 

stem, solid wedge, renewable seat. Stockham B-145. Nibco T-174-SS. Crane 634E. 

Milwaukee 1184. 

11 Flanged Ends 2½" and Larger (GA11): Class 300, cast steel body, bolted bonnet, rising 

stem, solid wedge, seal-welded seat rings. Provide trim to match use. Stockham 30-0F. 

Crane 33. 

12 Flanged Ends 2½" and Larger (GA12): 300 WWP, iron body, bolted bonnet, bronze 

mounted, rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge, UL-listed. Stockham F-670. Nibco F-697-0. 

2.4 Ball Valves: 

2.6.1 General: Select with port area equal to or greater than connecting pipe area, include seat ring 

designed to hold sealing material. 

2.6.2 Construction: Ball valves shall be rated for 150 psi saturated steam and 600 psi non-shock cold 

water. Pressure containing parts shall be constructed of ASTM B-584 alloy 844, or ASTM B-124 

alloy 377. Valves shall be furnished with blow-out proof bottom loaded stem constructed of 

ASTM B-371 alloy 694 or other approved low zinc material. Provide TFE packing, TFE thrust 

washer, chrome-plated ball and reinforced teflon seats. Valves 1" and smaller shall be full port 

VALVES 22 05 23 - 2/4




design. Valves 1¼" and larger shall be conventional port design. Stem extensions shall be 

furnished for use in insulated piping where insulation exceeds ½” thickness. 

2.6.3 Comply with the following standards: 

MSS SP-72. Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding Ends for General Service. 

MSS SP-110. Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. 

2.6.4 Types of ball (BA) valves: 

1 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (BA1): Bronze two-piece full port body with adjustable 

stem packing. Nibco T-585-70. Stockham S216-BR-R-T. Milwaukee BA125. Apollo 77- 

100. 

2 Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller (BA2): Bronze three-piece full port body with adjustable 

stem packing. Nibco S-595-Y-66. Milwaukee BA350. Apollo 82-200. 

3 Threaded Ends 1" and Smaller (BA3): Bronze two-piece full port body, UL listed (UL 

842) for use with flammable liquids and LP gas. Nibco T-585-70-UL. 

4 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (BA4): 175 WWP, bronze two-piece body, UL listed for 

fire protection service. Nibco KT-585-70-UL and KT-580-70-UL. 

5 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (BA5): 400 WWP, bronze two-piece body, for fire 

protection service. Nibco KT-580. 

6 Threaded Ends 2½" and Smaller (BA6): 300 WWP, bronze three-piece body, gear 

operator with handwheel, indicator flag, accepts tamper switch, for fire protection, UL 

listed. Nibco T-505-4 and G-505-4. 

7 Flanged Ends 2½” and Larger (BA7): Class 150, carbon steel full bore two-piece body 

with adjustable stem packing. Nibco F515-CS series. Apollo 88-240. 

2.5 Valve Features: 

2.8.1 General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide 

proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ANSI 

B31.1 

2.8.2 Valve features specified or required shall comply with the following: 

1 Flanged: Provide valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5 

(steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze). 

2 Threaded: Provide valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1. 

3 Solder-Joint: Provide valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18. 

4 Trim: Fabricate pressure-containing components of valve, including stems (shafts) and 

seats from brass or bronze materials, of standard alloy recognized in valve manufacturing 

industry unless otherwise specified. 

5 Non-Metallic Disc: Provide non-metallic material selected for service indicated in 

accordance with manufacturer's published literature. 

6 Renewable Seat: Design seat of valve with removable disc, and assemble valve so disc 

VALVES 22 05 23 - 3/4




can be replaced when worn. 

7 Extended Stem: Increase stem length by 2" minimum, to accommodate insulation 

applied over valve. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Installation: 

3.1.1 General: Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including 

valves in branch lines to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so 

that separate support can be provided when necessary. Install valves with stems pointed up, in 

vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward below horizontal 

plane. 

3.1.2 Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper 

manner to receive insulation. 

3.1.3 Applications Subject to Corrosion: Do not install bronze valves and valve components in direct 

contact with steel, unless bronze and steel are separated by dielectric insulator. 

3.1.4 Mechanical Actuators: Install mechanical actuators as recommended by valve manufacturer. 

3.2 Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install 

valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 

3.2.1 Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Threaded valves. 

3.2.2 Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Threaded valves. 

3.2.3 Pipe Size 2½" and Larger: Flanged valves. 

3.3 Non-Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic disc to locations 

indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shutoff of 

metal seated valves. 

3.4 Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise 

indicated. 


VALVES 22 05 23 - 4/4




SECTION 22 05 48 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS 

1 GENERAL 

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and 

Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2 This section is a Division-22 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each 

Division-22 section making reference to or requiring supports, anchors, and seals specified 

herein. 

1.3 Extent of supports, anchors, and seals required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or 

specified in other Division-22 sections. 

1.4 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and 

installation of supports, anchors, and seals. 

1.5 MSS Standard Compliance: 

1.5.1 Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with 

ANSI/MSS SP-58. 

1.5.2 Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. 

1.5.3 Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. 

1.5.4 Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide supports and 

hangers by Grinnel, Michigan Hanger Company, B-Line Systems, or approved equal. 

2.2 Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factoryfabricated 

horizontal-piping hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of 

the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in 

accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one 

type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to 

exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or 

shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping 

systems. 

2.2.1 Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1. 

2.2.2 Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. 

2.2.3 Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7. 

2.2.4 Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. 

2.2.5 Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor 

flange. 

2.2.6 Single Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 41. 

2.2.7 Adjustable Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43. 

SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS 22 05 48 - 1/4




2.2.8 Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44 or Type 47. 

2.3 Vertical-Piping Clamps: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated verticalpiping 

clamps complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, 

selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and 

manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly 

fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. 

2.3.1 Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 

2.3.2 Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. 

2.4 Hanger-Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hangerrod 

attachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, 

selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance 

with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one 

manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger 

rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems. 

2.4.1 Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 

2.4.2 Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. 

2.5 Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated building 


selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and 

manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit 

hanger rods. 

2.5.1 Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. 

2.5.2 C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. 

2.5.3 Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 

2.5.4 Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. 

2.5.5 Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. 

2.6 Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping 

hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for 

exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 

2.6.1 Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent 

crushing of insulation. 

2.6.2 Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; use with rollers, fill interior voids with segments of 

insulation matching adjoining insulation. 

2.7 Miscellaneous Materials: 

2.7.1 Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. 

2.7.2 Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ANSI/ASTM A 36. 





2.7.3 Cement Grout: Portland cement (ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly 

graded, natural sand (ANSI/ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 

parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. 

2.7.4 Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes or continuous channel struts 

selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Preparation 

3.1.1 Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building 

structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct 

inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other 

building structural attachments. 

3.1.2 Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at 

project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, and installers of 

other work requiring coordination with work of this section for purpose of reviewing material 

selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with 

requirements specified. 

3.2 Installation of Building Attachments: 

3.2.1 Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for 

proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in 

MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional 

concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at 

changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert 

securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, 

install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 

3.2.2 In areas of work requiring attachments to existing concrete, use self drilling rod inserts, Phillips 

Drill Co., "Red-Head" or equal. 

3.3 Installation of Hangers and Supports: 

3.3.1 General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from 

building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal 

piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with 

maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69 or as listed herein, whichever is most limiting. 

Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers 

for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use 

wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 

3.3.1.1 Horizontal steel pipe and copper tube 1-1/4" diameter and smaller: support on 6 foot centers. 

3.3.1.2 Horizontal steel pipe and copper tube 1-1/2" diameter and larger: support on 10 foot centers. 

3.3.1.3 Vertical steel pipe and copper tube: support at each floor. 

3.3.1.4 Plastic pipe: support in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

3.3.2 Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and 

other accessories. 





3.3.3 Paint all black steel hangers with black enamel. Galvanized steel and copper clad hangers do 

not require paint. 

3.3.4 Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are 

copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. 

3.3.5 Provision for Movement: 

3.3.5.1 Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit 

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, 

expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 

3.3.5.2 Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and 

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

3.3.5.3 Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that 

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. 

3.3.6 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 

3.3.6.1 Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated, install 

coated protective shields. 

3.3.6.2 Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through 

insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 

3.4 Installation of Anchors: 

3.4.1 Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI 

B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 

3.4.2 Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to 

structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. 

3.4.3 Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal piperuns, 

at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and elbows. Make 

provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction 

of piping. 

3.4.4 Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion 

unit manufacturer's written instructions to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums 

recommended by manufacturer for each unit. 






SECTION 22 05 56 - ACCESS DOORS 

1 GENERAL 


and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2 This section is a Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods section, and is part of 

each Division-22 section making reference to or requiring access panels specified herein. 


1.3.1 Product Data: When required by other Division-22 sections, submit product data for access 

doors. Submit with Division-22 section using access doors, not as a separate submittal. 

Include rating data. 

1.4 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of approval submittal. Include this data in O&M 

Manuals. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide access doors by 

Milcor, Jay R. Smith, Zurn, BOICO, Elmdor, or approved equal. 

2.2 General: Where floors, walls and ceilings must be penetrated for access to plumbing work, 

provide types of access doors indicated. Furnish sizes indicated or, where not otherwise 

indicated, furnish adequate size for intended and necessary access. Furnish manufacturer's 

complete units, of type recommended for application in indicated substrate construction, in 

each case, complete with anchorages and hardware. 

2.3 Access Door Construction: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate wall/ceiling door units of 

welded stainless steel construction with welds ground smooth; 16-gauge frames and 14-gauge 

flush panel doors; 175° swing with concealed spring hinges; flush screw-driver-operated cam 

locks; brushed stainless finish. 

2.4 Locks: Where indicated, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, individually keyed unless 

otherwise indicated, 2 keys. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Access doors shall be installed to operate and service all plumbing equipment including 

valves, dampers, duct access panels, and other items requiring maintenance that are 

concealed above or behind finished construction. Access doors shall be installed in walls, 

chase and floors as necessary, but are not required in accessible suspended ceiling systems. 

Access doors shall have factory applied protective phosphate coating and baked enamel 

primer suitable for field painting. 

3.2 Access doors shall be installed by the Division installing the substrate construction. However, 

responsibility for furnishing and determining location of access doors is part of this Division's 

work. The style of access door shall be suitable for construction into which installed. 

ACCESS DOORS 22 05 56 - 1/2




3.3 Access doors shall be sized and located as required to provide proper maintenance and 

service access in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and code authority 

requirements for all devices and equipment. 


ACCESS DOORS 22 05 56 - 2/2




SECTION 22 05 59 - TESTING, CLEANING, AND STERILIZATION OF PIPING 

SYSTEMS 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 This section is a Division-22 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is part of 

each Division-22 section making reference to or requiring the testing and other procedures 

specified herein. 

1.3 Notify the Architect/Engineer when system tests are ready to be witnessed at least 24 hours 

prior to the test. 

1.4 All materials, test equipment, and devices required for cleaning, testing, sterilizing or purging 

shall be provided by the Contractor. 

2 PRESSURE TESTS 

2.1 General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test piping 

systems before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before 

testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping 

system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each 

section with indicated medium and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 

2.2 Required test period is four hours. 

2.3 No piping, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they have been tested. 

The contractor shall apply each test and ensure that it is satisfactory for the period specified 

before calling the Architect/Engineer to observe the test. Test shall be repeated upon request 

to the satisfaction of those making the inspection. 

2.4 Observe each test section for leakage at the end of the test period. Test fails if leakage is 

observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of the test pressure. 

2.5 Check of systems during application of test pressures should include visual check for water 

leakage and soap bubble or similar check for air and nitrogen leakage. 

2.6 During heating and cooling cycles, linear expansion shall be checked at all elbows and 

expansion joints for proper clearance. 

2.7 Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test. Disassemble and re-install 

using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak 

compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 

2.8 Pressure Test Requirements: 

2.8.1 Soil, Waste, and Vent Test all piping within the building with a 10 foot head of water. Test 

piping in sections so that all joints are tested. Provide test tees as required. 

2.8.2 Domestic Water: Perform hydrostatic test on all piping within the building at twice the normal 

static pressure at service point, but not less than 100 psig. Once tested, flush out piping and 

leave under pressure of the supply main or 40 psig for the balance of the construction period. 

TESTING, CLEANING, AND STERILIZATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS 22 05 59 - 1/2




2.8.3 Storm Water: Test rain leaders and all piping within the building with a 10 foot head of water. 

Test piping in sections so that all joints are tested. Provide test tees as required. 

2.8.4 Fire Sprinkler System: Perform hydrostatic test at 200 psig. 

2.8.5 Gas: Test with air or nitrogen at 150% of normal working pressure, but not less than 25 psig. 

The test and check for leaks shall be in accordance with NFPA-54. 

3 CLEANING AND STERILIZATION 

3.1 General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and 

prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean water 

or blowdown with air before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system 

for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. 

3.2 Flush and drain all water systems at least three times. Reverse flush systems from smallest 

piping to largest piping. Replace startup strainers with operating strainers. 

3.3 Blowdown all gas systems with air or nitrogen (at a rate of flow exceeding design) at least 

three times or until no residue shows at each outlet. Reverse blowdown systems from 

smallest piping to largest piping. 

3.4 Sterilization of Domestic Water Systems: 

3.4.1 Prerequisites: All new hot and cold water piping installed (complete), all fixtures connected, 

system flushed out, and system filled with water. 

3.4.2 The shut off valve at the point of connection shall be closed, all fixture outlets opened slightly, 

and a sterilizing solution shall be introduced at a manifold connection installed by the 

Contractor the point of connection. 

3.4.3 The solution shall contain 50 parts per million of available chlorine. The chlorinating material 

shall be either liquid chlorine or calcium hypochlorite. The solution shall be allowed to stand in 

the system for at least eight hours after which the entire system shall be flushed. 

3.4.4 After final flushing, all aerators shall be removed, cleaned, and reinstalled. After final flush the 

residual chlorine shall not exceed 0.2 parts per million. 

3.4.5 The Architect/Engineer shall be notified 24 hours prior to the procedure so that it can be 

witnessed. 

3.4.6 Provide sampling and certified report by an independent testing lab. Provide written Health 

Department approval of disinfection samples. 

3.5 Fuel Gas: Purge all fuel gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54. 


TESTING, CLEANING, AND STERILIZATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS 22 05 59 - 2/2




SECTION 22 05 63 - EXCAVATION & BACKFILL 

1 GENERAL 




each Division-22 section making reference to or requiring excavation and backfill specified 

herein. 

1.3 Refer to other Division-22 sections and/or drawings for specific requirements of the particular 

piping system being installed. Where another Division-22 section or the drawings conflict with 

requirements of this section, the other Division-22 section or the drawings shall take 

precedence over the general requirements herein. 

1.4 OSHA: Contractor employee worker protection for all trenching and excavation operations 

shall comply with 29 CFR 1926.650 Subpart P and all current OSHA requirements. 

1.5 Trench Safety Act: Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Florida Statutes Chapter 

553, including the requirement to provide a separate line item to identify the cost to comply on 

a per lineal foot of trench and per square foot of shoring. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Sand: Clean, hard, uncoated grains free from organic matter or other deleterious substances. 

Sand for backfill shall be of a grade equal to mortar sand. 

2.2 Gravel: Clean, well graded hard stone or gravel, free from organic material. Size range to be 

from No. 4 screen retentions to 1". 

2.3 Earth: Fill free of clay, muck, stones, wood, roots or rubbish. 

2.4 Identification Tape: Polyethylene 6 inches wide, 0.004 inches thick, continuously printed with 

"CAUTION" in large letters and type of pipe below. 

2.5 Copper Identification Wire: 14-gauge. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Ditching and Excavation: Shall be performed by hand wherever there is a possibility of 

encountering obstacles or any existing utility lines of any nature whatsoever. Where clear and 

unobstructed areas are to be excavated, appropriate machine excavation methods may be 

employed. Avoid use of machine excavators within the limits of the building lines. 

3.2 Bedding: Excavate to bottom grade of pipe to be installed, and shape bed of undisturbed earth 

to contour of pipe for a width of at least 50% of pipe diameter. If earth conditions necessitate 

excavation below grade of the pipe, such as due to the presence of clay, muck, or roots, 

subcut and bring bed up to proper elevation with clean, new sand (as described in paragraph 

2.1), deposited in 6" layers and tamped. Notify Architect/Engineer if subcut exceeds 12", or if 

bed is of an unstable nature. In this case a 6" minimum layer of gravel will be required before 

sand bedding begins. Submit cost proposal if the earth conditions require subcut in excess of 

12" or if gravel is required to achieve proper bedding. 

3.3 Placing: Pipe shall be carefully handled into place. Avoid knocking loose soil from the banks 

of the trench into the pipe bed. Rig heavier sections with nylon slings in lieu of wire rope to 

EXCAVATION & BACKFILL 22 05 63 -1/2




avoid crushing or chipping. Pipe which is handled with insulation in place, coated pipe, and 

jacketed pipe shall have special handling slings as required to prevent damage to the material. 

3.4 Backfilling: Deposit clean new sand (as described in paragraph 2.1) to 6" above the pipe and 

tamp. Then deposit sand or earth carefully in 6" layers, maintaining adequate side support, 

especially on nonferrous piping materials. Compact fill in 6" layers, using mechanical means, 

up to the top elevation of the pipe, and in 12" layers to rough or finish grade as required. Fine 

grade and restore surface to original condition. 

3.5 Special: Excavations shall be installed and maintained in satisfactory condition during the 

progress of the work. Subsurface structures are to be constructed in adequately sized 

excavations. De-watering equipment shall be installed and properly maintained where 

required. Shoring shall be employed in the event of unstable soil condition, and in all cases 

where required by OSHA regulations and necessary to protect materials and personnel from 

injury. 

3.6 Identification: Install identification tape directly above all underground piping, one tape for 

each pipe where multiple pipes are installed. Depth of tape shall be at least 6 inches below 

finished grade and 24" above buried pipe. Install copper wire above non-metallic pipes. 

3.7 Depth of Cover: Minimum cover for underground piping is two feet unless indicated otherwise. 


EXCAVATION & BACKFILL 22 05 63 -2/2




SECTION 22 07 00 - INSULATION FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section. 


1.3.1 Product Data: Submit a producer's data sheets and installation instructions on each insulation 

system including insulation, coverings, adhesives, sealers, protective finishes, and other 

material recommended by the manufacturer for applications indicated. Submit for: 

1.3.1.1 Fiberglass pipe insulation 

1.4 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Include in O&M Manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation 

products by Armstrong, Johns Manville, Knauf, Owens Corning, Pittsburgh Corning, U.S. 

Rubber, or approved equal. All products shall be asbestos-free. 

2.2 Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, 

coverings, sealers, mastics, and adhesive) with a flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and a 

smoke-developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E84. 

2.3 Pipe Insulation Materials: 

2.3.1 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: ASTM C547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. (Preformed 

sleeving with white all-service jacket, suitable for temperatures up to 450°F) 

2.3.2 Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by the insulation manufacturer for 

applications indicated. 

2.3.3 Adhesives, Sealers, Protective Finishes: Products recommended by the insulation 

manufacturer for the application indicated. 

2.3.4 Jackets: ASTM C921, Type I (vapor barrier) for piping below ambient temperature, Type II 

(vapor permeable) for piping above ambient temperature. Type I may be used for all piping at 

Installer's option. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 General: 

3.1.1 Install thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and 

in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended 

purpose. 

3.1.2 Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. 

Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and 

excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship. 

INSULATION FOR PLUMBING PIPE AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 00 - 1/2




3.1.3 Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other 

damage. Label all insulation "ASBESTOS FREE". 

3.1.4 Do not apply insulation to surfaces while they are hot or wet. 

3.1.5 Do not install insulation until systems have been checked and found free of leaks. Surfaces 

shall be clean and dry before attempting to apply insulation. A professional insulator with 

adequate experience and ability shall install insulation. 

3.1.6 Do not install insulation on pipe systems until acceptance tests have been completed except 

for flexible unicellular insulation. Do not install insulation until the building is "dried-in". 

3.2 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: 

3.2.1 Insulate the following piping systems (indoor locations): 

3.2.1.1 Domestic hot water, 180° F: up to 2" pipe - 1½" thick, over 2" pipe 2" thick. 

3.2.1.2 Domestic hot water, 140° F: up to 3" pipe - 1½" thick, over 3" pipe - 2" thick. 

3.2.1.3 Cold water pipe in areas not freeze protected: ½" thick. 

3.2.2 Apply insulation to pipe with all side and end joints butted tightly. Seal longitudinal lap by 

pressurizing with plastic sealing tool. Apply 3 inch wide self sealing butt strips to joints 

between insulation sections. Insulate all fittings, flanges, valves and strainers with premolded 

insulation. Apply coat of insulating cement to fittings and wrap with glass cloth overlapping 

each wrap 1" and adjacent pipe 2". Finish with heavy coat of general purpose mastic. 

Premolded PVC covers may also be used, but no flexible inserts are allowed. 

3.2.3 Provide hanger or pipe support shields of 16 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel over the 

insulation which extends halfway up the pipe insulation cover and at least 6" on each side of 

the hanger. 

3.2.4 Omit insulation on exposed plumbing fixture runouts from faces of wall or floor to fixture; on 

unions, flanges, strainer blowoffs, flexible connections and expansion joints. 


INSULATION FOR PLUMBING PIPE AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 00 - 2/2




SECTION 22 11 13 - POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 Division-22 Basic Plumbing Requirements and Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 


1.3 Extent of potable water systems work, is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by 

requirements of this section. 

1.4 Refer to other Division-22 sections for site water distribution system; not work of this section 

unless noted. 

1.5 Refer to appropriate Division-2 sections for exterior potable water system; not work of this 

section unless noted. 

1.6 Insulation for potable water piping is specified in other Division-22 sections, and is included as 

work of this section. Insulation requirements include: 

Domestic hot water piping 

Cold water piping as noted. 

1.7 Excavation and backfill required in conjunction with water piping is specified in other Division- 

22 sections, and is included as work of this section. 

1.8 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Florida Building Code-Plumbing 

pertaining to selection and installation of plumbing materials and products. Comply with local 

utility requirements. 


1.9.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for: 

Valves 

Hose bibbs 

Wall hydrants 

Water hammer arresters 

Trap primers 

Access doors 


1.10.1 Disinfection: Submit report by Health Department. 

1.11 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Submit maintenance data 

and parts lists for valves, trap primers. Include these data in O&M manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, 

pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, 

provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 

Provide materials and products complying with Florida Building Code-Plumbing where 

POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 22 11 13 - 1/4




applicable. Provide sizes and types matching pipe materials used in potable water systems. 

Where more than one type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one 

of the following listed for each item. 

2.3 Identification: Provide identification complying with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and 

Methods section "Plumbing Identification". Provide manufacturer's standard permanent, 

bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct burial service; not less than 

6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide blue tape with black printing reading "CAUTION WATER LINE 

BURIED BELOW". 

2.4 Pipes and Fittings: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division-22 Basic Plumbing 

Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings", in accordance with the following 

listing: 

2.4.1 Interior Water Piping: 

2.4.1.1 Above Grade: Copper tube; Type L, hard-drawn temper; wrought-copper fittings, solder-joints. 

2.4.1.2 Below Grade: Copper tube; Type L, soft-annealed temper; no joints below floor. 

2.4.2 Exterior Water Piping: 

2.4.2.1 Copper tube; Type L, hard-drawn temper; wrought-copper fittings, solder-joints. 

2.4.2.2 Polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC), Schedule 80; PVC socket fittings, solvent cement joints. 

2.4.3 Solder joints shall be made with 95-5 solder. 

2.5 Piping Specialties: Provide piping specialties complying with Division-22 Basic Plumbing 

Materials and Methods section “Piping Specialties". 

2.6 Supports and Anchors: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division-22 Basic 

Plumbing Materials and Methods section "Supports and Anchors". 

2.7 Interior Valves: Provide valves complying with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and 

Methods section "Valves", in accordance with the following listing: 

2.7.1 Sectional and Shutoff Valves: GA1, GA2, GA3, BA1, BA2. 

2.7.2 Drain Valves: GA1, GA2, BA1, BA2. 

2.8 Exterior Valves: Provide as indicated, gate valves, AWWA C500, 175 psi working pressure. 

Provide threaded, flanged, hub, or other end configurations to suit size of valve and piping 

connections. Provide inside screw type for use with curb valve box, iron body, bronzemounted, 

double disc, parallel seat, non-rising stem. Clow Corp., Dresser Mfg., Fairbanks Co., 

Kennedy, Stockham. 

2.9 Hose Bibbs: Provide rough nickel plated hose bibbs with lock shield compression stop and 

lose key handle, solid flange, female connection with ¾" male threaded hose end, and straight 

line type non-removable vacuum breaker with ¾" male threaded hose end. Acorn 8121 RCP 

or equal model by Woodford. 

2.10 Wall Hydrants: Provide ¾" wall hydrant with bronze casing, satin bronze box, straight inlet 

connection, lose key handle, and integral vacuum breaker backflow preventer. Wade W-8635- 





89 or approved equal. 

2.11 Water Hammer Arresters: Provide bellows type water hammer arresters, stainless steel 

casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI 

Standard WH-201. Precision Plumbing Products, Josam, Zurn, Amtrol, Wade, Jay R. Smith, 

or approved equal. 

2.12 Trap Primers: Provide brass trap primers and distribution units to seal floor drains indicated on 

drawings. Trap primer valves shall be automatic, self contained type with no springs or 

diaphragms and shall not require adjustment. Trap primer valves shall be the type that can be 

installed anywhere on cold water piping. Distribution units shall supply 1-4 floor drains. Trap 

primer valves shall comply with ASSE 1018. Precision Plumbing Products PR-500, or 

approved equal. Where P-trap primers are indicated use "Prime-Eze" by Jay R. Smith, or 

approved equal. 

2.13 Access Doors: Provide access doors to service all valves and other devices as required in 

accordance with Division-22 Basic Materials and Methods Section “Access Doors”. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 General: Examine areas and conditions under which potable water systems are to be 

installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in 

manner acceptable to Installer. 

3.2 Install plumbing identification in accordance with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and 

Methods section "Plumbing Identification". Install underground plastic pipe markers during 

backfill, 6"-8" below grade. 

3.3 Install water distribution piping in accordance with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and 

Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings". 

3.3.1 Install piping with 1/32" per foot (¼%) downward slope towards drain point. 

3.3.2 Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and 

servicing of valves. 

3.4 Install piping specialties in accordance with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 

section "Piping Specialties". 

3.5 Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and 

Methods section "Supports and Anchors". 

3.6 Install valves in accordance with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods section 

"Valves". 

3.6.1 Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 

two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. 

3.6.2 Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and on inlet of each 

plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. 

3.6.3 Drain Valves: Install on each plumbing equipment item located to completely drain equipment 

for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, 

and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain potable water system. 

3.7 Hose Bibbs and Wall Hydrants: Install on concealed piping where indicated with vacuum 





breaker. Mount 18 inches above grade or finished floor. 

3.8 Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes 

indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Florida Building Code-Plumbing. 

3.9 Install water hammer arresters in upright position, in locations and of sizes indicated in 

accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. 

3.10 Install trap primers as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation 

instructions. Provide access panels to all trap primers unless accessible through a lay-in 

ceiling. 

3.11 Locate and coordinate installation of access doors for all valves and devices in accordance 

with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods section “Access Doors”. 

3.12 Piping Tests: Test, clean, and sterilize potable water piping in accordance with testing 

requirements of Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods section "Testing, Cleaning, 

and Sterilization of Piping Systems". 






SECTION 22 11 16 - PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS 

1 GENERAL 




each Division-22 section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein. 

1.3 Extent of pipes and pipe fittings required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or 



1.4.1 Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, 

or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. 

1.4.2 Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler 

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work. 

1.4.3 NSF Labels: Where plastic piping is indicated to transport potable water, provide pipes and 

pipe fittings bearing approval label by National Sanitation Foundations (NSF). 

1.5 Test Report and Verification Submittals: 

1.5.1 Submit welding certification for all welding installers. 

1.5.2 Submit brazing certification for all brazing installers. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall 

thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, 

provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply 

with governing regulations and industry standards. 

2.2 Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and 

pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching 

pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, 

comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe 

manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. 

2.3 Piping Materials/Products: 

2.3.1 Soldering Materials: 

2.3.1.1 Tin-Antimony (95-5) Solder: ASTM B-32, Grade 95TA. 

2.3.1.2 Silver-Phosphorus Solder: ASTM B-32, Grade 96TS. 

2.3.2 Pipe Thread Tape: Teflon tape. 

2.3.3 Protective Coating: Koppers Bitumastic No. 505 or equal. 

PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS 22 11 16 - 1/6




2.3.4 Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast iron flanges; raised-face for steel 

flanges, unless otherwise noted. 

2.3.5 Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for 

welding materials. Materials shall be determined by installer to comply with installation 

requirements. 

2.3.6 Brazing Materials: Silver content of not less than 15%. Materials shall be determined by 

installer to comply with installation requirements. 

2.4 Copper Tube and Fittings: 

2.4.1 Copper Tube: 

2.4.1.1 Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type K or L as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper 

unless specifically noted as annealed. 

2.4.2 Fittings: 

2.4.2.1 Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 

2.4.2.2 Copper Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in 

service indicated. 

2.5 Steel Pipes and Pipe Fittings 

2.5.1 Pipes: 

2.5.1.1 Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53 or A-120, seamless. 

2.5.1.2 Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53 or A-120, seamless. 

2.5.2 Pipe Fittings: 

2.5.2.1 Threaded Cast Iron: ANSI B16.4. 

2.5.2.2 Threaded Malleable Iron: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. 

2.5.2.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.39; selected by installer for proper piping 

fabrication and service requirements including style, end connections, and metal-to-metal 

seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as indicated. 

2.5.2.4 Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14. 

2.5.2.5 Flanged Cast Iron: ANSI B16.1, including bolting. 

2.5.2.6 Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing. 

2.5.2.7 Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short radius elbows 

and returns, rated to match connected pipe. 

2.5.2.8 Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less 

than schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1 ½ inches, and where 

pipe size is less than 1 ½ inches, and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 

2.6 Plastic Pipes and Fittings: 





2.6.1 Pipes: 

2.6.1.1 PVC DWV Pipe: ASTM D-2665, Schedule 40. 

2.6.1.2 PVC Sewer Pipe: ASTM D-3034. 

2.6.1.3 PVC Pressure Pipe: ASTM D-1785, Schedule 40 or 80. 


2.6.2.1 PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D-2564. 

2.6.2.2 PVC DWV Socket: ASTM D-2665. 

2.6.2.3 PVC Sewer Socket: ASTM D-3034. 

2.6.2.4 PVC Schedule 40 Socket: ASTM D-2466. 

2.6.2.5 PVC Schedule 80 Socket: ASTM D-2467. 

2.6.2.6 PVC Schedule 80 Threaded: ASTM D-2464. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Installation 

3.1.1 General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which 

will achieve permanently-leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated 

service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with 

adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance or replacement of valves 

and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings, not bushings. 

Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. 

3.1.2 Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. 

3.1.3 Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) 

and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and 

column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not 

otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block 

access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead 

construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building; limit 

clearance to ½" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for 

insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside 

insulation. 

3.1.4 Concealed Piping: Unless specifically noted as “Exposed” on the drawings, conceal piping 

from view in finished and occupied spaces, by locating in column enclosures, chases, in hollow 

wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid 

partitions, except as indicated. 

3.1.5 Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other 

electrical, communications, or data equipment spaces and enclosures unless shown. Install 

drip pan under piping that must run through electrical spaces. 





3.1.5.1 Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, not from drawings. Keep pipes free of contact 

with building construction and installed work. 

3.2 Piping System Joints: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system. 

3.2.1 Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry 

practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends 

and inside of fittings. Apply non-acid type solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. 

Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and 

circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. 

3.2.2 Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream 

threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or 

pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at 

each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. Paint exposed threads 

to retard rusting. 

3.2.3 Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connection with valves and 

equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform 

compression of gaskets. Bolts shall project 1/8" to 3/8" beyond nut face when tight. 

3.2.4 Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows. Be guided by 

ANSI B.31. 

3.2.4.1 Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F. 

3.2.4.2 Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5° angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove 

slag, metal particles and dirt. 

3.2.4.3 Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10". All welds shall be open-butt. 

3.2.4.4 Build up welds with root pass, followed by filler pass and then a cover pass. Eliminate valleys 

at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of 

unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusions. 

3.2.4.5 Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to comply 

with requirements. 

3.2.4.6 At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is less than 

3" and at least two pipe sizes smaller than main pipe indicated; or install regular "T" fitting. 

Weld-O-Let or equal. 

3.2.4.7 All field welding and cutting using oxygen-acetylene methods within the building shall be 

performed in accordance with NFPA-51B (1994). 

3.2.5 Plastic Pipe Joints: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and with 

applicable industry standards. 

3.2.5.1 Solvent-cemented joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D-2235 and ASTM F-402. 

3.2.5.2 PVC sewer pipe bell/gasket joints shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D-2321. 

3.2.6 Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ANSI B.31. 

3.3 Piping Installation 





3.3.1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction. 

3.3.2 Isolate all copper tubing from steel and concrete by wrapping the pipe at the contact point, and 

for one inch on each side, with a continuous plastic sleeve. Isolate all copper tubing installed 

in block walls with a continuous plastic sleeve. 

3.3.3 Underground Piping: 

3.3.3.1 Provide plastic tape markers over all underground piping. Provide copper wire over all 

underground plastic piping. Locate markers 18" above piping. 

3.3.3.2 Coat the following underground (uninsulated) pipes with a heavy coat of bitumastic or provide 

an 8 mil polyvinyl sleeve: black steel pipe, galvanized steel pipe, copper tubing. 











SECTION 22 11 19 - PIPING SPECIALTIES 

1 GENERAL 

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 



each Division-22 section making reference to or requiring piping specialties specified herein. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use 

in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each 

service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with 

installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate 

with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection 

is Installer's option. 

2.2 Escutcheons: 

2.2.1 General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe 

outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter 

of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe 

sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied 

areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. 

2.2.2 Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and 

condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, 

solid or split hinged. 

2.2.3 Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 

2.3 Fabricated Piping Specialties: 

2.3.1 Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 

2.3.1.1 Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, 

welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and 

smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6" 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage. 

2.3.1.2 Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 

2.3.1.3 Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs. 

2.3.2 Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in 

exterior walls, of one of the following: 

2.3.2.1 Caulking and Sealant: Provide foam or caulking and sealant compatible with piping materials 

used. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, 

partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. 

PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - 1/2




Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush 

with adjoining surface. 

3.2 Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Provide pipe sleeve as required. Refer to Division 7. 

3.3 Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, 

floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except 

as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately 

centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free 

movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes 

larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with 

sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction 

penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves ¼" above 

level floor finish, and ¾" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of 

sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary 

closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 

3.3.1 Install sleeves in fire-rated assemblies in accordance with the listing of the assembly and the 

fire barrier sealant. 

3.3.2 Install sheet-metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings. Fill 

annular space with caulking or fire barrier sealant as required. 

3.3.3 Install steel-pipe sleeves at floor penetrations. Fill annular space with caulking or fire barrier 

sealant as required. 

3.3.4 Install iron-pipe sleeves at all foundation wall penetrations and at exterior penetrations; both 

above and below grade. Fill annular space with caulking or mechanical sleeve seals. 


PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - 2/2




SECTION 22 13 16 - SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 Division-22 Basic Plumbing Requirements and Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods sections 

apply to work of this section. 

1.3 Extent of soil waste and vent systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by 


1.4 Refer to appropriate Division-2 sections for exterior sanitary sewer system required in conjunction 

with soil and waste systems; not work of this section. 

1.5 Excavation and backfill required in conjunction with soil, waste and vent piping is specified in 

other Division-22 sections and is included as work of this section. 

1.6 Refer to Division-7 section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for flashings required in conjunction with 

soil and waste systems; not work of this section. 

1.7 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Florida Building Code-Plumbing pertaining 

to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products. Comply with local utility 

requirements. 


1.8.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for: 

Cleanouts 

Floor drains 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure 

ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined 

by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and 

equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in soil and 

waste systems. Where more than one type of materials or products is indicated, selection is 

Installer's option. 

Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, 

continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils 

thick. Provide green tape with black printing reading "CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED 

BELOW". 

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of 

the following listed for each item. 

2.3 Pipes and Fittings: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division-22 Basic Plumbing 

Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings", in accordance with the following listing: 

2.3.1 Above Ground Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 

2.3.1.1 Polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe (PVC); Type DWV; PVC plastic type DWV socket-type fitting, 

SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT SYSTEM 22 13 16 - 1/4




solvent cement joints. Do not use in fire-rated assemblies or return air plenums. 

2.3.2 Underground Building Drain Piping (within 5 feet of the building): 

2.3.2.1 Pipe Size 6" and Smaller: Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe (PVC); Type DWV; PVC plastic type 

DWV socket-type. 

2.4 Pipe Specialties: Provide piping specialties complying with Division-22 Basic Materials and 

Methods section "Piping Specialties". 

2.5 Supports and Anchors: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division-22 Basic 

Plumbing Materials and Methods section "Supports and Anchors". 

2.6 Cleanouts: Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. 

Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with 

installation requirements and governing regulations. Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zurn. 

2.6.1 Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1 countersunk head. 

2.6.2 Cleanout for PVC Systems: 

2.6.2.1 Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body with adjustable head, brass plug, and scoriated nick-brass 

cover. Furnish with carpet flange for carpeted floors. Furnish with recessed cover for tile floors. 

Furnish with clamping ring for floors with membrane. Wade W-6030 hub outlet for push-on. 

2.6.2.2 Cleanouts in Piping: PVC cleanout adaptor with threaded PVC plug. 

2.6.2.3 Wall Cleanouts: PVC cleanout adaptor with tapped, countersunk, threaded brass plug. Square 

8.75”x8.75” hinged wall access cover, with scoriated nickel bronze finish. 

2.6.2.4 Grade Cleanouts: PVC cleanout adaptor with countersunk, threaded brass plug. Wade W-8590- 

D plug. In sidewalks and other finished concrete, provide access cover frames with a non-tilting 

tractor cover. Wade W-7035-Z or equal. 

2.6.2.5 Cleanouts in Paved Areas: Cast iron body, adjustable housing, ferrule with plug and round loose 

scoriated tractor cover. Wade W-8300-MF. Coordinate concrete depth at site with adjustable 

flange. 

2.7 Floor Drains: Provide floor drains of size as indicated on drawings; and type, including features, 

as specified herein. Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zurn. 

2.7.1 Floor Drains: Provide inside caulk bottom outlet or TY-Seal hub outlet with adaptor for cast iron 

trap installation and a 4" deep trap seal. Provide clamping rings for floors with membrane. 

2.7.2 Strainer: Provide 5" satin-nickel bronze strainer. 

2.7.3 Trap Primer Connection: Provide ½" trap primer tapping. 

2.7.4 Basis of Design: Wade Series 1100. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Examine substrates and conditions under which soil and waste systems are to be installed. Do 

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 Piping Installation: 





3.2.1 Install above grade soil and waste piping in accordance with Division-22 Basic Plumbing 

Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings", and with Florida Building Code- 

Plumbing. 

3.2.2 Install underground soil and waste pipes as indicated and in accordance with Florida Building 

Code-Plumbing. Lay underground piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and 

alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. 

Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of 

lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Clean interior of piping of dirt 

and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past 

each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or 

whenever work stops. 

3.2.3 Install building soil and vent piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of ¼" per foot (2%) for 

piping smaller than 3", and 1/8" per foot (1%) for piping 3" and larger. 

3.3 Install piping specialties in accordance with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 

section "Piping Specialties". 

3.4 Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division-22 Basic Plumbing Materials and 


3.5 Installation of Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, as 

required by Florida Building Code-Plumbing; and at each change in direction of piping greater 

than 45°; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping; and at 

base of each vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed 

piping, select type to match adjacent building finish. 

3.5.1 Size: Cleanouts shall be full size up to 4". Piping over 4" shall have a reducing fitting to 

accommodate a 4" cleanout unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 

3.5.2 Install cleanouts to allow adequate clearance for rodding. 

3.5.3 Protect all finished surfaces of cleanouts with a suitable adhesive covering until construction is 

completed. 

3.5.4 Cleanouts to Grade: Provide an 18" x 18" x 8" thick concrete pad around the cleanout. Set the 

cleanout ferrule, adapter, or access cover frame in the concrete as required. The cleanout shall 

be extended to the finished grade. The concrete pad shall slope away from the cleanout in all 

directions approximately one inch. Cover pad with fill to finished grade. 

3.5.5 Cleanouts in Paved Areas: Provide concrete pad similar to cleanout to grade and coordinate 

concrete depth at site with adjustable flange. Access cover frames are required. 

3.6 Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout 

passing through waterproof membranes. 

3.7 Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stack passing through roof, secure to stack flashing in 

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. For metal roofs, sleeves and flashing are by 

Division-7. 

3.8 Installation of Floor Drains: Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions and in locations indicated. 

3.8.1 Coordinate flashing work with work of waterproofing and adjoining substrate work. 





3.8.2 Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains 

flush with finished floor. 

3.8.3 Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining 

flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 

3.8.4 Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 

3.9 Connection of Trap Primers: Connect trap primers as indicated, and in accordance with 

manufacturer's installation instructions. Pitch piping towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8" per foot 

(1%). Adjust trap primer for proper flow. 

3.10 Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide soil and waste piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and 

drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Florida 

Building Code-Plumbing. 

3.11 Test, clean, flush, and inspect soil and waste piping in accordance with requirements of Division- 

22 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods section "Testing, Cleaning and Sterilization of Piping 

Systems". 






SECTION 15420 - STORM WATER SYSTEM 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 Division 22 Basic Mechanical Requirements and Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 


1.3 Extent of storm water systems work, is indicated on drawings and by requirements of this 

section. 

1.4 Refer to other Division 22 sections for site storm water systems; not work of this section. 

1.5 Refer to appropriate Division-2 sections for exterior storm sewer system required in 

conjunction with storm water systems; not work of this section. 

1.6 Insulation for storm water systems is specified in other Division 22 sections, and is included as 

work of this section. Insulation requirements include: 

Storm water piping above ceilings. 

1.7 Excavation and backfill required in conjunction with storm water piping is specified in other 

Division 22 sections, and is included as work of this section. 

1.8 Refer to Division-7 section "Flashing and Sheet metal" for flashings required in conjunction 

with storm water systems; not work of this section. 

1.9 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Florida Building Code-Plumbing 

pertaining to plumbing materials construction and installation of products. Comply with local 

utility requirements. 


1.10.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for: 

Cleanouts 

Roof drains 

1.11 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Include these data in O&M 

manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 


pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection 

as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types 

matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe 

materials used in storm water systems. Where more than one type of materials or products is 

indicated, selection is Installer's option. 

Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, 

continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils 

thick. Provide green tape with black printing reading "CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED 

BELOW". 

STORM WATER SYSTEM 22 14 00 - 1/4




2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one 

of the following listed for each item. 

2.3 Pipes and Fittings: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 22 Basic 

Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings", in accordance with the 

following listing: 

2.3.1 Above Ground Conductor Piping: 

2.3.1.1 Polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe (PVC); Type DWV; PVC plastic type DWV socket-type fittings, 

solvent cement joints. Do not use in fire-rated assemblies or return air plenums. 

2.3.2 Underground Building Drain Piping (within 5 feet of the building): 

2.3.2.1 Polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe (PVC); Type DWV; PVC plastic type DWV socket-type fittings, 

solvent cement joints. 

2.4 Piping Specialties: Provide piping specialties complying with Division 22 Basic Mechanical 

Materials and Methods section "Piping Specialties". 

2.5 Supports and Anchors: Provide supports and anchors, complying with Division 22 Basic 

Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Supports, and Anchors". 

2.6 Cleanouts: Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. 

Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with 

installation requirements and governing regulations. Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zurn. 

2.6.1 Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. 

2.6.2 Cleanouts for PVC Systems: 

2.6.2.1 Floor Cleanouts: Cast iron body with adjustable head, brass plug, and scoriated nickel-brass 

cover. Furnish with recessed cover for tile floors. Furnish with clamping ring for floors with 

membrane. Wade W-6030 hub outlet for push-on. 

2.6.2.2 Cleanouts in Piping: PVC cleanout adaptor with threaded PVC plug. 

2.6.2.3 Grade Cleanouts: PVC cleanout adaptor with countersunk, threaded brass plug. Wade W- 

8590-D plug. In sidewalks and other finished concrete, provide access cover frames with a 

non-tilting tractor cover. Wade W-7035-Z or equal. 

2.6.2.4 Cleanouts in Paved Areas: Cast iron body, adjustable housing, ferrule with plug and round 

loose scoriated tractor cover. Wade W-8300-MF. Coordinate concrete depth at site with 

adjustable flange. 

2.7 Roof Drains: Provide roof drains of size as indicated on drawings; and type, including 

features, as specified herein. Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zurn. Basis of design: Zurn ZRB- 

100 cast iron roof drain with adjustable extension and reversible deck ring, gravel stop integral 

with flashing collar, underdeck clamp, and plain bronze mushroom dome. Plastic dome not 

acceptable. Furnish 36" x 36", 16 oz. copper or 4 lb. sheet lead roof flashing for each drain. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Examine substrate and conditions under which storm water system is to be installed. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to 





Installer. 

3.2 Piping Installation: 

3.2.1 Install above grade storm water piping in accordance with Division 22 Basic Mechanical 

Materials and Methods section, "Pipes and Pipe Fittings", and with Florida Building Code- 

Plumbing. 

3.2.2 Install underground storm water piping as indicated and in accordance with Florida Building 

Code-Plumbing. Lay underground storm water piping beginning at low point of systems, true 

to grade and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping 

facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations 

for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Clear interior of 

piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line 

and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of 

day or whenever work stops. 

3.2.3 Install building storm water piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/8" per foot (1%) or as 

shown on the drawings. 

3.3 Install piping specialties in accordance with requirements of Division 22 Basic Mechanical 


3.4 Install supports and anchors, in accordance with Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials and 


3.5 Install expansion joints on vertical risers as indicated, and as required by Florida Building 

Code-Plumbing. 

3.6 Installation of Cleanouts: Install in conductor piping and storm drain piping as indicated, as 

required by Florida Building Code-Plumbing; at each change in direction of piping greater than 

45°; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping; and at 

base of each conductor. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, select type 

to match adjacent building finish. 

3.6.1 Size: Cleanouts shall be full size up to 4". Piping over 4" shall have a reducing fitting to 

accommodate a 4" cleanout unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 

3.6.2 Install cleanouts to allow adequate clearance for rodding. 

3.6.3 Protect all finished surfaces of cleanouts with a suitable adhesive covering until construction is 

completed. 

3.6.4 Cleanouts to Grade: Provide an 18" x 18" x 8" thick concrete pad around the cleanout. Set 

the cleanout ferrule, adapter, or access cover frame in the concrete as required. The cleanout 

shall be extended to the finished grade. The concrete pad shall slope away from the cleanout 

in all directions approximately one inch. Cover pad with fill to finished grade. 

3.6.5 Cleanouts in Paved Areas: Provide concrete pad similar to cleanout to grade and coordinate 

concrete depth at site with adjustable flange. Access cover frames are required. 

3.6.6 Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each cleanout passing 

through waterproof membrane. 

3.7 Installation of Roof Drains: Install roof drains in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions and in locations indicated. 





3.7.1 Coordinate flashing work with work of roofing, water-proofing and adjoining substrate work. 

3.7.2 Coordinate with roofing as necessary to interface roof drains with roofing work. 

3.7.3 Install roof drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. 

3.7.4 Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and 

adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 

3.7.5 Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 

3.8 Test, clean, flush, and inspect storm water piping in accordance with requirements of Division 

22 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Testing, Cleaning and Sterilization of 

Piping Systems". 






SECTION 22 16 00 - GAS SYSTEM 

1 GENERAL 


and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2 Division 22 Basic Mechanical Requirements and Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 


1.3 Extent of gas systems work, is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of 

this section. 

1.4 Excavation and backfill required in conjunction with gas service piping is specified in Division- 

22 sections, and is included as work of this section. 

1.5 Codes and Standards 

1.5.1 NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and install gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54 "National 

Fuel Gas Code". 

1.5.2 Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install gas systems in accordance with local gas utility 

company requirements and standards. 


1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions as 

follows: 

Gas cocks and/or ball valves 

Gas appliance connectors 

Access doors 

1.7 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of approval submittals. Submit maintenance data and 

parts lists for gas cocks and ball valves. Include these data in O&M manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 


pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection 

as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and 

products complying with NFPA 54 where applicable. Base pressure rating on gas piping 

system maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment 

connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in gas systems. 

Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. 

2.2 Identification: Provide identification complying with Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials 

and Methods section "Mechanical Identification". 

2.3 Pipes and Fittings: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division 22 Basic 

Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings", in accordance with the 

following listing: 

2.3.1 Gas Service Piping: 

2.3.1.1 All Pipe Sizes: Black steel pipe; Schedule 40; wrought-steel buttwelding fittings. 

GAS SYSTEM 22 16 00 - 1/4




2.3.1.2 Wrapping: Machine wrap pipe using 50% overlap wrap, with polyvinyl chloride tape. Hand 

wrap fittings using 100% overlap wrap extending 6" beyond fitting onto wrapped pipe. Comply 

with tape manufacturer's installation instructions. 

2.3.1.3 Pipe Sizes ½" Through 12": Thermoplastic gas pressure pipe, tubing, and fittings complying 

with ASTM D 2513. 

2.3.1.4 Pipe Sizes 2" Through 12": Reinforced epoxy resin gas pressure pipe and fittings complying 

with ASTM D 2517. 

2.3.2 Building Distribution Piping: 

2.3.2.1 Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Black steel pipe; Schedule 40; malleable-iron threaded fittings. 

2.3.2.2 Pipe Size 2½" and Larger: Black steel pipe; Schedule 40; wrought-steel buttwelding fittings. 

2.4 Piping Specialties: Provide piping specialties complying with Division 22 Basic Mechanical 


2.5 Sealants: Provide UL-listed or AGA approved sealants for gas piping. 

2.6 Supports and Anchors: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 22 Basic 

Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Supports and Anchors". 

2.7 Valves: Provide valves complying with Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 

section “Valves” and in accordance with the following listing. 

2.7.1 Gas Cocks 2" and Smaller: UL-listed, AGA approved, 150 psi non-shock WOG, full port, 

bronze straightway cock, flat or square head, threaded ends. 

2.7.2 Gas Cocks 2½" and Larger: UL-listed, CGA approved, MSS SP-78; 175 psi, lubricated plug 

type, full port, semi-steel body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends. 

2.7.3 Acceptable Manufacturers for gas cocks: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

products of one of the following: Resun R1430 and R1431, Milliken 200M and 201M or 


2.8 Gas Appliance Tube Connectors: Provide commercial grade appliance connectors with a 2 

year manufacturer’s warranty. Tubing shall be Type 304 stainless steel tubing with type 304 

stainless steel braiding to protect tubing from elongation. Tubing shall be complete with 

factory installed end connectors. Provide products that are AGA or CGA approved. Indicate 

maximum BTU input for each length and size used on submittal. 

2.9 Gas Meter and Regulator: Provided by local utility company. 

2.10 Access Doors: Provide access doors to service all valves and other devices as required in 

accordance with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods Section “Access Doors”. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Examine areas and conditions under which gas systems materials and products are to be 

installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in 

manner acceptable to Installer. Coordinate with gas supplier prior to starting work. 

3.2 Install mechanical identification in accordance with Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials and 

GAS SYSTEM 22 16 00 - 2/4




Methods section "Mechanical Identification". 

3.3 Install gas piping in accordance with Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 

section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings". 

3.3.1 Use sealants on metal gas piping threads which are chemically resistant to gas. Use sealants 

sparingly, and apply to only male threads of metal joints. 

3.3.2 Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping. 

3.3.3 Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads which are chipped, 

stripped or damaged. Do not use bushings in the gas system. 

3.3.4 Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation 

and retain until continuing piping, or equipment connections are completed. 

3.3.5 Ground gas piping electrically and continuously within project, and bond tightly to grounding 

connection. 

3.3.6 Install drip-legs in gas piping where indicated, and where required by code or gas company 

requirements. 

3.3.7 Install "Tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped, at bottom of pipe risers. 

3.3.8 Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals are joined together. 

3.3.9 Install piping with 1/64" per foot downward slope in direction of flow. 

3.3.10 Install piping parallel to other piping, but maintain minimum of 12" clearance between gas 

piping and steam or hydronic piping above 200°F. 

3.4 Gas Service: Arrange with utility company to provide gas service to indicated location with 

meter, pressure regulator and shutoff at terminus. Consult with utility as to extent of its work, 

costs, fees, and permits involved. The Contractor shall pay such costs and fees and obtain 

permits. 

3.5 Install piping specialties in accordance with Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials and 

Methods section "Piping Specialties". 

3.6 Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials and 


3.7 Installation of Valves: 

3.7.1 Gas Cocks: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas-fired equipment item; and on 

risers and branches where indicated. 

3.7.2 Locate gas cocks where easily accessible, and where they will be protected from possible 

injury. 

3.7.3 Control Valves: Install as indicated. Refer to Division 16 for wiring; not work of this section. 

3.8 Equipment Connections: Connect gas piping to each gas-fired equipment item, with drip leg 

and shutoff gas cock. Comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 

3.9 Appliance Connectors: Install tubing, valves, connectors, fittings in accordance with their 

GAS SYSTEM 22 16 00 - 3/4




listing. Hose, fittings and valves shall not restrict gas flow and shall be rated for the capacity of 

the appliance they serve. Hoses shall not be crimped. Hoses behind movable appliances 

shall not be crimped when appliance is extended from wall or when appliance is set in working 

position. Appliance restraining device shall set to engage just prior to the connector being fully 

extended. Check all tubing, piping, fittings & valves for leakage at less than 50 part per million. 

3.10 Locate and coordinate installation of access doors for all valves and devices in accordance 

with Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section “Access Doors”. 

3.11 Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54, local utility 

requirements, and Division 22 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Testing, 

Cleaning and Sterilization of Piping Systems". 


GAS SYSTEM 22 16 00 - 4/4




SECTION 22 30 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, TRIM & SCHEDULE 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 Division-22 Basic Plumbing Requirements and Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 


1.3 Extent of plumbing fixtures work required by this section is indicated on drawings and 

schedules, and by requirements of this section. 

1.4 Refer to Division-26 sections for field-installed electrical wiring required for plumbing fixtures; 

not work of this section. 


1.5.1 Plumbing Fixture Standards: Comply with applicable portions of Florida Building Code- 

Plumbing pertaining to materials and installation of plumbing fixtures. 

1.5.2 ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to plumbing fixtures and 

systems. 

1.5.3 PDI Compliance: Comply with standards established by PDI pertaining to plumbing fixture 

supports. 

1.5.4 UL Listing: Construct plumbing fixtures requiring electrical power in accordance with UL 

standards and provide UL-listing and label. 

1.5.5 ARI Compliance: Construct and install water coolers in accordance with ARI Standard 1010 

"Drinking-Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically-Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers", 

and provide Certification Symbol. 

1.5.6 ANSI Compliance: Construct and install barrier-free plumbing fixtures in accordance with 

ANSI Standard A117.1 "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and 

Usable By Physically Handicapped People". 


1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of 

selected model clearly indicated, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation 

instructions. Submit manufacturer's assembly-type drawings indicating dimensions, roughingin 

requirements, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components and 

anchorages. The submittal shall be organized by “fixture number” and each fixture package 

shall be so identified. Each fixture package shall include all of the required fitting and trim, 

even if such devices are used for more than one fixture. 

1.7 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of approval submittals. Submit maintenance data and 

parts lists for each type of plumbing fixture and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" 

maintenance guide. Include these data in O&M manual. 

1.8 Handle plumbing fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, chipping and scoring fixture finish. Do 

not install damaged plumbing fixtures; replace and return damaged units to equipment 

manufacturer. 

PLUMBING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, TRIM & SCHEDULE 22 30 00 - 1/10




2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: Provide factory-fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. For each 

type fixture, provide trim, carrier, seats, and valves as specified. Where not specified, provide 

products as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation. Where 

more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option; but, all fixtures of same type 

must be furnished by single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide 

fixtures complying with governing regulations. 

2.2 Model Numbers: Basis of design model numbers of a particular manufacturer are listed in the 

fixture schedule as an aid to contractors. Where conflicts between the model number and the 

written description occur, the written description shall govern. Where acceptable 

manufacturers are listed, products are subject to compliance with requirements. 

2.3 Materials: 

2.3.1 Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness. 

Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes, stains, 

decoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. 

2.3.2 All fixtures shall be white vitreous china unless otherwise specifically noted. Where enameled 

iron fixtures are specified, they shall be furnished with acid resisting enamel. 

2.3.3 Where fittings, trim and accessories are exposed or semi-exposed provide bright chromeplated 

or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. 

2.3.4 Stainless Steel Sheets: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304, hardest workable temper. Finish shall be 

No. 4, bright, directional polish on exposed surfaces. 

2.3.5 Vitreous China: High quality, free from fire cracks, spots, blisters, pinholes and specks; glaze 

exposed surfaces, and test for crazing resistance in accordance with ASTM C 554. 

2.3.6 Synthetic Stone: High quality, free from defects, glaze on exposed surfaces, stain resistant. 

2.4 Plumbing Fittings, Trim and Accessories: 

2.4.1 Faucets: At locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control), 

provide commercial quality chrome-plated, cast-brass faucets, valves, or other dispensing 

devices, of type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. 

2.4.1.1 Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health Department having jurisdiction. 

2.4.1.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one 

of the following for each item. American Standard, Chicago Faucet Co., Kohler Co., 

Speakman Co., T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Water Saver Faucet Co. 

2.4.2 Stops: Provide chrome-plated brass, angle type, manual shutoff valves and 3/8" chromeplated 

flexible supply pipes to permit fixture servicing without shutdown of water supply piping 

systems for all fixtures. Coordinate with fixture requirements. 

2.4.2.1 Provide loose key stops. 


of the following for each item. Zurn or approved equal. 

2.4.3 Waste Outlets: Provide removable P-traps, drains, waste arms, tailpieces and wastes-to-wall 





where drains are indicated for direct connection to drainage system for all fixtures unless 

otherwise noted. Provide drains, tailpieces and waste arms where indirect drains are 

indicated. Waste outlets shall be full size of fixture drain connection. 

2.4.3.1 Provide chrome-plated cast-brass P-traps and drains with cleanout. 

2.4.3.2 P-traps, wastes and drains of all types shall be 17-gauge. 


of the following for each item. Zurn, or approved equal. 

2.4.4 Flush Valves: Provide quiet-flush, chrome-plated, cast-brass flush valves with vacuum breaker 

and screwdriver stop. Where handicap service is indicated, provide ADA compliant handles 

with the handle on the wide side of the stall. 


of the following for each item. Sloan Valve Co. or Zurn. 

2.4.5 Carriers: Provide cast-iron supports for fixtures of either graphitic gray iron, ductile iron, or 

malleable iron or steel as indicated. Coordinate with specific fixture requirements and 

conditions of the project. 


of the following for each item. Josam, Wade, Zurn, J.R. Smith. 

2.4.6 Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fixture bolt caps finished to 

match fixture finish. 

2.4.7 Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed locations, provide 

chrome-plated brass escutcheons with friction clips. 

2.4.8 Comply with additional fixture requirements listed for each fixture and as required for a 

complete and functional system. 

2.5 Water Closets: 

2.5.1 General: Provide white china siphon jet type unless otherwise noted. 


of the following for each item. American Standard, Crane, Kohler, or Zurn. 

2.5.2 Fixture Seats: Provide white, heavy molded plastic fixture seats with stainless steel selfsustaining 

check hinges. 


of the following for each item. Bemis Mfg. Co., Beneke Corp., Church or Comfort Seats. 

2.5.3 Water Closet Schedule: 

WC-1 

WATER CLOSET, FLOOR-MOUNT (STANDARD, TANK TYPE): 

Vitreous china low consumption 1.6 GPF, elongated, siphon jet action, closed-coupled tank, 

complete with float valve, valve and chrome plated trip lever, bolt caps, color “white”, chrome 

plated angle stop with flexible supply. Solid plastic closed front seat with cover. 

Water closet 

Zurn Z5530 





Supply w/stop 

Seat 

Closet Bolt/Wax Ring Kit 

Zurn Z8800CRLK-PC 

Z5955SS-EL-STS 

Z5972-COMB 

WC-2 

WATER CLOSET, FLOOR-MOUNT (HANDICAP, TANK TYPE): 

Vitreous china low consumption 1.6 GPF, elongated, siphon jet action, closed-coupled tank, 

complete with float valve, valve and chrome plated trip lever, bolt caps, color “white”, chrome 

plated angle stop with flexible supply. Solid plastic closed front seat with cover. 

Water closet 

Supply w/stop 

Seat 

Closet Bolt/Wax Ring Kit 

Zurn Z5550 

Zurn Z8800CRLK-PC 

Z5955SS-EL-STS 

Z5972-COMB 

2.6 Urinals: 

2.6.1 General: Provide white china siphon jet wall hung type with ¾” top spud and 2" outlet unless 

otherwise noted. Provide short foot carrier with top and bottom hanger plates. 

2.6.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one 


2.6.3 Urinal Schedule: 

UR-1 

URINAL, WALL-MOUNT (HANDICAP, MANUAL VALVE): 

Vitreous china, 1.0 gallons per flush, siphon jet flush, 3/4" top spud, and 2" outlet urinal. 

Exposed chrome plated flush valve with screwdriver stop, vacuum breaker and quiet flush 

feature. Mount to satisfy ADA requirements, coordinate with Architectural drawings (toilet 

room elevations) for final mounting height. Furnish floor mounted single carrier with hanger 

plate, bearing plate, adjustable supporting rods, structural uprights and block bases, secure 

base to floor for rigid connection with 1/2" x 3-3/4" threaded zinc plated steel heavy duty 

wedge anchors, complete with stainless steel clip, washer and threaded nut, conforming to 

federal spec. FF-S-325. 

Urinal 

Zurn Z5730 

Valve 

Zurn Z6003-WS1-YB-YC 

Carrier Zurn Z-1222 

Base Anchorage 

B-Line Anchors AWA-50-375 

2.7 Lavatories: 

2.7.1 General: Provide white china lavatories. 



2.7.3 Lavatory Schedule: 

L-1 LAVATORY, COUNTERTOP: 

Fire clay 24”x22”x4-3/4” lavatory, oval, color “white”, 8”centers. Provide chrome plated angle 

stop to wall with chrome plated 3/8" flexible supply and loose key operator, integral perforated 

cast brass strainer with 1-1/4" tailpiece, chrome plated 17 gauge cast brass P-trap with 





cleanout and tube waste to wall. Polished chrome plated cast brass deck mounted water 

faucet with straight lever handles, and quarter-turn washerless ceramic disk valves. 

Lavatory Porcher 26060-03 

Faucet 

Kallista P24405-LV 

Supply w/stop 

Zurn 8800LRLK-PC 

P-Trap 

Zurn Z8700-PC 

Drain 

Zurn Z8743-PC 

Aerator Zurn -5M 

L-2 LAVATORY, WALL-MOUNT (HANDICAP): 

Vitreous china 20" x 18", color “white”, center hole setting, front overflow, for concealed arm 

support. Furnish floor-mounted single carrier with concealed arms, leveling and securing 

screws, structural uprights and block bases, secure base to floor for rigid connection with 1/2" 

x 3-3/4" threaded zinc plated steel heavy duty wedge anchors, complete with stainless steel 

clip, washer and threaded nut, conforming to federal spec. FF-S-325. Provide chrome plated 

angle stop to wall with chrome plated 3/8" flexible supply and loose key operator, integral 

perforated strainer with 1-1/4" offset tailpiece, chrome plated 17 gauge cast brass P-trap with 

cleanout and tube waste to wall. Polished chrome plated cast brass water faucet with straight 

lever handles, with aerator. Lavatory P-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated 

with fully molded insulation kit, and light gray color with 3-piece interlocking rap assembly and 

2-piece interlocking angle valve assembly. Fasteners shall be nylon-type supplied with kit. 

Lavatory shall be mounted with a clearance of at least 28" from floor to bottom of the apron. 

Knee and toe clearances shall be as follows: 27" clear height shall be provided from finished 

floor to a point on underside of bowl 8" in from front apron. Toe clearance shall be a minimum 

height of 9" under P-trap and supplies or stops. See Architectural drawings for final mounting 

height. 

Lavatory 

Zurn Z5341 

Faucet 

Zurn Z81101z e 

Supply w/stop 

Zurn Z8800LRLK-PC 

P-Trap 

Zurn Z8700-PC 

Strainer/tailpiece 

Zurn Z8746 

Insulation kit 

Zurn Z8946-3-NT 

Aerator Zurn -5M 

Carrier 

Zurn Z1231 

Base Anchorage 

B-Line Anchors AWA-50-375 

2.8 Drinking Fountains: 

2.8.1 General: Provide 18-gauge stainless steel drinking fountain with the entire water system free 

of lead. Where handicap units are indicated, the bubbler and fountain shall be ADA compliant. 


of the following for each item. Elkay Mfg. Co., Halsey Taylor Div., Haws Drinking Faucet Co., 

Sunroc, Oasis. 

2.8.3 Drinking Fountain Schedule: 

DF-1 

DRINKING FOUNTAIN (BUBBLER): 

Single level stainless steel face mount, push bar, bubbler with anti-squirt hood. Mount to 

satisfy ADA requirements, verify final location, mounting height and finish with Architectural 

drawings. Provide self-closing stop assembly in recessed wall box complete with water supply 

valve and waste piping (P-Trap). 





Bubbler 

Halsey Taylor OVL-II 

2.9 Mop Receptors: 

2.9.1 General: Provide one piece mop receptors with 3" integral stainless steel grid drain. Provide 

wall-mounted faucet with arm handles, vacuum breaker, stops, hose connection and hose 

bracket. Provide 30" hose. 


of the following for each item. Stern-Williams Co., or Acorn. 

2.9.3 Mop Receptor Schedule: 

MR-1 

SERVICE SINK (FLOOR TYPE): 

24” x 24” x 12” deep, floor mount, terrazzo with 20 gauge stainless steel integral cast cap, 3” 

cast brass outlet drain with stainless steel strainer. Rough chrome plated 8” faucet with top 

brace, straight lever handles, swivel inlets, bucket hook, vacuum breaker, stops and hose end. 

Chrome plated loose key angle stop to wall with 3/8" chrome plated flexible hot and cold water 

supplies. 

Sink 

Faucet 

Supply 

Acorn TSH24 

Zurn Z843 M1 RC 

Zurn Z8800-LRLK 

2.10 Stainless Steel Sinks: 

2.10.1 General: Provide Type 304, 18 gauge self-rimming stainless steel back ledge with No. 4 finish . 

Provide sound deadening material on the sides and bottom of the sink. Provide grid drain or 

strainer with removable crumb cup and stopper as indicated. 


of the following for each item. Elkay, Just 

2.10.3 Stainless Steel Sink Schedule: 

SK-1 

DOUBLE COMPARTMENT STAINLESS STEEL SINK (MATERIAL STORAGE): 

33" x 22" x 10" deep (bowl is 13-1/2x16x10-1/8), type 304, 18 gauge, 8” centers, self rimming 

single compartment, (18-8) nickel bearing stainless steel, back ledge sink with satin finish and 

sound deadening materials on side and bottom of sink. Provide polished chrome plated top 

mount swing gooseneck spout and vacuum breaker, straight lever handles, pressure 

compensating aerator, strainer with removable crumb cup and stopper, 1-1/2 tailpiece, acid 

resistant P-trap with cleanout and tube waste to wall. bottom access interceptor trap. Chrome 

plated loose key angle stop to wall with 3/8" chrome plated flexible hot and cold water supplies. 

Coordinate with cabinet shop drawings, base cabinet must be a true minimum 24" deep back 

to front in order for sink to drop into countertop opening. Sink drillings shall accommodate 

fitting installation, only, no other capped openings will be allowed. 

Sink 

Faucet 

Strainer 

Supplies 

P-trap 

Elkay DLR-3322-10 

Zurn Z-871 B1 

Elkay LK-35 

Zurn Z-8800-LR-LK 

Zurn 8702 PC 





2.11 Showers: 

2.11.1 General: 


equal to the manufacturer specified. 

2.11.3 Shower Schedule: 

SH-1 

SHOWER: 

PM-750-CHV, Wall-Mounted Stainless Steel Shower with ADA-Compliant, Slow-Closing 

Metering Valves, Hose Bib and Foot Shower. 4" Stainless Steel Raincan Shower Head. 

Shower 

Showerhead 

Aquamasters USA PM-750-ADA 

Aquamasters USA GL150-4 

2.12 Water Heaters: 

2.12.1 Electric Water Heaters: 


of the following for each item. AO Smith, Rheem, Chronomite, Seisco, EeMax 

2.12.3 Water Heater Schedule: 

EWH-1 

ELECTRIC WATER HEATER: 

ASHRAE Standard 90, glass lined tank Suitable for 150 psi working pressure, 300-psi test. 

Finish of durable high gloss baked enamel. Blanket glass fiber insulation over entire tank. 

ASME pressure and temperature relief valve. Water heater shall be acceptable for commercial 

application by manufacturer. Provide 3 full year warranty, snap action automatic surface 

mounted thermostats, immersion type heating elements and magnesium anode rod. Provide 

unit mounted disconnect switch. Provide thermal expansion tank on cold water inlet side of 

heater for thermal expansion control. Provide galvanized steel drip pan. Phase 1/120v, 2 kw, 

20 gallon storage capacity. 

Water Heater A. O. Smith DEL 20 

Vacuum Relief 

Watts 36A 

Expansion Tank 

Amtrol “Therm-X-Trol” 

IWH-1 

INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER: 

5 KW at 240V/1 phase. Commercial electric water heaters shall be controlled by an integrated 

microprocessor that employs a proportional/integral/derivative (PID) control scheme using 

thermistors for sensing temperature and flow. Heat elements shall simultaneously vary KW 

input across all elements from 1% to maximum input. Stepping of individual elements is not 

acceptable. Heater shall include dual water level sensors, high limit control via the 

microprocessor, and dual high limit cutoff switches, one manual and one automatic. Heaters 

shall include self-diagnostics with an LED and speaker and must visually and audibly signal 

the status of all monitored functions. Heaters shall include a built-in leak detector. All water 

passages must be constructed of a high temperature resistant DuPont Resin. Clean-cut 

access for removing sediment must be provided without removing plumbing connections or 

exposing electrical components of the water heater. Provide 5 year limited warranty. 





Water Heater 

Seisco CA-5 

IWH-2 

INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER: 

11 KW at 240V/1 phase. Commercial electric water heaters shall be controlled by an 

integrated microprocessor that employs a proportional/integral/derivative (PID) control scheme 

using thermistors for sensing temperature and flow. Heat elements shall simultaneously vary 

KW input across all elements from 1% to maximum input. Stepping of individual elements is 

not acceptable. Heater shall include dual water level sensors, high limit control via the 

microprocessor, and dual high limit cutoff switches, one manual and one automatic. Heaters 

shall include self-diagnostics with an LED and speaker and must visually and audibly signal 

the status of all monitored functions. Heaters shall include a built-in leak detector. All water 

passages must be constructed of a high temperature resistant DuPont Resin. Clean-cut 

access for removing sediment must be provided without removing plumbing connections or 

exposing electrical components of the water heater. Provide 5 year limited warranty. 

Water Heater 

Seisco CA-11 

2.13 Other Fixtures: 

2.13.1 Utility Boxes: 

UB-1 

ICE MAKER HOOK-UP (REFRIGERATOR SPACE): 

Recessed metal wall box constructed and suitable for fire rated partitions, complete with 

factory installed shank valve with 1/4" O.D. copper outlet tested @ 100 P.S.I. Provide 

approximately 5'-0" of 1/4" O.D. soft copper tubing with compression fitting in tight coil. Anchor 

box to wall structure. Verify location and mounting height with Architectural drawings or mount 

to manufacturers recommendations. 

Wall box Guy Gray BIM 875 

2.14 Kitchen Fixtures: 

2.14.1 General: 


of the following for each item. 

2.14.3 Kitchen Fixture Schedule: 

FS Floor Sink 

12" x 12" x 8" deep, enameled cast iron (inside only enameled) with chrome plated brass 

beehive strainer (less grate), 3" outlet connection. Provide running trap under floor with 

cleanout flush to floor finish material, coordinate with architectural finish schedule. 

Floor sink 

Zurn Z-1901-1 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Examine roughing-in work of potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations 

of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. Also examine floors and substrates, and 

conditions under which fixture work is to be accomplished. Correct any incorrect locations of 

piping, and other unsatisfactory conditions for installation of plumbing fixtures. Do not proceed 

with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 





3.2 Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights. Install in 

accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing-in drawings, and with 

recognized industry practices. Install in accordance with ADA and applicable handicap code 

requirements. Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and serve intended 

purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of Florida Building Code-Plumbing pertaining 

to installation of plumbing fixtures. Furnish templates for cut-outs in countertops. Coordinate 

exact fixture locations with countertop shop drawings. 

3.3 Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building structure; and ensure that 

fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies behind or within wall construction so 

as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement. Mount at heights shown on the 

drawings. Fixture heights are floor-to-rim distance. Fitting heights are to centerline. 

3.4 Install stop valve in water supply to each fixture. 

3.5 After fixtures are set, the crack between the fixture and wall shall be caulked with DAP 

silicone-based caulking, or approved equal. 

3.6 Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. 

3.7 Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units are water pressurized, test 

fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct 

malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and 

replace with new units and proceed with retesting. 

3.8 Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original 

at site; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be judged 

by Architect/Engineer. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units. 

3.9 Clean plumbing fixtures, trim, aerators, and strainers of dirt and debris upon completion of 

installation. 

3.10 Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide 

proper flow stream and specified gpm. 

3.11 Adjust or replace washers to prevent leaks at faucets and stops. 











SECTION 23 01 00 - MECHANICAL GENERAL 

1 GENERAL 

1.1 The work covered by this division consists of providing all labor, equipment and materials and 

performing all operations necessary for the installation of the mechanical work as herein called 

for and shown on the drawings. 

1.2 Related Documents: 

1.2.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2.2 This is a Basic Mechanical Requirements Section. Provisions of this section apply to work of 

all Division 23 sections. 

1.2.3 Review all other contract documents to be aware of conditions affecting work herein. 

1.2.4 Definitions: 

1.2.4.1 Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 

1.2.4.2 Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for subsequent requirements. 

1.2.4.3 Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, 

anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar 

requirements. 

1.3 Permits and Fees: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, meters, and inspections 

required for his work and pay all fees and charges incidental thereto. 

1.4 Verification of Owner's Data: Prior to commencing any work the Contractor shall satisfy 

himself as to the accuracy of all data as indicated in these plans and specifications and/or as 

provided by the Owner. Should the Contractor discover any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions 

in the data, he shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer in order that proper adjustments 

can be anticipated and ordered. Commencement by the Contractor of any work shall be held 

as an acceptance of the data by him after which time the Contractor has no claim against the 

Owner resulting from alleged errors, omissions or inaccuracies of the said data. 

1.5 Delivery and Storage of Materials: Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, 

unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. All material shall be stored to provide 

protection from the weather and accidental damage. 

1.6 Extent of work is indicated by the drawings, schedules, and the requirements of the 

specifications. Singular references shall not be constructed as requiring only one device if 

multiple devices are shown on the drawings or are required for proper system operation. 

1.7 Field Measurements and Coordination: 

1.7.1 The intent of the drawings and specifications is to obtain a complete and satisfactory 

installation. Separate divisional drawings and specifications shall not relieve the Contractor or 

subcontractors from full compliance of work of his trade indicated on any of the drawings or in 

any section of the specifications. 

MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 01 00 - 1/8




1.7.2 Verify all field dimensions and locations of equipment to insure close, neat fit with other trades' 

work. Make use of all contract documents and approved shop drawings to verify exact 

dimension and locations. 

1.7.3 Coordinate work in this division with all other trades in proper sequence to insure that the total 

work is completed within contract time schedule and with a minimum cutting and patching. 

1.7.4 Locate all apparatus symmetrical with architectural elements. Install to exact height and 

locations when shown on architectural drawings. When locations are shown only on 

mechanical drawings, be guided by architectural details and conditions existing at job and 

correlate this work with that of others. 

1.7.5 Install work as required to fit structure, avoid obstructions, and retain clearance, headroom, 

openings and passageways. Cut no structural members without written approval. 

1.7.6 Carefully examine any existing conditions, piping, and premises. Compare drawings with 

existing conditions. Report any observed discrepancies. It shall be the Contractor's 

responsibility to properly coordinate the work and to identify problems in a timely manner. 

Written instructions will be issued to resolve discrepancies. 

1.7.7 Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets and fittings 

or to locate every accessory. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Study carefully the sizes 

and locations of structural members, wall and partition locations, trusses, and room 

dimensions and take actual measurements on the job. Locate piping, ductwork, equipment 

and accessories with sufficient space for installing and servicing. Contractor is responsible for 

accuracy of his measurements and for coordination with all trades. Contractor shall not order 

materials or perform work without such verification. No extra compensation will be allowed 

because field measurements vary from the dimensions on the drawings. If field measurements 

show that equipment or piping cannot be fitted, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted. 

Remove and relocate, without additional compensation, any item that is installed and is later 

found to encroach on space assigned to another use. 

1.8 Guarantee: 

1.8.1 The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials and equipment for a period of one (1) year 

from Substantial Completion, or from Owner's occupancy, whichever is earlier. Contractor 

shall make good any defects and shall include all necessary adjustments to and replacement 

of defective items without expense to the Owner. 

1.8.2 Owner reserves right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation 

without voiding Contractor's Guarantee Bond nor relieving Contractor of his responsibilities 

during guarantee period. 


1.9.1 When approved, the submittal control log and submittals shall be an addition to the 

specifications herewith, and shall be of equal force in that no deviation will be permitted except 

with the approval of the Architect/Engineer. 

1.9.1.1 Shop drawings, product literature, and other approval submittals will only be reviewed if they 

are submitted in full accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 

1 Specification sections and the following. 

1.9.1.1.1 Submittals shall be properly organized in accordance with the approved submittal control log. 





1.9.1.1.2 Submittals shall not include items from more than one specification section in the same 

submittal package unless approved in the submittal control log. 

1.9.1.1.3 Submittals shall be properly identified by a cover sheet showing the project name, Architect 

and Engineer names, submittal control number, specification section, a list of products or item 

names with model numbers in the order they appear in the package, and spaces for approval 

stamps. A sample cover sheet is included at the end of this section. 

1.9.1.1.4 Submittals shall have been reviewed and approved by the General Contractor (or Prime 

Contractor). Evidence of this review and approval shall be an "Approved" stamp with a 

signature and date on the cover sheet. 

1.9.1.1.5 Submittals that include a series of fixtures or devices (such as plumbing fixtures or valves) 

shall be organized by the fixture number or valve type and be marked accordingly. Each 

fixture must include all items associated with that fixture regardless of whether or not those 

items are used on other fixtures. 

1.9.1.1.6 The electrical design shown on the drawings supports the mechanical equipment basis of 

design specifications at the time of design. If mechanical equipment is submitted with different 

electrical requirements, it is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor to resolve all 

required electrical design changes (wire and conduit size, type of disconnect or overload 

protection, point(s) of connection, etc.) and clearly show the new electrical design on the 

mechanical submittal with a written statement that this change will be provided at no additional 

cost. Mechanical submittals made with no written reference to the electrical design will be 

presumed to work with the electrical design. Any corrections required will be at no additional 

cost. 

1.9.2 If the shop drawings show variation from the requirements of contract because of standard 

shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention of such variation in 

writing in his letter of transmittal and on the submittal cover sheet in order that, if acceptable, 

Contractor will not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with 

the contract. 

1.9.3 Review of shop drawings, product literature, catalog data, or schedules shall not relieve the 

Contractor from responsibility for deviations from contract drawings or specifications, unless he 

has in writing called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer each such deviation in writing at 

the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop 

drawings, product literature, catalog data, or schedules. Any feature or function specified but 

not mentioned in the submittal shall be assumed to be included per the specification. 

1.9.4 Submit shop drawings as called for in other sections after award of the contract and before any 

material is ordered or fabricated. Shop drawings shall consist of plans, sections, elevations 

and details to scale (not smaller than ¼" per foot), with dimensions clearly showing the 

installation. Direct copies of small scale project drawings issued to the Contractor are not 

acceptable. Drawings shall take into account equipment furnished under other sections and 

shall show space allotted for it. Include construction details and materials. 

1.10 Test Reports and Verification Submittals: Submit test reports, certifications and verification 

letters as called for in other sections. Contractor shall coordinate the required testing and 

documentation of system performance such that sufficient time exists to prepare the reports, 

submit the reports, review the reports and take corrective action within the scheduled contract 

time. 

1.11 O&M Data Submittals: Submit Operation and Maintenance data as called for in other sections. 

When a copy of approval submittals is included in the O&M Manual, only the final “Approved” 

or “Approved as Noted” copy shall be used. Contractor shall organize these data in the O&M 





Manuals tabbed by specification number. Prepare O&M Manuals as required by Division 1 

and as described herein.. Submit manuals at the Substantial Completion inspection. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 All materials shall be new or Owner-supplied reused as shown on the drawings, the best of 

their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at the building 

and shall be of reputable manufacturers. The description, characteristics, and requirements of 

materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditions established in the 

following sections. 

2.2 Equipment and Materials: 

2.2.1 Shall be new and the most suitable grade for the purpose intended. Equipment furnished 

under this division shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture 

of such items for a period of three years. Where practical, all of the components shall be 

products of a single manufacturer in order to provide proper coordination and responsibility. 

Where required, Contractor shall furnish proof of installation of similar units or equipment. 

2.2.2 Each item of equipment shall bear a name plate showing the manufacturer's name, trade 

name, model number, serial number, ratings and other information necessary to fully identify it. 

This plate shall be permanently mounted in a prominent location and shall not be concealed, 

insulated or painted. 

2.2.3 The label of the approving agency, such as UL, IBR, ASME, ARI, AMCA, by which a standard 

has been established for the particular item shall be in full view. 

2.2.4 The equipment shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged 

in the production of such equipment and shall be a product of the manufacturer's latest design. 

2.2.5 A service organization with personnel and spare parts shall be available within two hours for 

each type of equipment furnished. 

2.2.6 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Place in service by a factory 

trained representative where required. 

2.2.7 Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple manufacturers to 

indicate quality, material and type of construction desired. Manufacturer's products shown on 

the drawings have been used as basis for design; it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to 

ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products, or the particular products of named 

manufacturers, meet the detailed specifications and that size and arrangement of equipment 

are suitable for installation. 

2.2.8 Model Numbers: Catalog numbers and model numbers indicated in the drawings and 

specifications are used as a guide in the selection of the equipment and are only listed for the 

contractor's convenience. The contractor shall determine the actual model numbers for 

ordering materials in accordance with the written description of each item and with the intent of 

the drawings and specifications. 

2.3 Requests for Substitution: 

2.3.1 Where a particular system, product or material is specified by name, consider it as standard 

basis for bidding, and base proposal on the particular system, product or material specified. 

2.3.2 Requests by Contractor for substitution will be considered only when reasonable, timely, fully 

documented, and qualifying under one or more of the following circumstances. 





2.3.2.1 Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract time requirements. 

2.3.2.2 Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non-compatible, 

or cannot be properly coordinated, warranted or insured, or has other recognized disability as 

certified by Contractor. 

2.3.2.3 Substantial cost advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages including 

delays, additional compensation for redesign, investigation, evaluation and other necessary 

services and similar considerations. 

2.3.3 All requests for substitution shall contain a "Comparison Schedule" and clearly and specifically 

indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as the basis of 

design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include but shall not be 

limited to data as follows for both the specified and substituted products: 

Principal of operation. 

Materials of construction or finishes. 

Thickness of gauge of materials. 

Weight of item. 

Deleted features or items. 

Added features or items. 

Changes in other work caused by the substitution. 

Performance curves. 

If the approved substitution contains differences or omissions not specifically called to the 

attention of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner reserves the right to require equal or similar 

features to be added to the substituted products (or to have the substituted products replaced) 

at the Contractor's expense. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed and completed in a first-class 

workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best modern methods and practice. Any 

materials installed which do not present an orderly and reasonably neat and/or workmanlike 

appearance, or do not allow adequate space for maintenance, shall be removed and replaced 

when so directed by the Architect/Engineer. 


3.2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for full coordination of the mechanical systems with shop 

drawings of the building construction so the proper openings and sleeves or supports are 

provided for piping, ductwork, or other equipment passing through slabs or walls. 

3.2.2 Any additional steel supports required for the installation of any mechanical equipment, piping, 

or ductwork shall be furnished and installed under the section of the specifications requiring 

the additional supports. 

3.2.3 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that all equipment such as valves, dampers, 

filters and such other apparatus or equipment that may require maintenance and operation are 

made easily accessible, regardless of the diagrammatic location shown on the drawings. 

3.2.4 All connections to fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings shall be considered 

diagrammatic unless otherwise indicated by detail. The actual connections shall be made to 

fully suit the requirements of each case and adequately provide for expansion and servicing. 





3.2.5 The contractor shall protect equipment, material, and fixtures at all times. He shall replace all 

equipment, material, and fixtures which are damaged as a result of inadequate protection. 

3.2.6 Prior to starting and during progress of work, examine work and materials installed by others 

as they apply to work in this division. Report conditions which will prevent satisfactory 

installation. 

3.2.7 Start of work will be construed as acceptance of suitability of work of others. 

3.3 Interruption of Service: Before any equipment is shut down for disconnecting or tie-ins, 

arrangements shall be made with the Architect/Engineer and this work shall be done at the 

time best suited to the Owner. This will typically be on weekends and/or holidays and/or after 

normal working hours. Services shall be restored the same day unless prior arrangements are 

made. All overtime or premium costs associated with this work shall be included in the base 

bid. 

3.4 Phasing: Provide all required temporary valves, piping, ductwork, equipment and devices as 

required. Maintain temporary services to areas as required. Remove all temporary material 

and equipment on completion of work unless Engineer concurs that such material and 

equipment would be beneficial to the Owner on a permanent basis. 

3.5 Cutting and Patching: Notify General Contractor to do all cutting and patching of all holes, 

chases, sleeves, and other openings required for installation of equipment furnished and 

installed under this section. Utilize experienced trades for cutting and patching. Obtain 

permission from Architect/Engineer before cutting any structural items. 

3.6 Equipment Setting: Bolt equipment directly to concrete pads or vibration isolators as required, 

using hot-dipped galvanized anchor bolts, nuts and washers. Level equipment. 

3.7 Painting: Touch-up factory finishes on equipment located inside and outside shall be done 

under Division 23. Obtain matched color coatings from the manufacturer and apply as 

directed. If corrosion is found during inspection on the surface of any equipment, clean, prime, 

and paint, as required. 

3.8 Clean-up: Thoroughly clean all exposed parts of apparatus and equipment of cement, plaster, 

and other materials and remove all oil and grease spots. Repaint or touch up as required to 

look like new. During progress of work, contractor is to carefully clean up and leave premises 

and all portions of building free from debris and in a clean and safe condition. 

3.9 Start-up and Operational Test: Start each item of equipment in strict accordance with the 

manufacturer's instructions; or where noted under equipment specification, start-up shall be 

done by a qualified representative of the manufacturer. Alignment, lubrication, safety, and 

operating control shall be included in start-up check. 

3.10 Climate Control: Operate heating and cooling systems as required after initial startup to 

maintain temperature and humidity conditions to avoid freeze damage and warping or sagging 

of ceilings and carpet. 

3.11 Record Drawings: 

3.11.1 During the progress of the work the Contractor shall record on their field set of drawings the 

exact location, as installed, of all piping, ductwork, equipment, and other systems which are 

not installed exactly as shown on the contract drawings. 

3.11.2 Upon completion of the work, record drawings shall be prepared as described in the General 

Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 sections. 





3.12 Acceptance: 

3.12.1 Punch List: Submit written confirmation that all punch lists have been checked and the 

required work completed. 

3.12.2 Instructions: At completion of the work, provide a competent and experienced person who is 

thoroughly familiar with project, for one day to instruct permanent operating personnel in 

operation of equipment and control systems. This is in addition to any specific equipment 

operation and maintenance training. 

3.12.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish four complete manuals bound in ring binders 

with Table of Contents, organized, and tabbed by specification section. Manuals shall contain: 

Detailed operating instructions and instructions for making minor adjustments. 

Complete wiring and control diagrams. 

Routine maintenance operations. 

Manufacturer's catalog data, service instructions, and parts lists for each piece of operating 

equipment. 

Copies of approved submittals. 

Copies of all manufacturer's warranties. 

Copies of test reports and verification submittals. 

3.12.4 Record Drawings: Submit record drawings. 

3.12.5 Test and Balance Report: Submit four certified copies. The Report shall be submitted for 

review prior to the Substantial Completion Inspection unless otherwise required by Division 1. 

3.12.6 Acceptance will be made on the basis of tests and inspections of job. A representative of firm 

that performed test and balance work shall be in attendance to assist. Contractor shall furnish 

necessary mechanics to operate system, make any necessary adjustments and assist with 

final inspection. 











SECTION 23 05 20 - PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS 

1 GENERAL 




each Division-23 section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein. 

1.3 Extent of pipes and pipe fittings required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or 



1.4.1 Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler 

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work. 

1.5 Test Report and Verification Submittals: 

1.5.1 Submit brazing certification for all brazing installers. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall 

thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, 

provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply 

with governing regulations and industry standards. 

2.2 Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and 

pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching 

pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, 

comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe 

manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. 

2.3 Piping Materials/Products: 

2.3.1 Soldering Materials: 

2.3.1.1 Tin-Antimony (95-5) Solder: ASTM B-32, Grade 95TA. 

2.3.1.2 Silver-Phosphorus Solder: ASTM B-32, Grade 96TS. 

2.3.2 Protective Coating: Koppers Bitumastic No. 505 or equal. 

2.3.3 Brazing Materials: Silver content of not less than 15%. Materials shall be determined by 

installer to comply with installation requirements. 

2.4 Copper Tube and Fittings: 

2.4.1 Copper Tube: 

2.4.1.1 Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type K or L as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper 

unless specifically noted as annealed. 

2.4.1.2 ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 

PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 05 20 -1/4




2.4.1.3 DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 


2.4.2.1 Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 

2.4.2.2 Copper Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in 

service indicated. 

2.4.2.3 Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Installation 

3.1.1 General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which 

will achieve permanently-leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated 

service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with 

adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance or replacement of valves 

and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings, not bushings. 

Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. 

3.1.2 Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. 

3.1.3 Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) 

and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and 

column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not 

otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block 

access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead 

construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building; limit 

clearance to ½" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for 

insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside 

insulation. 

3.1.4 Concealed Piping: Unless specifically noted as “Exposed” on the drawings, conceal piping 

from view in finished and occupied spaces, by locating in column enclosures, chases, in hollow 

wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid 

partitions, except as indicated. 

3.1.5 Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other 

electrical, communications, or data equipment spaces and enclosures unless shown. Install 

drip pan under piping that must run through electrical spaces. 

3.1.5.1 Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, not from drawings. Keep pipes free of contact 

with building construction and installed work. 

3.2 Piping System Joints: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system. 

3.2.1 Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry 

practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends 

and inside of fittings. Apply non-acid type solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. 

Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and 

circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. 

3.2.2 Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ANSI B.31. 





3.3 Piping Installation 

3.3.1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction. 

3.3.2 Isolate all copper tubing from steel and concrete by wrapping the pipe at the contact point, and 

for one inch on each side, with a continuous plastic sleeve. Isolate all copper tubing installed 

in block walls with a continuous plastic sleeve. 











SECTION 23 05 21 - PIPING SPECIALTIES 

1 GENERAL 

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 



each Division-23 section making reference to or requiring piping specialties specified herein. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use 

in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each 

service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with 

installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate 

with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection 

is Installer's option. 

2.2 Fabricated Piping Specialties: 

2.2.1 Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 

2.2.1.1 Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, 

welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and 

smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6" 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage. 

2.2.1.2 Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 

2.2.1.3 Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs. 

2.2.2 Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in 

exterior walls, of one of the following: 

2.2.2.1 Caulking and Sealant: Provide foam or caulking and sealant compatible with piping materials 

used. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, 

partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. 

Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush 

with adjoining surface. 

3.2 Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Provide pipe sleeve as required. Refer to Division 7. 

3.3 Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, 

floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except 

as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately 

centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free 

movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes 

larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with 

sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction 

penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves ¼" above 

level floor finish, and ¾" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of 

PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 05 21 -1/2




sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary 

closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 

3.3.1 Install sleeves in fire-rated assemblies in accordance with the listing of the assembly and the 

fire barrier sealant. 

3.3.2 Install sheet-metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings. Fill 

annular space with caulking or fire barrier sealant as required. 

3.3.3 Install steel-pipe sleeves at floor penetrations. Fill annular space with caulking or fire barrier 

sealant as required. 

3.3.4 Install iron-pipe sleeves at all foundation wall penetrations and at exterior penetrations; both 

above and below grade. Fill annular space with caulking or mechanical sleeve seals. 


PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 05 21 -2/2




SECTION 23 05 29 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS 

1 GENERAL 

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and 

Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2 This section is a Division-23 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each 

Division-23 section making reference to or requiring supports, anchors, and seals specified 

herein. 

1.3 Extent of supports, anchors, and seals required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or 


1.4 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and 

installation of supports, anchors, and seals. 

1.5 MSS Standard Compliance: 

1.5.1 Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with 

ANSI/MSS SP-58. 

1.5.2 Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. 

1.5.3 Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. 

1.5.4 Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide supports and 

hangers by Grinnel, Michigan Hanger Company, B-Line Systems, or approved equal. 

2.2 Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factoryfabricated 

horizontal-piping hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of 

the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in 

accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one 

type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to 

exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or 

shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping 

systems. 

2.2.1 Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1. 

2.2.2 Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. 

2.2.3 Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7. 

2.2.4 Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. 

2.2.5 Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor 

flange. 

2.2.6 Single Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 41. 

2.2.7 Adjustable Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43. 

SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS 23 05 29 -1/4




2.2.8 Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44 or Type 47. 

2.3 Vertical-Piping Clamps: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated verticalpiping 

clamps complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, 

selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and 

manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly 

fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. 

2.3.1 Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 

2.3.2 Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. 

2.4 Hanger-Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hangerrod 


selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance 

with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one 

manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger 

rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems. 

2.4.1 Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 

2.4.2 Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. 

2.5 Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated building 


selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and 

manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit 

hanger rods. 

2.5.1 Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. 

2.5.2 C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. 

2.5.3 Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 

2.5.4 Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. 

2.5.5 Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. 

2.6 Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping 

hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for 

exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 

2.6.1 Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent 

crushing of insulation. 

2.6.2 Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; use with rollers, fill interior voids with segments of 

insulation matching adjoining insulation. 

2.7 Miscellaneous Materials: 

2.7.1 Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. 

2.7.2 Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ANSI/ASTM A 36. 





2.7.3 Cement Grout: Portland cement (ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly 

graded, natural sand (ANSI/ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 

parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. 

2.7.4 Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes or continuous channel struts 

selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Preparation 

3.1.1 Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building 

structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct 

inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other 

building structural attachments. 

3.1.2 Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at 

project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, and installers of 

other work requiring coordination with work of this section for purpose of reviewing material 

selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with 

requirements specified. 

3.2 Installation of Building Attachments: 

3.2.1 Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for 

proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in 

MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional 

concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at 

changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert 

securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, 

install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 

3.2.2 In areas of work requiring attachments to existing concrete, use self drilling rod inserts, Phillips 

Drill Co., "Red-Head" or equal. 

3.3 Installation of Hangers and Supports: 

3.3.1 General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from 

building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal 

piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with 

maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69 or as listed herein, whichever is most limiting. 

Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers 

for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use 

wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 

3.3.1.1 Horizontal steel pipe and copper tube 1-1/4" diameter and smaller: support on 6 foot centers. 

3.3.1.2 Horizontal steel pipe and copper tube 1-1/2" diameter and larger: support on 10 foot centers. 

3.3.1.3 Vertical steel pipe and copper tube: support at each floor. 

3.3.2 Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and 

other accessories. 

3.3.3 Paint all black steel hangers with black enamel. Galvanized steel and copper clad hangers do 

not require paint. 





3.3.4 Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are 

copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. 

3.3.5 Provision for Movement: 

3.3.5.1 Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit 

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, 

expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 

3.3.5.2 Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and 

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

3.3.5.3 Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that 

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. 

3.3.6 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 

3.3.6.1 Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated, install 

coated protective shields. 

3.3.6.2 Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through 

insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 

3.4 Installation of Anchors: 

3.4.1 Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI 

B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 

3.4.2 Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to 

structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. 

3.4.3 Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal piperuns, 

at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and elbows. Make 

provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction 

of piping. 

3.4.4 Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion 

unit manufacturer's written instructions to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums 

recommended by manufacturer for each unit. 

END OF SECTION 23 05 29 





SECTION 23 05 53 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 

1 GENERAL 




each Division-23 section making reference to or requiring identification devices specified 

herein. 

1.3 Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings 

and/or specified in other Division-23 sections. 

1.4 Refer to Division-26 sections for identification requirements of electrical work; not work of this 

section. Refer to other Division-23 sections for identification requirements for controls; not 

work of this section. 

1.5 Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, 

and viewing angles of identification devices. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each 

application as referenced in other Division-23 sections. Where more than single type is 

specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each 

product category. 

2.2 Painted Identification Materials 

2.2.1 Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes 

generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, 

but not less than 1-¼" high letters for ductwork and not less than ¾" high letters for access 

door signs and similar operational instructions. 

2.2.2 Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; 

either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. 

2.2.3 Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel. 

2.3 Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: 

2.3.1 General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in the sizes and thicknesses 

indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style a minimum of 3/4" tall and wording 

indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary 

because of substrate. 

2.3.2 Thickness: 1/16" for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; 1/8” for larger units. 

2.3.3 Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive 

where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 

2.4 Stamped Nameplates: Provide equipment manufacturer's standard stamped nameplates for 

motors, AHUs, pumps, etc. 

3 EXECUTION 

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 53 -1/2




3.1 Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, 

painting or other covering or finish, install identification after completion of covering and 

painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable 

concealment. 

3.2 Ductwork Identification: 

3.2.1 General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with stenciled signs 

and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white. 

3.2.2 Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling 

system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed 

enclosures, and at 50' spacings along exposed runs. 

3.2.3 Access Doors: Provide stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, 

indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating 

instructions, and appropriate and procedural information. 

3.3 Mechanical Equipment Identification: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on a vertical 

surface on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. 

Label shall indicate type of system and area served. Provide signs for the following general 

categories of equipment and operational devices: 

3.3.1 Fans (inside housing or above ceiling for ceiling mounted fans), blowers, primary balancing 

dampers and VAV boxes. 

3.3.2 HVAC air handlers and fan coil units. 

3.3.3 Air conditioning indoor and outdoor units. 

3.4 Stamped Nameplates: Equipment manufacturers to provide standard stamped nameplates on 

all major equipment items such as motors, pumps, AHUs, etc. Where motors are hidden from 

view (within equipment casing, or otherwise not easily accessible, etc.), the equipment supplier 

shall furnish a duplicate motor data nameplate to be affixed to the equipment casing in an 

easily visible location, unless data is already included on the equipment nameplate.] 

3.5 Adjusting and Cleaning: 

3.5.1 Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked 

by work of this division or other divisions. 

3.5.2 Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices. 


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 53 -2/2




SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 

1 GENERAL 


and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Division-23 Basic 

Mechanical Materials Sections apply to work of this section. 

1.2 Description of Work: 

1.2.1 Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing work (TAB) is indicated by requirements of this 

section, and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily 

limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems and associated equipment 

and apparatus of mechanical work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) 

adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and 

submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required. 

1.2.2 Coordination: Coordinate with the General Contractor and Mechanical Contractor responsible 

for the HVAC system installation as required to complete the TAB work. 

1.3 The intent of this specification is to balance HVAC systems within the tolerances listed, 

maintaining the pressure relationships indicated, with a minimum of noise. 

1.3.1 Airflow Tolerances: 

1.3.1.1 Air Handling: The supply air, return air and outdoor air quantities shall be balanced within 5% 

of design values. 

1.3.1.2 Exhaust Fans: The exhaust fan quantities shall be set as required to maintain the design 

exhaust terminal flows within 5% of design values. If no exhaust terminals exist, exhaust fan 

air quantities shall be balanced within 10% of design values. 

1.3.1.3 Terminal Units: The air quantities associated with VAV boxes, fan coil units, self-regulating air 

valves, unit heaters and other similar devices shall be balanced within 5% of design values. 

1.3.1.4 Ceiling Diffusers, Supply Registers, Return and Exhaust Inlets: Balance to an air quantity 

within 10% of the design values. 

1.3.2 Temperature Tolerances: 

1.3.2.1 Air Handling Temperatures: The controlled temperatures at AHUs shall be verified to be under 

control within 1ºF of design values. 

1.3.2.2 Room Temperatures: Balance systems and controls within 2ºF of indicated settings. 

1.4 Quality Assurance: The TAB Contractor shall be certified by one of the following means: 

1.4.1 Tester: A firm certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) in those testing 

and balancing disciplines required for this project, who is not the Installer of the systems to be 

tested and is otherwise independent of the project. Comply with NEBB's "Procedural 

Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems" as applicable to 

this work. 

1.4.2 Tester: A firm certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and 

balancing disciplines required for this project. AABC-certified firms are independent by 

definition. Comply with AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards", as applicable to 

TESTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 23 05 93 - 1/4




this work. 

1.4.3 Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- 

Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to measurements, 

instruments and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as otherwise indicated. 

1.5 Job Conditions: 

1.5.1 Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until HVAC work (including 

Controls) has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no residual work still to be 

completed. 

1.5.2 Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free 

from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. 

1.5.3 Do not proceed until architectural work that would affect balancing (walls, ceiling, windows, 

doors) have been installed. 

1.5.4 Testing may proceed system by system, but each HVAC system must be complete as 

describe herein. 

1.5.5 The mechanical contractor shall make any changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers, and/or add 

dampers as required for correct balancing. 

1.6 Approval Submittals 

1.6.1 Submit the name of the proposed test and balance company for the Engineer's approval within 

thirty (30) days after awarding of contract. 


1.7.1 Submit four (4) copies of the dated test and balance report upon completion of TAB work. The 

report shall include a list of instruments used for the work. The report shall be signed by the 

supervisor who performed the TAB work. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Patching Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original 

Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled 

for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes. 

2.2 Test Instruments: Utilize test instruments and equipment of the type, precision, and capacity 

as recommended in the referenced standard. All instruments shall be in good condition and 

shall have been calibrated within the previous six (6) months (or more recently if required by 

standard). 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 General: 

3.1.1 Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work 

has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester. 

3.1.2 Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance 

with procedures outlined in applicable standards, and as modified or detailed herein. 





3.1.3 Test, adjust and balance systems during summer season for air conditioning systems and 

during winter season for heating systems, including at least a period of operation at outside 

conditions within 5ºF wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 

10ºF dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation 

does not permit measuring final temperatures, then take final temperature readings when 

seasonal operation does permit. The Contractor shall return for a change of seasons test at 

no additional cost to the Owner and submit the revised TAB report. 

3.1.4 Punch List: Prepare a deficiency (punch) list for the Contractor with a copy of the Engineer that 

lists all items that are incorrectly installed or are functioning improperly. Provide a retest after 

all items are corrected. 

3.1.5 Prepare TAB report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format 

recommended by applicable standards, modified as required to include all data listed herein. 

3.1.6 Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test 

purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer. 

3.1.7 Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed 

control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB 

work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. 

3.1.8 Include in the TAB report recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical 

performances when system cannot be successfully balanced. 

3.1.9 Include an extended warranty of ninety (90) days after completion of test and balance work, 

during which time the Engineer, at his discretion, may request a recheck, or resetting of any 

component as listed in test report. The TAB company shall provide technicians and 

instruments and make any tests required by the Engineer during this time period. 

3.2 Controls 

3.2.1 Check all HVAC controls for proper location, calibration and sequence of operation. 

3.2.2 Check operation of all controllers and controlled devices to verify proper action and direction. 

Check the operation of all interlocks. 

3.3 Air Balancing 

3.3.1 Leakage tests on ductwork must have been completed before air balancing. 

3.3.2 Set dampers, volume controls and fan speeds to obtain specified air delivery with minimum 

noise level. Rebalance as required to accomplish this. Simulate fully loaded filters during test. 

3.3.3 Set grille deflections as noted on plans. Modify deflections if required to eliminate drafts or 

objectionable air movement. 

3.3.4 Record air terminal velocity after completion of balance work. 

3.3.5 Record final grille and register deflection settings if different from that specified on contract 

drawings. 

3.3.6 Record all fan speeds. 

3.4 Data Collection: 





3.4.1 In addition to the data required for any specified performance tests, measure and record the 

temperatures, pressures, flow rates, and nameplate data for all components listed herein. 

3.4.2 It is the intent of this section to record data on balanced systems, under normal operating or 

design conditions. 

3.4.3 Temperatures: 

3.4.4 Pressures: 

1. Outside dry and wet bulb temperatures. 

2. Dry bulb temperature in each room and at least one wet bulb temperature in each zone. 

3. Refrigerant liquid and suction temperatures. 

4. Inlet and outlet temperature of each heat exchange device - both fluids. 

1. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. 

2. Suction and discharge pressure of each pump. 

3. Each refrigerant suction and discharge pressure. 

3.4.5 Flow rates: 

1. Flow rate through each fan. 

3.4.6 Nameplate Data: 

1. Complete nameplate data for all equipment. 

2. Motor data to include horsepower, phase, voltage, RPM, full load nameplate current, fuse 

rating in disconnect switch, number or manufacturer's size designation, and ampere 

rating of overcurrent and low voltage protection devices in starters. 

3.5 All test openings in ductwork shall be resealed in an approved manner. 






SECTION 23 07 13 - EXTERIOR INSULATION FOR DUCTWORK 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 


1.3.1 Product Data: Submit producer's data sheets and installation instructions on each insulation 

system including insulation, coverings, adhesives, sealers, protective finishes, and other 

material recommended by the manufacturer for applications indicated. Submit for: 

1.3.1.1 Flexible duct insulation 

1.4 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Include in O&M Manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation 

products by Knauf, Owens-Corning, Johns Manville, Certainteed. 

2.2 Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, coverings, 

sealers, mastic, and adhesive) with a flame spread rating of 25 or less, and a smokedeveloped 

rating of 50 or less as tested by ANSI/ASTM 84. 

2.3 Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: ASTM C553, Type I, Class B-3 (temperature less than 350ºF). 

Duct wrap shall be 1 pcf density with UL rated aluminum foil vapor barrier (FSK). 

2.4 General Purpose Mastic: Benjamin Foster 35-00 Series, Insulcoustic VIAC Mastic, Childers 

CP-10, or approved equal. The final selection of this product for the specific application 

indicated is the responsibility of the insulation supplier. The insulation system must meet the 

specified application. 

2.5 Vapor Barrier Sealant: Benjamin Foster 30-35, Insulcoustic IC-501, 3M EC-1378, Childers 

CP-30, or approved equal. Provide "Low Odor" type. The final selection of this product for the 

specific application indicated is the responsibility of the insulation supplier. The insulation 

system must meet the specified application. 

2.6 Adhesive: Benjamin Foster 85-20, Insulcoustic IC-205, 3M EC-35, Childers CP-82, Childers 

CP-89, or approved equal. The final selection of this product for the specific application 

indicated is the responsibility of the insulation supplier. The insulation system must meet the 

specified application. 

2.7 Fiber-Glas Mesh: 10x10 Mesh. Foster Mastafab or equal. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Insulate all supply, return and outdoor air ductwork concealed above ceilings, in chases, or 

elsewhere, and the backs of all ceiling supply outlets with 2" thick fiberglass blanket insulation 

with vapor barrier. 

3.2 Installation of Flexible Insulation: 

EXTERIOR INSULATION FOR DUCTWORK 23 07 13-1/2




3.2.1 Insulate round elbows and fittings with wrap such that thickness is equal to adjoining duct 

covering. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. 

3.2.2 Adhere insulation to duct with 50 percent coverage using approved insulation adhesive applied 

in 6-inch wide swaths with 6-inch spaces between swaths. Additionally secure insulation with 

perforated pins and Tuff-Bond or by self-sticking pins with a 3/8" self-tapping screw. Space on 

12-inch centers and 3 inches from all edges. Ducts up through 24" wide only require one row 

of pins. Ducts over 24" wide shall have pins spaced as described herein. 

3.2.3 Lap all joints 2 inches and seal joints with 4-inch wide strips of open mesh glass fabric 

embedded in two coats of general purpose mastic. 

3.2.4 Seal all punctures and breaks in aluminum vapor barrier with open mesh glass fabric and 

vapor barrier sealant. 


EXTERIOR INSULATION FOR DUCTWORK 23 07 13-2/2




SECTION 23 31 13 - HVAC METAL DUCTWORK 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section. 

1.3 Extent of HVAC metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by 


1.4 Refer to other Division-23 sections for exterior insulation of metal ductwork. 

1.5 Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork accessories. 


1.6.1 SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal 

and Flexible" 1985 Edition for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork, unless otherwise 

noted. 

1.6.2 NFPA 90A Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air 

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 


1.7.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for 

the following. 

Factory-fabricated ductwork 

Sealants 

1.7.2 Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of HVAC metal ductwork and fittings including, 

but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor 

penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and 

proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local 

shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are 

not reduced. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Ductwork Materials: 

2.1.1 Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied 

spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam 

marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which 

would impair painting. 

2.1.2 Galvanized Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized 

HVAC METAL DUCTWORK 23 31 13 - 1/4




sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in 

accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Stamp gauge and 

manufacturer's identification on each sheet. Break sheets so that identification is exposed. 

2.2 Miscellaneous Ductwork Materials: 

2.2.1 General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, 

where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system 

requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. 

2.2.2 Duct Sealant: Provide non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type 

applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by 

manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. 

2.2.3 Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized 

steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 

2.2.4 Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15° change 

of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45° laterals and 45° 

elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90° branches are indicated, provide conical 

type tees. 

2.3 Fabrication: 

2.3.1 Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-ft lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to 

complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field 

assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and 

handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation. 

2.3.2 Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards", except provide sealant at all joints. Supply duct from air 

conditioning units and all return and exhaust duct shall be minimum 2" pressure class unless 

otherwise noted. 

2.3.3 Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as 

applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius 

equal to 1½ times associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows 

where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30° for contracting tapers and 20° 

for expanding tapers. 

2.3.4 Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. 

Refer to Division-23 section "Ductwork Accessories" for accessory requirements. 

2.4 Factory-Fabricated Low Pressure Ductwork (Maximum 2" W.G.): 

2.4.1 Material: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with ASTM 

A 525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 

2.4.2 Gauge: 28-gauge minimum for round ducts and fittings, 4" through 8" diameter. 26-gauge 

minimum 9" through 14", 24-gauge minimum 15" through 26". 





2.4.3 Elbows: One piece construction for 90° and 45° elbows 14" and smaller. Provide multiple 

gore construction for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential joint. 

2.4.4 Divided Flow Fittings: 90° tees, constructed with saddle tap spot welded and bonded to duct 

fitting body. 

2.4.5 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factoryfabricated 

ductwork by Semco Mfg., Inc. or United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp, or 


3 EXECUTION 

3.1 General: Examine areas and conditions under which HVAC metal ductwork is to be installed. 

Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner 

acceptable to Installer. 

3.2 Installation Of Metal Ductwork: 

3.2.1 General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices 

which will achieve air-tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated 

over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated 

service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at 

connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support 

ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts trueto-shape 

and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. 

3.2.2 Supports: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as 

required to avoid delays in work. Install self-drilling screw anchors in prestressed concrete or 

existing work. 

3.2.3 Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shopfabricated 

work and accommodate installation requirements. Seal joints in round or oval 

ductwork with hard cast or shrink bands, and sheet metal screws, or by welding. 

3.2.4 Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally. 

Avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and 

notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct 

useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to 

walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure 

elements of building. Limit clearance to ½" where furring is shown for enclosure or 

concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate 

insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. In finished and occupied spaces, 

conceal ductwork from view by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above 

suspended ceilings, unless specifically noted as "Exposed". Do not encase horizontal runs in 

solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and 

lighting layouts and similar finished work. 

3.2.5 Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults or other 

electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. 

3.2.6 Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed 





to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet 

metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1½". Fasten to 

duct and substrate. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide 

firestopping between duct and substrate. 

3.2.7 Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil 

frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. 

3.2.8 Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards. Fan discharge outlet ducts shall be installed correctly with regard to "system 

effect" per AMCA Publication 201. 

3.3 Leakage Tests: After each duct system is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with 

Sections 3 and 5 of the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Test pressure shall 

be equal to pressure class of duct, less 0.5" static pressure. Repair leaks and repeat tests 

until total leakage is less than 5% of system design air flow for low pressure systems and less 

than 1% for systems rated over 3". 

3.4 Equipment Connections: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible 

connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or 

equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated. 

3.5 Clean ductwork internally free of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign 

substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be 

painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. Keep ducts closed with poly 

during construction to prevent contamination by construction dust and debris. 

3.6 Balancing: Refer to Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air distribution 

balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become 

apparent in balancing process. 

3.7 System Adjustment: Adjust the system to provide functional operation to the extent possible, 

and leave ready for Testing and Balancing work. It is not the intent of this section to provide 

final testing and balancing, but to leave the system operational with a minimum of noise. 






SECTION 23 33 00 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 

1 GENERAL 




1.3 Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by 


1.4 Refer to other Division-23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork 

accessories; not work of this section. 


1.5.1 SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of both SMACNA "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" . 

1.5.2 NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and 

Ventilating Systems" pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. 


1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork 

accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation 

instructions as follows: 

Flexible connections 

1.6.2 O&M Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for fire 

dampers. Include this data, product data, and a copy of approval submittals in O&M manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Turning Vanes: Provide manufactured or fabricated single wall turning vanes and vane 

runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". 

2.2 Flexible Connections: 

2.2.1 General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated 

equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into 

duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint 

flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of 

absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. 

2.2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirments, provide products by one of 

the following: Duro Dyne Corp., Flexaust (The) Co., or Ventfabrics, Inc. 

2.3 Fire Dampers: 

2.3.1 Fire Dampers: Provide curtain type fire dampers, UL classified and labeled per UL 555, of 

types and sizes indicated. Construct casings and blades of galvanized steel. Damper shall 

not restrict duct free area when open. Dampers shall be rated for dynamic closure under flow 

and pressure. Provide sleeves and mounting angles. Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 165° 

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1/2




F unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position. All 

dampers shall be spring activated. Basis of design: 

1-1/2 HR: Ruskin IBD2 - Style B for rectangular, Style CR for round, Style CO for oval. 

1-1/2 HR: Ruskin IBDT for transfer grilles in narrow partitions. 

HR: Ruskin IBD23 - Style B for rectangular, Style CR for round, Style CO for oval. 

2.3.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire and smoke 

dampers by Air Balance, Inc., American Warning & Ventilating, Arrow Louver and Damper, 

Penn Ventilator Co., or Ruskin Mfg. Co. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to 

Installer. 

3.2 Installation of Ductwork Accessories: 

3.2.1 Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with 

applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in 

accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. 

3.2.2 Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90º elbows in supply, return, and exhaust air 

systems, and elsewhere as indicated. 

3.2.3 Install flexible connections in ductwork such that the clear length of the connector is 

approximately two inches. Provide thrust restraints as required. Flexible material shall not be 

so slack as to take a definite concave or convex shape during fan operation. 

3.2.4 Install fire dampers within fire walls and floors at locations shown on the mechanical drawings. 

Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, NFPA 90A, and UL 

555. Basis of design installation is detailed on the drawings. 

3.2.5 Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of 

ductwork accessories properly with other work. 

3.3 Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test 

for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories as required to 

obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. 

3.4 Adjusting And Cleaning: 

3.4.1 Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and 

Balancing". However, the system shall be left functional with all dampers open or throttled. 

3.4.2 Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with 

manufacturer's touch-up paint. 

3.4.3 Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range; 

obtain receipt. 


DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2/2




SECTION 23 34 00 - FANS 

1 GENERAL 




1.3 Extent of fan work required by this section as indicated on drawings and schedules, and by 



1.4.1 Refer to Division-7 sections for installation of prefabricated roof curbs; not work of this section. 

Furnishing prefabricated roof curbs is part of this section’s work. 

1.4.2 Refer to Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing of fans. 

1.4.3 Refer to Division-23 HVAC control systems sections for control work required in conjunction 

with fans. 

1.4.4 Refer to Division-26 sections for power supply wiring from power source to power connection 

on fans. Division-26 work will include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, 

except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 


1.5.1 AMCA Compliance: Provide fans which have been tested and rated in accordance with AMCA 

standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 

1.5.2 UL Compliance: Provide fans which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed. 


1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for fans, including specifications, capacity 

ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions. 

Submit assembly-type drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, methods of 

assembly of components, and field connection details. 

Fans 

Vibration Control 

1.7 O&M Data Submittals: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of fan, accessory, 

and control. Include these data, a copy of approved submittals, and wiring diagrams in O&M 

Manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard prefabricated fans of type and size 

indicated, modified as necessary to comply with requirements, and as required for complete 

installation. Provide accessories as listed in the schedule on the drawings and as described 

herein. Motors shall be high efficiency. 

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide fans 

FANS 23 34 00 - 1/4




manufactured by Acme, Greenheck, Loren Cook, Penn or approved equal unless otherwise 

noted herein. 

2.3 Centrifugal Ceiling Exhausters: 

2.3.1 Fan Assembly: Provide steel housing, plastic or aluminum grille, backdraft damper, statically 

and dynamically balanced fan wheel, permanently lubricated motor with internal thermal 

overloads, vibration isolation and all required mounting hardware and brackets. Provide 

acoustically treated housing for all fans larger than 60 cfm. Mounting type shall be as 

indicated on the drawings or on the schedule. 

2.3.2 Connectors: Provide adaptors, connectors, and eave elbows as required to connect fan 

discharges to outlets. 

2.3.3 Outlets: Provide where shown on the drawings (or required by the installation) wall caps, vent 

caps, or roof jacks, each with birdscreen, to match fans and surrounding construction. 

2.4 In-Line Centrifugal Fans: 

2.4.1 Housing: Provide round aluminum or square weather tight housing constructed of steel and 

painted inside and out with an epoxy finish. Provide venturi type inlet. 

2.4.2 Fan Wheels: Provide aluminum air foil type, backward curved, statically and dynamically 

balanced. 

2.4.3 Drive: Provide direct or belt drive as scheduled with pre-lubricated, ball bearing, continuous 

duty type motors. Provide vibration isolation equipment for the entire drive. 

2.4.4 Isolation and Support: Provide spring type vibration isolators and fan support brackets. 

2.5 Transfer Fans: Corrosion resistant galvanized steel housing, tinnerman clips for grille 

mounting, Junction box, mounting flanges, speed controller, and powder coated steel grille for 

both sides. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install fans in accordance with 

manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to insure that fans 

serve their intended function. 

3.2 Coordinate fan work with work of walls and ceilings as necessary for proper interfacing. 

Framing of openings, caulking, and curb installation is not work of this section. 

3.3 Ductwork: Refer to Division-23 section "Ductwork". Connect ducts to fans in accordance with 

manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide flexible connections in ductwork at fans. 

3.4 Install fans on vibration isolation equipment as required. Set level and plumb. 

3.5 Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be 

factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to electrical 

Installer. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal 

and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Verify proper rotation direction of fan 

wheels. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to 

equipment installer. 

FANS 23 34 00 - 2/4




3.6 Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within fans. Adjust dampers for free operation. 

3.7 Testing: After installation of fans has been completed, test each fan to demonstrate proper 

operation of units at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct 

malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be 

satisfactorily corrected. 

3.8 Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Remove all tar and soil. Repair any marred or 

scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 


FANS 23 34 00 - 3/4





FANS 23 34 00 - 4/4




SECTION 23 37 13 - GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 

1 GENERAL 




1.3 Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by 


1.4 Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction 

with air outlets and inlets and for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this section. 


1.5.1 ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under 

requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". Provide air outlets and 

inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 

1.5.2 NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for 

the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 


1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets indicating 

construction, finish, and mounting details. 

1.6.2 Performance Data: For each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, provide aspiration ability, 

temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate 

selections and data as required. 

1.7 O&M Data Submittals: Submit cleaning instructions for finishes and spare parts lists. Include 

this data and a copy of approval submittals in O&M manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 General: 

2.1.1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard grilles, registers, and ceiling 

diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials 

and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. 

2.1.2 Manufacturers not listed in the following specification will not be considered for approval unless 

accepted by addendum prior to bid. 

2.1.3 Performance: Provide grilles, registers and ceiling diffusers that have, as minimum, 

temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size 

device equal to the basis of design. 

2.1.4 Ceiling and Wall Compatibility: Provide grilles, registers and diffusers with border styles that 

are compatible with adjacent wall and ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured 

to fit into ceiling module or wall with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general 

construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems and walls which will 

contain each type of ceiling diffuser, grille, or register. 

GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 23 37 13 - 1/2




2.1.5 Appearance: All grilles and registers shall be aluminum construction and all diffusers shall be 

aluminum construction, unless otherwise noted, with uniform matching appearance for each 

type of outlet. Ceiling mounted grilles and registers shall be set to be sight tight from the 

predominant exposure. 

2.1.6 Finish: All ceiling mounted grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be finished with baked white 

enamel. Wall and door mounted grilles and registers shall be finished with clear anodized 

finish . 

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 

Titus, Price, or Metal Aire. 

2.3 Rectangular Ceiling Diffusers: Provide rectangular face, adjustable diffuser with removable 

inner core, no corner joints. If square or rectangular neck is provided, provide square to round 

adaptor as required. Provide lay-in panel as required. Provide trim ring for diffusers in hard 

ceilings to allow opening to be used for access. 

2.4 Return Grilles : Provide return grilles with one set of 45 degree fixed louvers, parallel to the 

long dimension. Provide opposed blade damper, screwdriver operated from the face. Provide 

mounting frame for all wall and plaster ceiling installations. 

2.5 Ceiling Linear Diffusers (Flowbar): Provide linear supply diffusers with horizontal pattern and 

extruded aluminum pattern controller. Number and size of slots are shown on the drawings. 

Provide joining and alignment strips, end caps, mitred corners, and frame type suitable for 

ceiling installation. Provide 2 inch slot unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Provide 

insulated plenums for supply diffusers. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Coordinate installation with ceiling and light fixture installation. Locate ceiling outlets as 

indicated on architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans. Unless otherwise indicated, locate ceiling 

outlets in the center of acoustical ceiling modules with sides parallel to the grid. 

3.2 Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in 

accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended 

functions. 

3.3 Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to 

interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work. 

3.4 Set air volumes to values shown on the drawings so that the system is functional. Leave ready 

for test and balance contractor. 

3.5 Furnish to Owner three operating keys for each type of outlet and inlet that require them; 

obtain receipt. 


GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 23 37 13 - 2/2




SECTION 23 37 26 - WALL LOUVERS 

1 GENERAL 




1.3 Extent of wall louver work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by the requirements of 

this section. 

1.4 Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork, duct accessories and controls work. 

1.5 AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Provide 

AMCA certified rating seal. 


1.6.1 Product data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for louvers including: model 

number, accessories furnished, construction, finish, mounting details, performance data. 

1.7 O&M Data Submittals: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning of finishes and a copy of 

approval submittals. Include in O&M manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, submit products by 

Ruskin, Greenheck, Arrow, United Enertech, American Warming and Ventilating, or AMCA 

labeled approved equal. 

2.2 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where 

shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components 

as indicated, and as required for complete installation. Provide 50% Kynar 500 coated, 

corrosion resistant finish with 5 year warranty; color to be selected by the Architect. 

2.3 Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with 4 inch frame, flange and sill extension piece that 

are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into 

construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. 

Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will 

contain each type of louver. 

2.4 Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld units or use 

stainless steel fasteners. 

2.5 Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized 

aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. 

2.6 Stationary Louvers: Florida Product Approved heavy gauge extruded 6063-T5 aluminum alloy, 

5 in. x 0.081 in. nominal wall thickness frame with vee type horizontally arranged rain resistant 

blades. Blades shall be heavy gauge extruded 6063-T5 aluminum allow, 0.081 in. nominal 

wall thickness with 2” blade spacing. Mechanically fastened construction with formed 

aluminum sill pan. Ruskin Model EME520MD or equal. 

3 EXECUTION 

WALL LOUVERS 23 37 26 - 1/2




3.1 Install where shown on the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. 

Exercise care to prevent scratches. 

3.2 Verify size of louvers shown on drawings prior to fabrication. Coordinate with wall openings. 

Sizes may be altered subject to approval by Engineer provided free area remains 

approximately the same as indicated. 


WALL LOUVERS 23 37 26 - 2/2




SECTION 23 81 43 – AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 

1 GENERAL 




1.3 Refer to other Division-23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of air conditioning 

units. 


1.4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including dimensions, ratings, 

electrical characteristics, weight, capacities, materials of construction, and installation 

instructions. 

Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units 

1.5 O&M Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists. Include 

these data, a copy of approval submittals, product data, and wiring diagrams in O&M manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 


2.1.1 Provide units tested by UL, ARL or ETL. 

2.1.2 Test and rate split system air conditioning units in accordance with ARI Standard 210, 240 or 

360 as applicable, and provide certified rating seal. 

2.1.3 Construct refrigeration system in accordance with ASHRAE 15 (ANSI B 9.1) "Safety Code for 

Mechanical Refrigeration". 

2.1.4 Test and rate units in accordance with the applicable ARI standards and provide certified rating 

seal. Sound test and rate units in accordance with ARI 270. 

2.1.5 Provide units with an EER/SEER that meets the Florida Energy Efficiency Code and the 

schedules on the drawings. 

2.2 General Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units: Provide air-cooled, factory-assembled and 

tested, thru-the-wall, packaged air conditioning units as indicated. Provide capacities and 

electrical characteristics as scheduled. 

2.2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide packaged units 

of GE Zoneline, McQuay, Trane, Friedrich, Carrier, or approved equal. 

2.2.2 Cabinet: Provide painted metal cabinet with fiberglass lining for sound attenuation. Provide 

wall sleeve, outside extruded aluminum architectural louver and trim pieces as required. 

Provide access panels as required for proper servicing of equipment. Provide adjustable linear 

supply air grilles. 

2.2.3 Refrigeration System: Provide complete refrigerant circuit and hermetic rotary compressor 

with vibration isolation. 

AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 81 43 - 1/4




2.2.4 Controls: Provide two-stage thermostat, heat-cool switch, high-low fan switch, and air vent 

control. 

2.2.5 Filters: Provide cleanable return air filters that can be removed without removing any panels. 

2.2.6 Electric Heater: Provide unit mounted auxiliary electric heater controlled by second stage of 

thermostat. 

2.2.7 Condensate Removal: Provide condensate drain and drain kit as required to remove 

condensate. 

2.2.8 Accessories: Provide sub-base with electrical separable connector or attachment plug and 

receptacle complying with National Electric Code 440-13 and 440-63 for all units. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Installation: Install in accordance with producer's printed instructions. Brush out fins on all 

coils. 

3.2 Support: Mount units on concrete pads with manufacturer’s recommended service and 

operating clearance. 

3.3 Indoor air handling units: Mount 5 ton and smaller units on vibration isolation only. Mount units 

larger than 5 tons on vibration isolation and concrete housekeeping pads. 

3.4 Outdoor Units: Mount outdoor units with flat bottoms on concrete housekeeping pad. Units 

with legs or stands do not require housekeeping pads. Housekeeping pad is in addition to 

concrete mechanical pad. 

3.5 Brush out fins on all coils. 

3.6 Refrigerant Piping: Comply with ANSI B31.5, “Refrigerant Piping,” (except lower pressure 

limits below 15 psig), and ASHRAE 15 (ANSI B9.1). Make all joints carefully and neatly. 

Clean pipe and fittings before fluxing. Remove burrs. Braze by the sweat method using Sil 

Fos. Install field installed refrigerant devices and valves as required. 

3.7 Testing: After job erection, or modification of factory installed piping, pressure test for leaks at 

150 psig using a nominal amount of a suitable tracer refrigerant and dry nitrogen or a suitable 

refrigerant. Perform leak tests with an electronic halide leak detector having a sensitivity of at 

least ½ ounce R-12 per year. Refrigeration piping will not be accepted unless it is gas tight. 

3.8 Evacuation: After completing the successful pressure test, multiple-evacuate the system. 

Leave the compressor isolation valves shut and connect the vacuum pump to both the high 

and loq sides. Evacuate the system to an absolute pressure of 1,500 microns. Then break 

vacuum to 2 psig with dry nitrogen. Repeat this process. Install the proper biflow drier in the 

liquid line and evacuate the system to 500 microns. Leave vacuum pump running for at least 

two hours without interruption. Break vacuum with the refrigerant to be used and raise 

pressure to 2 psig. Do not operate compressors during the evacuation procedure. 

3.9 Charging: After completing the successful evacuation procedure, charge refrigerant directly to 

the system from the original containers through a filter drier. Charge to the manufacturer’s 

stated conditions of pressure for required temperature. Weigh the refrigerant added and 

record on the startup report. 

3.10 Filters: Provide 2" thick 30% filters in all units during construction. After construction (but prior 

to the test and balance being performed) install clean final filters. 





3.11 Cleaning: Clean tar and all other soil from housing exterior. Caulk around pipe sleeves. 

3.12 Condensate Drain: Pipe trapped copper condensate drain (full size of unit outlet) to nearest 

floor drain or as shown on the drawings. Refer to Division-23 section "Insulation" for pipe 

insulation. 

3.13 Startup: Check entire assembly for correctness of installation, alignment, and control 

sequencing. Start all component parts in proper sequence. Make all adjustments required to 

insure proper smooth quiet operation. 











SECTION 23 81 46 - WATER-TO-AIR HEAT PUMPS 

1 GENERAL 



1.2 Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 

1.3 Extent of water-to-air heat pump work required by this section is indicated on drawings and 

schedules, and by requirements of this section. 

1.4 Refer to Division 26 sections for electrical; not work of this section. 

1.5 Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of air conditioning 

units; not work of this section. 


1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including dimensions, ratings, 

electrical characteristics, weight, capacities, materials of construction, and installation 

instructions. Submit manufacturer's assembly-type drawings showing all piping and electrical 

connections and all mounting requirements. Show methods of fastening and assembly of 

components. Provide wiring diagrams. 

Water-to-air heat pump unit 

Vibration control 

Geothermal Loopfield Calculations and Piping 

1.6.2 O&M Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists. Include 

these data, product data, and a copy of approval submittals in O&M manual. 

2 PRODUCTS 


2.1.1 Test and rate units in accordance with ARI Standard 240 and provide certified rating seal. 

2.1.2 Construct refrigeration system in accordance with ASHRAE 15 (ANSI B 9.1) "Safety Code for 

Mechanical Refrigeration". 

2.1.3 Provide units that are designed, manufactured, tested, and listed in accordance with UL 

requirements. 

2.1.4 Provide units with an SEER that meet the requirements of the Florida Energy Efficiency Code 

and the schedules on the drawings. 

2.1.5 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide units by 

Addison, Florida Heat Pump, Water Furnace, or approved equal. 

2.2 GENERAL ½ TO 6 TON UNITS: Units shall be performance certified to ISO standard 13256-1 

for Water Loop Heat Pump, Ground Water Heat Pump and Ground Loop Heat Pump 

applications. Units intended for use on ground loop applications shall have an optional 

extended range package installed. Units shall be Underwriter Laboratories (UL and cUL) listed 

for safety on all models. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. Each unit shall be pallet 

mounted and stretch wrapped. The units shall be manufactured in an ISO9001:2000 certified 

WATER-TO-AIR HEAT PUMPS 23 81 46 - 1/4




facility. The units shall be designed to operate with entering fluid temperatures between 50˚F 

(10˚C) and 100˚F (38˚C) in cooling and between 50˚F (10˚C) and 80˚F (27˚C) in heating. With 

the optional factory installed extended range package units shall operate with entering fluid 

temperatures between 50˚F (10˚C) and 110˚F (43.3˚C) in cooling and between 25˚F (-3.9˚C) 

and 80˚F (27˚C) in heating. 

2.2.1 Casing & Cabinet: The cabinet shall be fabricated from heavy-gauge steel finished with 

Galvalume® plus, an aluminum-zinc alloy with a clear acrylic coating for additional corrosion 

protection. The interior shall be insulated with ½” (12.7mm) thick, multi density, coated, glass 

fiber. All units shall allow sufficient service access to replace the compressor without unit 

removal. One blower and two compressor compartment access panels shall be removable 

with supply and return ductwork in place. A duct collar shall be provided on the supply air 

opening. Units shall have a 2 inch thick throwaway 30% efficiency pleated filter. The filter rack 

shall incorporate a 1 inch duct flange and filter door removable without the use of tools. The 

units shall have an insulated divider panel between the air handling section and the 

compressor section to minimize the transmission of compressor noise, and to permit service 

testing without air bypass. Units shall have a stainless steel condensate drain pan. Units 

shall have a floating base pan consisting of a ½” (12 mm) thick high density rubber pad 

between the compressor/condenser base plate and the unit base pan. 

2.2.2 Refrigeration Circuits: Units shall utilize refrigerant R-410A. All units shall contain a sealed 

refrigerant circuit including a hermetic compressor, capillary tube metering device with strainer 

or balance port expansion valve, refrigerant drier, finned tube air-to-refrigerant heat 

exchanger, refrigerant reversing valve and service ports. Compressor shall be high efficiency, 

designed for heat pump duty, internally spring isolated (if reciprocating type) for maximum 

sound attenuation and mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Compressor motors shall be 

equipped with overload protection. Refrigerant reversing valves shall be pilot operated sliding 

piston type with replaceable encapsulated magnetic coils energized only during the cooling 

cycle. The finned tube coil shall be constructed of lanced aluminum fins not exceeding 

fourteen fins per inch bonded to rifled copper tubes in a staggered pattern not less than three 

rows deep and have a 600 psig (4140 Kpa) working pressure. The coil shall have aluminum 

end sheets. The coaxial water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger shall be constructed of a 

convoluted copper (optional cupronickel) inner tube and steel outer tube with a designed 

refrigerant working pressure of 600 psig (4140 Kpa) and designed water side working pressure 

of no less than 400 PSIG (2750 Kpa). 

2.2.3 Extended Range Package: An optional extended range package shall include a bi-flow 

balanced port expansion valve metering device in place of capillary tubes and insulated water 

to refrigerant heat exchanger. 

2.2.4 Fan Motor & Assembly: The fan shall be direct drive centrifugal forward curved type with a 

dynamically balanced wheel. The housing and wheel shall be designed for quiet low velocity 

operation. The fan housing shall be removable from the unit without disconnecting the supply 

air ductwork for servicing of the fan motor. The fan motor shall be three speed PSC type for 

direct drive units and single speed for belt drive units. The motor shall be permanently 

lubricated and have thermal overload protection. 

2.2.5 Electrical: Controls and safety devices will be factory wired and mounted within the unit. 

Controls shall include fan relay, compressor contactor, 24V transformer, reversing valve coil 

and solid state lockout controller (UPM) The UPM controller shall include the following 

features: Anti-short cycle time delay, random start, brown out/surge/power interruption 

protection, 120 second low pressure switch bypass timer, shutdown on high or low refrigerant 

pressure safety switch inputs, shutdown for the optional freezestat or high level condensate 

sensors, 24 VAC alarm output for remote fault indication, unit reset at thermostat or 

disconnect, ability to defeat time delays for servicing and automatic intelligent reset. The UPM 

shall automatically reset after a safety shut down and restart the unit, if the cause of the shut 





down no longer exists, after the anti-short cycle and random start timers expire. Should a fault 

re-occur within 60 minutes after reset, then a permanent lockout will occur. A light emitting 

diode (LED) shall annunciate the following alarms: high refrigerant pressure, low refrigerant 

pressure, low water temperature and a high level of condensate in the drain pan (when 

equipped with the optional low water temperature and high level condensate sensors). The 

LED will display each fault condition as soon as the fault occurs. If a permanent lockout 

occurs, then the fault LED will display the type of fault until the unit is reset. Safety devices 

include a low pressure cutout set a 40 PSIG (280kPa) for loss of charge protection (freezestat 

and/or high discharge gas temperature sensor is not acceptable) and a high pressure cutout 

control set at 600 PSIG (4125 Kpa). An optional energy management relay that allows unit 

control by an external source shall be factory installed. A terminal block with screw terminals 

shall be provided for control wiring. 

2.2.6 Piping: Supply, return water and condensate drain connections shall be brass female pipe 

thread fittings and mounted flush to cabinet exterior with stainless steel, Braided hose kit with 

swivel connectors. 

2.2.7 Hot Gas Reheat: Provide factory hot gas reheat coil for humidity control. 

2.3 Controls: Room thermostat shall be low voltage, remote-mounted with sub-base and 

thermometer for controlling heating and cooling cycles. The fan selector shall include "AUTO- 

ON" controls. Provide automatic changeover thermostats with fan that run continuously during 

occupied mode. The room thermostats shall be manually adjustable by occupants and shall 

indicate setting and temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. Provide humidity sensor and set point 

control for hot gas reheat coil. 

2.4 GEOTHERMAL LOOPFIELD: The contractor shall design the geothermal loop field and 

provide a thermal performance guarantee. The contractor shall submit a list of 10 projects of 

equal or larger size. Loop field piping shall be HDPE with thermally fused joints. Pipe shall 

comply with ASTM D3035, ASTM D2683 for socket fusion fittings, and ASTM D3261 for 

butt/saddle fusion fittings. Pipe shall be pressure tested at pressure recommended by 

manufacturer. Test shall be witnessed by the engineer or owner’s representative. Provide 50 

year warranty on pipe and loop assemblies. 

3 EXECUTION 

3.1 Installation: Install in accordance with producer's printed instructions. Anchor housing to 

building with cadmium plated self-tapping screws, lag screws, or bolts, as directed by specific 

construction. All mounting supports shall be provided by Division 23. Provide painted sheet 

metal cover to protect unit from dripping from above. 

3.2 Cleaning: Clean tar and all other soil from housing exterior. Leave ready for Division 7, 

Caulking Work. Coordinate with general construction to ensure a water-tight seal. 

3.3 Condensate Drain: Pipe trapped copper condensate drain to the point of disposal as shown 

on the drawings. Pipe shall be full size of unit outlet. Refer to Division 23 section "Insulation" 

for pipe insulation. 

3.4 Startup: Check entire assembly for correctness of installation, alignment, and control 

sequencing. Start all component parts in proper sequence. Make all adjustments required to 

insure proper smooth quiet operation. 










Rosemary Beach, Fl. 

SECTION 26 05 00 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

The Electrical General Requirements are supplementing and applicable to Division 26 

Sections and shall apply to all phases of work specified herein, shown on the 

Drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems. Section 

26 is sub-divided for convenience only. 


1. Job Conditions 

2. Regulatory Requirements 

3. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 

4. Submittals, Operating and Maintenance instructions and As-built drawings. 

5. Common electrical installation requirements. 

6. Warranty of work. 

1.2 JOB CONDITIONS: 

A. SITE INSPECTIONS: Before submitting proposals, each bidder should visit the site and 

fully familiarize himself with all job conditions and shall be fully informed as to the extent 

of his work. No consideration will be given after bid opening date for alleged 

misunderstanding as to the requirements of work involved in connecting to the utilities or 

as to requirements of materials to be furnished. The contractor shall contact the utility 

prior to bid and make appropriate provisions in such bid as required by the utility for the 

utility’s routing and connection. 

B. EXISTING CONDITIONS: All utilities, existing system and conditions shown on the plans 

as existing are approximate, and the Contractor shall verify before any work is started. 

C. SCHEDULED INTERRUPTIONS: Planned interruptions of utilities service, to any facility 

affected by this contract, shall be carefully planned and approved by Architect at least 

ten (10) days in advance of the requested interruption. The Contractor shall not interrupt 

services until the Architect has granted specific approval. The request shall indicate 

services to be affected, date and time of interruption and duration of outage. Request 

for interruption of service will not be approved until all equipment and materials required 

for the completion of that particular phase of work are on the job site. The work may 

have to be scheduled after normal working hours. 

D. ACCIDENTAL INTERRUPTIONS: All excavation and/or remodeling work required shall 

be performed with care so as not to interrupt other existing services (water, gas, 

electrical, sewer, sprinklers, etc.). If accidental utility interruption resulting from work 

performed by the Contractor occurs, service shall be immediately restored to its original 

condition without delay, by and at the expense of the Contractor, using skilled workmen 

of the trade required. 

ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00 - 1/8




E. MAINTAINING SERVICE: Any existing service (or operating system) which must be 

interrupted for any length of time shall be supplied with a temporary service if 

necessary for continuation of the normal operation of this facility. 

Any existing system or part of an existing system currently in operation shall remain so 

after all additions or renovations are made and all work is completed. 

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: 

A. PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS: This Contractor shall secure and pay for all 

permits, and inspections required on work performed under this section of the 

Specifications. He shall assume full responsibility for all assessments and taxes 

necessary for the completion and acceptance of the work. 

B. APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES: The electrical installation shall comply with 

all applicable building codes; local, state, and federal ordinances; and the 2008 edition of 

the National Electrical Code. In case of a discrepancy among these applicable 

regulatory codes and ordinances, the most stringent requirement shall govern. The 

Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing of any such discrepancy. Should the 

Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the applicable regulatory codes 

and ordinances he shall bear all cost arising in correcting the deficiencies. Application 

standards and codes shall include all local ordinances, all state laws, and the applicable 

requirements of the following: 

1. American National Standards Institute - ANSI 

2. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association - NEMA 

3. National Fire Protection Association – NFPA (latest editions) 

4. The Life Safety Code – NFPA 101, as adopted in Florida Edition 

5. The National Fire Alarm Code – NFPA 72, as adopted in Florida Edition 

6. Florida Building Code, latest Edition 

7. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. – UL 

C. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The drawings and these specifications are 

complementary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if 

called for by both. Omissions from the drawings and specifications of details of work 

which are evidently necessary to carry out the intent of the drawings and specifications, 

or which are customarily performed, shall not relieve the Contractor from performing 

such work. In any case of discrepancy in the figures or catalog numbers, the matter 

shall be submitted to the Architect, who shall promptly make a determination in writing. 

Any adjustment by the Contractor shall be at the Contractor's own risk and expense. 

Electrical drawings are diagrammatic only. Do not scale these drawings. All equipment 

shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and any 

conflicting data shall be verified before bidding. 

D. The Contractor shall after completion of the work, furnish the Architect a certificate of 

final inspection and approval from the applicable local inspection department. Make 

necessary changes to plans and specifications to meet code standards at no additional 

cost to the Owner. 





1.4 COOPERATION: 

A. INTERFACING WITH OTHER CRAFTS: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to 

cooperate and coordinate with all other crafts working on this project. This Contractor 

shall do all cutting, trenching, backfill and structural removals to permit entry of the 

electrical system components. The General Contractor shall do all patching and 

finishing. 

B. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS: This Contractor shall furnish 

and install, complete electrical roughing-in and connections to all equipment furnished 

under other sections and indicate on drawings. This includes all outlets as shown on 

mechanical and electrical drawings. All such equipment shall be set in place as work of 

other sections. 

C. HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING: 

1. The Contractor shall furnish all branch circuit wiring to motors and control panels or 

centers including disconnects, receptacles, switches, and appurtenances to which 

the system at the units may be connected, to provide a complete system of wiring 

for power. Control equipment and control circuit wiring is specified in the 

Mechanical Section. 

2. Control devices to be included in the branch circuit, except those furnished integral 

with the equipment, will be delivered by the Heating and Air Conditioning 

Contractor and installed by the Electrical Contractor. 

1.5 WORKMANSHIP: All work shall be executed in a neat and substantial manner by 

skilled workman, well qualified, and regularly engaged in the type of work required. 

Substandard work shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the 

Owner. 

1.6 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: 

A. PRIOR-SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall base his proposal on the materials 

specified herein and on the drawings. Reference to a particular product by 

manufacturer, trade name, or catalog number establishes the quality standards of 

material and equipment required for this installation and is not intended to exclude 

products equal in quality and similar design. The Architect reserves the sole right to 

decide the equality of materials proposed for use in lieu of these specified. It shall be 

the Contractor's responsibility to furnish the information and data sufficient to establish 

the quality and utility of the items in question, including furnishing of samples if required. 

B. SUBMITTALS: 

1. Submittals: The Contractor shall submit a list of equipment proposed for 

installation. He shall submit catalog data and shop drawings on all proposed 

systems and their components. Where substitutions alter the design or space 

requirements, the Contractor shall defray all items of cost for the revised design 

and construction including costs to all allied trades involved. Provide six (6) copies 

of submittals and shop drawings as a minimum unless the General Conditions 

requires a greater number of copies. 





a. Submittals Schedule: Submittals shall be submitted within thirty (30) days 

after the contract is awarded. It is not the responsibility of the Engineer to 

expedite the review of submittals if the contractor has not adequately 

prepared the submittals in a time efficient manner. The contractor bears all 

the responsibility for the added time requirements of resubmittals. 

b. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for 

identification. Each major section of submittals such as power equipment, 

lighting equipment, fire alarm, etc., shall be secured in a booklet or stapled 

with a covering index which lists the following information: 

1) Project name and date 

2) Name, address, and phone number of General contractor and project 

manager. 

3) Name, address, and phone number of Sub-contractor and project 

manager. 

4) Supplier of equipment with phone number and person responsible for 

this project. 

5) Index of each item covered in submittal and model number. 

6) Any deviation from contract documents shall be specifically noted on 

submittal cover index and specifically identified with highlighting, 

encircling, or boldly on specific submittal sheet. 

c. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as 

initial submittal. 

1) Include previous submittal review comments. 

2) For each item being resubmitted, include previous review comment 

and explain how resubmitted item meets the criteria of the previous 

review comment. 

2. Electrical and Mechanical/Plumbing/Fire Protection Equipment Coordinations: 

The electrical power equipment submittals shall be accompanied by a 

letter verifying coordination of electrical services for all mechanical, 

plumbing, and fire protection equipment requiring power. The letter shall 

follow the format listed below. 

To: ________________________________ 

(General Contractor) 

Re: ________________________________ 

(Project name and location) 

We the undersigned subcontractors certify that we have coordinated the 

electrical requirements for mechanical, plumbing, and fire protection 

sprinkler equipment as evidenced by the coordination chart listed herein. 





Item 

Load 

Full Load 

Amps 

1 Phase 

or 

3 Phase 

Number of 

Electrical 

Connections 

Maximum 

Overcurrent 

Protection 

Minimum 

Overcurrent 

Protection 

Breaker 

Proposed 

Circuit 

Proposed 

The above list details all required electrical connections for mechanical 

equipment. 

Signed: _______________________ 

For: __________________________ 

Mechanical Subcontractor 

The above list details all required electrical connections for plumbing 

equipment. 

Signed: _______________________ 

For: __________________________ 

Plumbing Subcontractor 

The above list details all required electrical and fire alarm connections for 

fire protection equipment. 

Signed: _______________________ 

For: __________________________ 

Fire Protection Sprinkler Subcontractor 

The above list of equipment has been reviewed and the required 

connections are being provided. (Any exceptions or request for direction 

shall be listed here) 

Signed: ________________________ 

For: ___________________________ 

Electrical Subcontractor 

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. PROTECTION: Take necessary precautions to protect all material, equipment, 

apparatus and work from damage. Failure to do so to the satisfaction of the Architect 

will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the material, equipment or work in question. 

Contractor is responsible for the safety and good condition of the materials installed until 

final acceptance by the owner. 





B. CLEANING: Conduit openings shall be capped or plugged during installation. Fixtures 

and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, moisture, chemical 

and mechanical injury. At the completion of the work the fixtures, material and 

equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in condition satisfactory to the 

Architect. 

1.8 TESTING AND BALANCING: Make tests that may be required by the Owner or the 

Architect in connection with the operation of the electrical system in the buildings. 

Balance all single-phase loads connected to all panelboards in the buildings to insure 

approximate equal divisions of these loads on the main secondary power supply serving 

the buildings. All tests shall be made in accordance with the latest standards of the 

IEEE and the NEC. The installation shall be tested for performance, grounds and 

insulation resistance. A "megger" type instrument shall be used. Contractor shall 

perform circuit continuity and operational tests on all equipment furnished or connected 

by Contractor. The tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect or his 

representative. The Contractor shall notify the Architect at least twenty-four (24) hours 

in advance of tests. The Contractor shall provide all testing equipment and all costs 

shall be borne by him. Written reports shall be made of all tests. All faults shall be 

corrected immediately. 

A letter shall be written giving the following: 

A. Measured amps on each phase of each panel. 

B. Resistance to ground of each new grounding electrode. 

C. Measured voltage phase to phase and phase to neutral at each panel. 

D. Ground continuity and polarity instrument used. 

1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS/AS BUILT DRAWINGS: 

A. Four (4) complete sets of instructions containing the manufacturer’s operating and 

maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment shall be furnished to the Owner. 

Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a hard cover. One complete set 

shall be furnished at the time that the test procedure is submitted, and remaining sets 

shall be furnished before the Contract is completed. Flysheets shall be placed before 

instructions covering each subject. The instruction sheets shall be approximately 8-1/2” 

by 11” with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The instructions shall include information 

for major pieces of equipment and systems. 

B. Upon completion of the work and at the time designated, the services of one project 

engineer shall be provided by the Contractor to instruct the representative of the Owner 

in the operation and maintenance of the systems. 

C. This Contractor shall provide as-built Drawings at the completion of the job. Drawings 

shall show all significant changes in equipment, wiring, routing, location, etc. All 

underground conduit routing shall be accurately indicated with locations dimensioned. 

1.10 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE: Upon completion of all tests and acceptance, the 

Contractor shall furnish the Owner a written guarantee covering the electrical work done 





for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. Guarantee includes equipment 

capacity and performance ratings specified without excessive noise levels. Upon notice 

from the Architect or the Owner, the Contractor shall, during the guarantee period, rectify 

and replace any defective material or workmanship and repair any damage caused 

thereby without additional cost. 



3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1. 

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to 

center of unit for wall-mounting items. 

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not 

indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum 

possible headroom consistent with these requirements. 

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of 

components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in 

such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other 

items in the vicinity. 

E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 











SECTION 26 05 19 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND 

CABLES (600 VOLTS OR LESS) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, 

and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 


A. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 

and marked for intended use. 

B. Comply with NFPA 70. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following 

requirements apply for product selection: 

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 

the manufacturers specified. 

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 


1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 

2. General Cable Corporation. 

3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 

4. Southwire Company. 

5. Okonite 

B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable 

construction, and ratings. 

C. Conductor Material: Copper. Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded 

for No. 8 AWG and larger. 

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1/4




D. Conductor Insulation Types: THHN-THWN and SO. 

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 

A. Manufacturers:AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

1. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 

2. Hubbell/Anderson. 

3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 

4. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. 

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, 

material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 

C. Connections from boxes to lay-in fixtures in grid ceiling may be made with MC (metal 

clad) cable cut to minimum length. 


3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS 

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single 

conductors in raceway. 

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces and 

Chases: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces and Chases: Type THHN-THWN, 

single conductors in raceway. 

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, 

single conductors in raceway. 

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN- 

THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

H. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in 

raceway. 

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord. 

J. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 

K. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 

L. Class 2 Control Circuits: Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes. 






A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; 

compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed 

manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, 

that will not damage cables or raceway. 

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural 

members, and follow surface contours where possible. 

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and 

Methods." 

F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 26 Section 

"Firestop Systems and Sleeves." 

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section “ 

Electrical Identification.” 

H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess 

equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced 

conductors. 

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. 

I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of 

slack. 


A. Testing: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in 

NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. 

B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 

1. Test procedures used. 

2. Test results that comply with requirements. 

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to 

achieve compliance with requirements. 











SECTION 26 05 23 – FIRESTOP SYSTEMS AND SLEEVES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Through penetration firestop systems. 

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 

3. Sleeve seals. 


A. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following 

ratings determined per UL 1479: 

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings 

indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of 

constructions penetrated. 

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration 

firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems 

protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in 

occupiable floor areas: 

a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 

b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. 

3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in 

smoke barriers, provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not 

more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft (0.01524cu. m/s x sq. m) at both ambient temperatures 

and 400 deg F (204 deg C) . 

B. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and 

physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed 

to these conditions both during and after construction. 

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flamespread 

and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as 

determined per ASTM E 84. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 

4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." 

FIRESTOP SYSTEMS AND SLEEVES 26 05 23 - 1/6




B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems 

and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that 

comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance 

Requirements" Article: 

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A 

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing 

testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing 

standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide 

rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting 

agency. 

D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that throughpenetration 

firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. 

E. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become 

concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by 

building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 



A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the throughpenetration 

firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of 

the following manufacturers: 

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 

2. Hilti, Inc. 

3. Nelson Firestop Products. 

4. NUCO Inc. 

5. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 

6. Specified Technologies Inc. 

7. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 

8. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 

2.2 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with 

one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, 

penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and 

application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer 

based on testing and field experience. 





B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that 

are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance 

Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop 

system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for 

firestop systems indicated. 

2.3 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES 

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized 

steel, plain ends. 

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron 

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of 

firestopping. 

2.4 SLEEVE SEALS 

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space 

between sleeve and raceway or cable. 

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or 

conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or 

cable. 

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of 

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for 

each sealing element. 


3.1 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 

"Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written 

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to 

support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce 

cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible 

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components 

of firestop systems. 

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following 

results: 





1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and 

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings 

and penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce 

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 

D. Identification: Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or 

plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches 

(150 mm) of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone 

seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for 

metal labels. Include the following information on labels: 

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. 

Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and 

inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 

6. Installer's name. 


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage an independent inspecting agency to inspect 

through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with 

ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting 

inspections, and preparing test reports. 

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems 

so they comply with requirements. 

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction 

only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with 

requirements. 

3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or 

busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and 

wall assemblies. 

B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of 

firestopping. 

C. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or 

formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. 





D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall 

assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated 

during construction of floor or wall. 

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. 

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve 

and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and 

with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. 

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space 

between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, 

and location of joint. 

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, 

ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal 

raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. 

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with 

flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and 

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear 

space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves 

to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve 

for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 











SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 



B. Field quality-control test reports. 





B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 


2.1 CONDUCTORS 

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise 

required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) 

in diameter. 

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper 

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated 

with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1/4




2.2 CONNECTORS 

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, 

sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. 

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressuretype, 

with at least two bolts. 

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. 

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit 

manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES 

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch in diameter by 16 feet long 

(19 mm by 3 m) . 


3.1 APPLICATIONS 

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded 

conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install insulated copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG 

minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow 

stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to 

normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three 

bands of green and two bands of yellow. 

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as 


3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to 

those required by NFPA 70: 





1. Feeders and branch circuits. 

2. Lighting circuits. 

3. Receptacle circuits. 

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

6. Flexible raceway runs. 

7. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated 

equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area 

power panels and power-distribution units. 

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted 

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, 

heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to 

each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. 

C. Water Heater and Heat-Tracing Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment 

grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond 

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 

D. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a 

branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a 

nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters 

enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate 

conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at 

equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, 


E. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and 

other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding 

conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, 

terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 

1. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding 

terminal. 

F. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a 

separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor 

installed with branch-circuit conductors. 


A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless 

otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing 

conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final 

grade, unless otherwise indicated. 





1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as 

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging 

coating, if any. 

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least two rods spaced at least one-rod 

length from each other and located at least the same distance from other 

grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. 

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and 

maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to 

penetrate any adjacent parts. 

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: 

Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type 

connection is required, use a bolted clamp. 

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: Provide grounding for all new metal pipes. 

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors 

of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to 

bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. 


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing new grounding electrode systems but before permanent electrical 

circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum groundresistance 

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, 

and at ground test wells. 

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of 

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than 

natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other 

artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. 

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 5 ohms. 






SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical 

wiring. 

B. See Division 26 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping 

materials and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated 

elements. 

C. See Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, 

anchors, and identification products. 

D. See Division 26 Section “Electrical Supports” for bracing of raceways, boxes, 

enclosures, and cabinets. 

E. See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floorbox 

service fittings. 


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover 

enclosures, and cabinets indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, 

fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 








A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following 

requirements apply for product selection: 

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1/8







2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

2. Alflex Inc. 

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 

4. Electri-Flex Co. 

5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 

6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 

7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 

8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

9. Wheatland Tube Co. 

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. 

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. 

E. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 

1. Fittings: Steel, Set-screw or compression type. Not die-cast. 

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 

G. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING 


1. American International. 

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 

3. Arnco Corp. 

4. Cantex Inc. 

5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 

6. Condux International. 

7. ElecSYS, Inc. 

8. Electri-Flex Co. 

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 

10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 

11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 

12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

13. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 





B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC. 

C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS 


1. Hoffman. 

2. Square D. 

B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated. 

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, 

adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with 

wireways as required for complete system. 

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and 

to comply with NFPA 70. 

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type. 

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 

2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 

4. Hoffman. 

5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 

6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 

8. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

9. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. 

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes (where specified): NEMA OS 2. 

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

F. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. 

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush 

latch. 





1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard 

enamel. 

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant 

paint. 

H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and 

removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged 

door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match 

panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage 

and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 

2.6 FACTORY FINISHES 

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's 

standard paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and 

cabinets before shipping. 


3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION 

A. Outdoors: 

1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC. 

2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC. 

3. Underground, Single Run: SCH 40 PVC. 

4. Underground, Grouped: SCH 40 PVC. 

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, 

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

B. Indoors: 

1. Exposed: IMC – wet locations; EMT – dry locations 

2. Concealed: EMT. 

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, 

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use 

LFMC in damp or wet locations or where exposed to view (not concealed). 

4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: 

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic are permitted. 

6. Flexible metal conduit: Where applications are not concealed by the building 

construction, liquid tight flexible conduit and grounding type fittings shall be used 

and system shall be fully bonded. 

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size (DN 16), except underground shall be ¾” 

minimum. 





D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless 


2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use 

with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing 

conduits. 


A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam 

or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. 

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Supports." 

D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. 

E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so 

curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. 

F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in same plane and 

keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in shortest practical 

distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless 


H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical 

and leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover. 

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during 

concrete placement. 

2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 

3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN 27) parallel or at right angles to 

main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close 

to slab support. 

4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel 

conduit, or IMC before rising above floor, except PVC branch circuits may rise 

concealed in walls to first box maximum 48” AFF. 

I. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural 

members and follow surface contours as much as possible. 

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 





2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where 

elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel 

raceways. 

J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints 

tight. 

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. 

K. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. 

L. Terminations: 

1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to 

enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two 

locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings 

tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase 

nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase 

nipple so no threads are exposed. 

M. Install pull cords in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line 

with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of 

slack at each end of pull cord. 

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill 

them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in 

a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent 

plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of 

refrigerated spaces. 

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 

O. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to 

freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for 

plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel 

conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriveroperated, 

threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. 

P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for 

recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise 

transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations or 

where exposed to view (not concealed). Install separate ground conductor across 

flexible connections. 

Q. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from 

junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. 

R. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. 






A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and 

cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by 

manufacturer. 

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating 

recommended by manufacturer. 











SECTION 26 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 

2. Warning labels and signs. 

3. Equipment identification labels. 


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 


A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with 

requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring 

diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by 

codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout 

Project. 


2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION 

MATERIALS 

A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit 

identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 

2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS 

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive 

adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to 

equipment, unless otherwise indicated. 

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1/4




C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for 

fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) 

grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm) . 

D. Fasteners for Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine 

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - 

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN 

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 

INCHES (915 mm) ." 

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS 

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by 

thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 

mm) . Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label. 

B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, 

with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch 

(10 mm) . 


3.1 APPLICATION 

A. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to 

identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and 

data wiring connections. 

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, 

terminals, and cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 

2. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by 

manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 

B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: 

Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify 

system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, 

cover, or other access. 

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of 

equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 

a. Power transfer switches. 

b. Controls with external control power connections. 





2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless 

otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush 

panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. 

C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation 

label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and 

Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, 

central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of 

each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, 

monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 

1. Labeling Instructions: 

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine 

label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2- 

inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 

lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. 

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled 

for screw attachment. 

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those 

appropriate for viewing from the floor. 

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: 

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 

b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. 

c. Disconnect switches. 

d. Enclosed circuit breakers. 

e. Motor starters. 

f. Push-button stations. 

g. Power transfer equipment. 

h. Contactors. 


A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. 

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient 

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. 

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using 

materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. 

E. Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware 

appropriate to the location and substrate. 

F. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the 

colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 





1. Color shall be factory applied. 

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: (unless existing color code is different) 

a. Phase A: Black. 

b. Phase B: Red. 

c. Phase C: Blue. 

d. Neutral: White. 






SECTION 26 09 33 - CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS 

PART 1– GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Central dimming control systems. 


1. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices 

2. Section 265100 - Interior Lighting 

1.2 REFERENCES 

A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 

(ANSI/IEEE) 

1. C62.41-1991 – Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC 

Power Circuits. 

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) 

1. D4674 -02a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of 

Plastics Exposed to Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight. 

C. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 

1. 9001:2000 – Quality Management Systems. 

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 

1. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) (www.ul.com): 

1. 489 (2002) - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit- 

Breaker Enclosures. 

2. 508 (1999) - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 

3. 1472 (1996) - Solid-State Dimming Controls. 

4. 924 (2003) - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Central dimming control system 

1. Factory assembled dimming and switching panels and interfaces and modules. 

2. Low voltage wall stations and control interfaces and sensors. 

3. Solid-state high frequency fluorescent dimming ballasts. 


A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. 

CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS 26 09 23 - 1/12




B. Specification Conformance Document: Indicate whether the submitted equipment 

either: 

1. Meets specification exactly as stated. 

2. Meets specification via an alternate means and indicate the specific methodology 

used. 

C. Shop Drawings; include: 

1. Load schedule indicating actual connected load, load type, and voltage per circuit, 

circuits and their respective control zones, circuits that are on emergency, and 

capacity, phase, and corresponding circuit numbers. 

2. Schematic of system. 

D. Product Data: Catalog cut sheets with performance specifications demonstrating 

compliance with specified requirements. 


A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of architectural lighting 

controls. 

B. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standard, 

including in-house engineering for product design activities. 

C. Central dimming control system: 

1. Listed by UL specifically for the required loads. Provide evidence of compliance 

upon request. 


A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to 

receive equipment: 

1. Ambient temperature: 0 degrees to 40 degrees C (32 degrees to 104 degrees F). 

2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing. 

3. Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Provide Manufacturer’s Warranty: 

1. Standard 2-year warranty, Includes: 

a. 100 Percent Replacement Parts for Manufacturer Lighting System 

Components 

b. 100 Percent Manufacturer Labor Coverage to Troubleshoot and Diagnose a 

Lighting Issue 

c. First–Available Onsite or Remote Response Time 

d. 24 Hours Per Day, 7 Days Per Week Telephone Technical Support, 

Excluding Manufacturer Holidays 

e. Remote Diagnostics for Applicable Systems 





1.8 MAINTENANCE 

A. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts 

available to end user. 

B. Make new replacement parts available for minimum of ten years from date of 

manufacture. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. – System: Lutron LCP128 

B. Basis of design product: Lutron LCP128 or subject to compliance and prior approval 

with specified requirements of this section, one of the following: 

1. Lutron LCP128 

2. LCD 

3. WattStopper 

4. Cooper 

5. Sensor Switch 

C. Substitutions: 

1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in 

writing for approval by the design professional a minimum of 10 working days prior 

to the bid date and must be made available to all bidders. 

2. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review of the specification noting 

compliance on a line-by-line basis. 

3. By using pre-approved substitutions, the contractor accepts responsibility and 

associated costs for all required modifications to circuitry, devices, and wiring. 

4. Provide complete engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with 

deviations for the original design highlighted in an alternate color to the engineer 

for review and approval prior to rough-in. 

2.2 GENERAL 

A. Provide hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted by a single 

manufacturer. 

B. Architectural Lighting Controls: Ten-year operational life while operating continually at 

any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 0 degrees C (32 degrees F) to 40 

degrees C (104 degrees F) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. 

C. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V without 

impairmentper IEC 801-2. 





2.3 DIMMING / RELAY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the component 

manufacturer's maximum temperature rating when device is under fully-loaded 

conditions in 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) ambient temperature. 

B. Load Handling Thyristors (SCRs and triacs), Field Effect Transistors (FETs), and 

Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs): The component’s maximum current rating 

to be at least two times the dimmer’s/relay’s rated operating current. 

C. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times operating current without 

impacting lifetime of dimmer/relay. 

D. Design and test dimmers/relays to withstand line-side surges without impairment to 

performance. 

1. Panels: Withstand surges without impairment of performance when subjected to 

surges of 6,000 volts, 3,000 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41. 

E. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects “off” at any control to disconnect the 

load from line supply. 

F. Power failure memory and dimmer/relay recovery: 

1. When power is interrupted and subsequently returned, within 3 seconds lights will 

automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or off) prior to power 

interruption. 

G. Dimmers: 

1. Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming line voltage variations 

including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus 2 percent change in RMS 

voltage/cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency/second), 

dynamic harmonics, and line noise. 

2. Systems not providing cycle-by-cycle compensation to include external power 

conditioning equipment as part of dimming system. 

3. Each dimmer to incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that 

smoothly ramps lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds. 

4. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manor. Dimmers with visible 

steps are not acceptable. 

5. Each dimmer to be assigned a load type that will provide a proper dimming curve 

for the specific light source. 

6. Possess ability to have load types assigned per circuit, configured in field. 

7. Minimum and maximum light levels user adjustable on output-by-output basis. 

8. Line Voltage Dimmers; Meet following load-specific requirements: 

a. Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) transformer: 

1) Contain circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC 

waveform to input of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472, 

Section 5.11. 

2) Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or SCRs) 

to include DC current protection in the event of a single device failure. 





b. Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) transformer: 

1) Dimmer to operate electronic low voltage transformers via reverse 

phase control. Alternately, forward phase control dimming may be 

used if dimming equipment manufacturer has recommended specific 

ELV transformers being provided. 

c. Neon and cold cathode transformers: 

1) Magnetic transformers: UL listed for use with normal (low) power factor 

magnetic transformers.Electronic transformers: Must be supported by 

the ballast equipment manufacturer for control of specific ballasts 

being provided. 

d. Fluorescent electronic dimming ballast: Refer to Section 265113 for dimming 

ballast specifications and performance. 

9. Low Voltage Dimming Modules; Meet following requirements: 

a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay: 

Capable of being electronically linked to single zone. 

b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light 

sources: 

1) 0-10V analog voltage signal. 

a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 

60929. 

b) Sink current via IEC 60929. 

c) Source current. 

2) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal. 

3) DSI digital communication. 

4) DALI broadcast communication IEC 60929: 

a) Logarithmic intensity values in compliance with IEC 60929. 

b) Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control. 

5) PWM IEC 60929. 

H. Non-dim circuits to meet the following requirements: 

1. Rated life of relay at full load: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles. 

2. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power 

is applied to and removed from load circuits. 

3. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads. 

2.4 POWER PANELS 

A. Product: LCP128 Standard Series. 

B. Mechanical: 

1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment. CSA certified, or NOM approved 

as applicable. 

2. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel. 

3. Field wiring accessible from front of panel without need to remove dimmer 

assemblies or other components. 

4. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. 

5. Ship panels with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper 

bar inserted between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load 

current and be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for 





switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit 

breaker. 

C. Electrical: 

1. Panels contain branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a 

dedicated feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings. 

2. Branch circuit breakers; meet following performance requirements: 

a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits. 

b. Contain visual trip indicator; rated at 10,000 AIC, 120 V Dimming. 

c. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and overtemperature 

protection. Use of breakers without thermal protection requires 

dimmers/relays to have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when 

overloaded or ambient temperature is above rating of panel. 

d. Accept tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in off position 

when servicing loads. 

e. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other 

components in panel. UL listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be 

switched on and off by breakers. 

3. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 25,000A. 

D. Lutron LCP128 Panel: 

1. Surface mounted. 

2. Utilize multiple load type 16A feed continuous-use UL listed dimming/switching 

modules. 

3. For switching only circuits, utilize 1,000,000 cycle relay. 

4. Utilize multiple load type low voltage dimming module. 

E. LCD Panel Processor: 

1. Separate password protection for installer and end user system settings. 

2. Language selection: English. 

3. Integral contact closure inputs. 

4. Programming and system operation: 

a. Control stations, control interfaces, and contact closure devices: 

1) Assign functionality of each control station button, infrared interface, 

key switch, or contact closure input: 

a) Raise/lower one, some, or all lighting zones 

b) Raise/stop/lower one, some, or all motorized zones 

c) Toggle one, some, or all lighting zones 

d) Select/Toggle scene 

e) Raise/Lower scene 

f) Enable/Disable time clock 

g) Initiate delay to off 

2) AV rack mounted interface: Ethernet interface. 

3) Contact closure output: Momentary, maintained, or toggle. 

b. Time clock 

1) Integral astronomical time clock 

a) Selectable geographic location (city or latitude/longitude). 

b) Selectable time zone. 

c) Selectable date and time format. 

d) Adjustable starting and ending of daylight savings time. 





e) Schedule adjustable to add, copy, modify, view, and delete 

events. 

2) Assign functionality to time clock events: 

a) Select global scene 

b) Select customized scene 

c) Enable/Disable all control stations (keypads) 

d) Initiate delay to off 

e) Enable/disable after hours mode 

c. Emergency Mode 

1) Automatic activation of predefined output intensities. 

2) Disable control stations and time clock events. 

3) Restore previous output intensities, enable control stations, and enable 

time clock events after deactivation of emergency mode. 

d. After-hours Mode 

1) User defined sequence is initiated by a time clock event to 

automatically turn specified outputs off: 

a) 5 minutes before switching off, system to flash dimmed/switched 

outputs 3 times to warn occupants. 

b) Shut off sequence can be delayed by button press or occupancy 

sensor override for 30 minutes. 

c) Repeat shut off sequence after the delay period. 

e. Global Scene: Set and recall scene programming for multiple wall station 

locations. 

f. Overrides: 

1) Set output levels to On, Off, 0-100 percent, or Flash 

2) Select global scenes 

3) Enable/disable time clock 

4) Enable/disable all control stations 

5) Enable/disable after-hours 

F. Diagnostics and Service: 

1. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of system or processor. 

2. Dimmers/relays: Include diagnostic LED’s to verify proper operation and assist in 

system troubleshooting. 

3. Dimming/relay panels: Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component 

failure that minimizes loss of control for occupant. 

a. If lighting control system fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel 

processor provides local control of lights until system is repaired. 

b. If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can 

be used to turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of 

lights until panel processor is repaired. 

c. If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each 

dimmer to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for 

switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of 

circuit breaker. 





2.5 POWER INTERFACES 

A. Product: PHPM-PA-DV, PHPM-PA-120, PHPM-3F-DV, PHPM-3F-120, PHPM-SW-DV, 

NGRX-PB, GRX-FDBI, ELVI-1000, GRX-TVI, GRX-PWM, HP-2, HP-4, HP-6 as 

specified. 

B. Electrical: 

1. Phase independent of control input. 

2. Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 508. 

C. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming 

of system or processor. 

2.6 LOW-VOLTAGE WALL STATIONS 

A. Product: seeTouch, Single Button, Architectural, European, Slim Button, Large Button, 

Architrave, Key Switch as specified. 

B. Electronics: 

1. Use RS485 wiring for low voltage communication. 

C. Functionality: 

1. Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate. 

2. LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button 

press was properly processed or the LEDs turn off if the button press was not 

processed. 

3. Allow for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. 

4. Replacement of units does not require reprogramming. 

D. Color: 

1. Color selected by architect. 

2. Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light 

sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request. 

E. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware. 

F. Engrave wall stations in English with appropriate button, zone, and scene engraving 

descriptions furnished prior to fabrication. 

G. Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process that chemically 

bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by scratching and cleaning. 

2.7 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES 

A. Contact Closure Interfaces. 

1. The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained 

contact closures. 

2. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or momentary 

outputs. 





B. Contact Closure Input Interface. 

1. The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained 

contact closures. 

C. Contact Closure Output Interface. 

1. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or momentary 

outputs. 

D. Ethernet Interfaces. 

1. Provide ability to communicate by means of user-supplied PC or digital 

audiovisual equipment. 

2. Provide access to: 

a. Scene selections. 

b. Fade dimmed output to a level. 

c. Ability to flash output levels. 

d. Enable/disable time clock. 

e. Enable/disable individual wall station. 

f. Simulate wall station button press. 

g. Fine tuning of light levels with individual output raise/lower. 

h. Setting of time and date. 

3. Provide status monitoring through button feedback and scene-status updates. 

2.8 SENSORS 

A. Ceiling-Mounted Infrared Receiver. 

1. Ceiling-Mounted Infrared Receivers have 360 degree reception of wireless 

infrared remote controls. 

B. Exterior Daylight Sensors: 

1. Calibrated with independent turn-on and turn-off thresholds; minimum 2 footcandles 

difference between the turn-on and turn-off thresholds. 

2. Enclosed in weatherproof housing with shading and lens protection visor. 

C. Infrared Partition Sensor. 

1. Provide contact closure based on status of sensor. 

D. Ceiling and Wall Mount Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors 

1. Sensing mechanism: 

a. Infrared: Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate 

dust and residue build-up. 

b. Ultrasonic: Utilize an operating frequency of 32kHz or 40kHz that shall be 

crystal controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance. 

c. Dual technology: 

1) Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust 

and residue build-up. 

2) Utilize an operating frequency of 32kHz or 40kHz that shall be crystal 

controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance. 

2. Sensors shall turn off or reduce lighting automatically after reasonable time delay 

when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space 





3. Sensor shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work 

hours and habits. 

4. Sensors shall be UL listed (as appropriate) 

5. Sensors shall be fully adaptive and adjust their sensitivity and timing to ensure 

optimal lighting control for any use of the space 

6. Sensors shall have field adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to 

override any adaptive features. 

7. Power failure memory: 

a. Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and 

subsequently restored, settings and learned parameters saved in protected 

memory shall not be lost. 

8. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions. 

9. Sensors shall be Class 2 devices. 

10. Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket for all Ceiling mount sensors. 

11. Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas for all ceiling 

mounted sensors using infrared technology. 

12. Provide swivel mount base for all wall mount sensors. 

13. Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed 

and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control 

options. 

E. Sensor Power Packs 

1. For ease of mounting, installation and future service, power pack(s) shall be able 

to mount through a 1/2" knock-out in a standard electrical enclosure and be an 

integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching 

control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall 

provide power to a minimum of three (3) sensors. 

2. Power pack shall be plenum rated 

3. Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class 2, 18-24 AWG, 

stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for 

use in plenums, where applicable 


A. Tamper Proof Covers: 

1. Locking covers for preset control units and wall stations: Reversible to allow lock 

to be located on either side of control. 

2. Compatible with IR controls. 

3. Does not reduce specified IR range by more than 50 percent of its original 


B. Infrared Transmitters: 

1. Provide wireless remote control. 

2. Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and lighting 

control; compatibility dependent on that receiver, not transmitter. 

3. Operate up to 15 meters (50 feet) within line-of-sight to that receiver. 

4. “Learnable” by other variable frequency remote controls. 






A. Perform full-function testing on 100 percent of all system components and panel 

assemblies at the factory. 



A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

B. Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents. 

C. Define each dimmer's/relay’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control 

functions. 

D. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on drawings. Provide any 

additional equipment required to provide control intent. 

E. Mount daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight. 

3.2 SERVICE AND SUPPORT 

A. Startup and Programming 

1. Provide telephone startup assistance to Electrical Contractor or End User 

Representative (when available, in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. 

Otherwise, onsite startup will be utilized.) 

a. Provides access to a Factory Certified Telephone Startup Technician 

during normal business hours. 

b. Provides telephone instruction and guidance for a complete system 

functional test. 

c. With phone startup completion and End User Registration, the 1-year 

parts-only warranty will be upgraded to the Standard 2-year Warranty. 











SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit 

panelboards. 


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, 

and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on 

features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of 

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: 

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 

b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective 

devices. 

d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. 

e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual 

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

3. Field quality-control test reports. 

4. Operation and maintenance data. 





B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1/4






Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be 


1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and 

Accessories: 

a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 

b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc 

c. Square D 

d. General Electric 

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 

a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

c. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C. 

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, 

match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within 

hinged trim cover. 

B. Phase and Ground Buses: Tin-plated Copper or Aluminum. 

C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material. 

1. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. 

D. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards 

with main service disconnect switches. 

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances 

required for future installation of devices. 

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating: 

1. UL label indicating series-connected rating with integral or remote upstream 

overcurrent protective devices. Include size and type of upstream device 

allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series-connected short-circuit 

rating. 

2. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 





2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 

A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without 

disturbing adjacent units. 

B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault 

currents. 

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level 

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable 

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 

2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip 

sensitivity. 

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, 

trip ratings, and number of poles. 

a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and 

conductor materials. 

b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching 

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for switching high intensity discharge 

lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating 

equipment. 

c. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit. 

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES 

A. Furnish accessory set including tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent 

protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. 

B. Furnish portable test set to test functions of solid-state trip devices without removal 

from panelboard. 



A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. 

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section 

"Electrical Supports." 

C. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise 

indicated. 





D. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with 

fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. 

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers. 

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 

G. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling 

space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) 

empty conduits out below slab to exterior and cap both ends. 

H. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide 

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." 

I. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminatedplastic 

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. 

J. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

K. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." 


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting 

supply, feeder, and control circuit. 

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in 

NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit 

breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 






SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, and integral 

surge suppression units. 

2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches. 

3. Device wall plates. 



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for 

premarking wall plates. 

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 

D. Field quality-control test reports. 








Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be 


1. Wiring Devices: 

a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary. 

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 

c. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1/4




2. Multioutlet Assemblies: 

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 

b. Wiremold Company (The). 

2.2 RECEPTACLES 

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W- 

C-596G, and UL 498. 

B. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade. 

C. Straight-Blade Receptacles: Hospital grade. 

D. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral 

NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and 

UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without 

an adapter. 

2.3 PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES 

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector, NEMA WD 6, 

Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, Heavy-Duty grade. 

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching 

external cable grip. 

2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanizedsteel 

wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision 

designed for corresponding connector. 

2.4 SWITCHES 

A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. 

B. Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type. 

C. Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster 

ears and removable tab connector that permit separate or common feed connection. 

1. Switch: 20 A, 120/277-V ac. 

2. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 

D. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off 

switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. 

1. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching 

to suit connections. 

2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously 

adjustable rotary knob, toggle switch, or slider; single pole with soft tap or other 





quiet switch; EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch (130-mm) wire 

connecting leads. 

3. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; 

trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination 

capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full 

brightness. 

2.5 WALL PLATES 

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth Metal 302/304 stainless steel with satin 

finish. 

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces (not exposed to view): Galvanized steel. 

4. Material for Wet Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and 

listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." 

2.6 FINISHES 

A. Color: 

1. Wiring Devices: Selected by Architect. 



A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines. 

B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging. 

C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers. 

D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension 

vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches 

under single, multigang wall plates. 

E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. 

3.2 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." 





3.3 CONNECTIONS 

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." 


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, 

test every outlet for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with 

requirements. 

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to 


B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 






SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit 

breakers: 

1. Fusible switches. 

2. Nonfusible switches. 

3. Molded-case circuit breakers. 

4. Enclosures. 


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and 

component indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operation and maintenance data. 








A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements 

apply to product selection: 




ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 1/4




2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES 


1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 

2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 

3. Square D/Group Schneider 

4. General Electric 

B. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to 

accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, 

and interlocked with cover in closed position. 

C. Nonfusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with 

capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 

D. Accessories: 

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum 

ground conductors. 

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and 

bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch 

blades open. 

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES 


1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 


3. Square D/Group Schneider 

4. General Electric 

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available 

fault currents. 

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level 

overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable 

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, 

field-adjustable trip setting. 

3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller and letthrough 

ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip 

sensitivity. 

C. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: 

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 





2. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor 

material. 

3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; 

Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable 

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 

5. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 

percent of rated voltage. 

2.4 ENCLOSURES 

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

2. Kitchen and Pool Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 

3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 



A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for 

installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 

B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform 

height, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section 

"Electrical Supports." 

D. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide 

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." 


A. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows: 

1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 

2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 

3. Verify rating of installed fuses. 

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in 

NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit 

breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 





2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 






SECTION 26 43 13 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE 

ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes TVSSs for low-voltage power equipment. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating 

weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 

B. Field quality-control test reports. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Data. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source 

from a single manufacturer. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 



C. Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power 

Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide on Surge Testing 

for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits." 

D. Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices." 

E. Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and UL 1449, "Transient 

Voltage Surge Suppressors." 


A. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the 

following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal 

system operating voltage. 

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C) . 

3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing. 

4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level. 

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 26 43 13 - 1/4 

FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS






Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

1. Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc. 

2. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation. 

3. Intermatic, Inc. 

4. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson. 


6. Square D; Schneider Electric. 

7. Surge Suppression Incorporated. 

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS 

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Non-modular, sine-wave-tracking type with the 

following features and accessories: 

1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 

2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 

3. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 

4. Integral disconnect switch. 

5. Redundant suppression circuits. 

6. Surge-event operations counter. 

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per phase. 

C. Connection Means: Permanently wired. 

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 suppressed voltage rating for grounded wye circuits 

with voltages of 480Y/277 or 208Y/120, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows: 

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 or 400 V for 208Y/120. 

2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 or 400 V for 208Y/120. 

3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 or 400 V for 208Y/120. 

2.3 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS 

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Non-modular, sine-wave-tracking type with the 

following features and accessories: 

1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 

2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 

3. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 

4. Integral disconnect switch. 

5. Redundant suppression circuits. 

6. Surge-event operations counter. 






B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per phase. 

C. Protection modes and UL 1449 suppressed voltage rating for grounded wye circuits 

with voltages of 480Y/277 or 208Y/120, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows: 

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 or 400 V for 208Y/120. 

2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 or 400 V for 208Y/120. 

3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 or 400 V for 208Y/120. 

2.4 ENCLOSURES 

A. NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected. 


3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 

A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service 

entrance ground. 

B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between 

suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed 

manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground. 

1. Provide multipole, 30-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for suppressor, 


3.2 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE 

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment or panelboards to their 

sources until surge protection devices are installed and connected. 


A. Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field 

tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

B. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA 

ATS, "Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify 

compliance with test parameters. 













SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 

2. Emergency lighting units. 

3. Exit signs. 

4. Lighting fixture supports. 

B. See Division 13 Section "Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control 

systems employing low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits. 

C. See Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for 

incandescent lamps. 

D. See Division 16 Section "Central Dimming Controls" for automatic control of lighting, 

including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole 

lighting relays and contactors. 


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture 

designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate 

dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and 

accessories. 

C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled 

fixtures, signed by product manufacturer. 

D. Field quality-control test reports. 



NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 


INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 1/6




PART 2 – PRODUCTS 


A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings 

that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work 

include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 

one of the manufacturers specified. 

3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the 

product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the 

named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers 

specified. 

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed 

fixtures. 

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according 

to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. 

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to 

prevent warping and sagging. 

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage 

under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. 

Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from 

falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. 

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise 

indicated: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. 





G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to 

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is 

indicated. 

b. UV stabilized. 

2.3 BALLASTS 

A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; 

programmed rapid-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and 

quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless 

dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 

1. Sound Rating: A. 

2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 

3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 

4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 

5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 

6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 

7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 

B. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: 

Electronic type. 

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control 

system and lamp type indicated. 

C. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, 

complying with ANSI C 82.12, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. 

Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is 

indicated: 

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 

3. Sound Rating: A. 





4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 

5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 

6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 

7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 

8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 

9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 

10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for 

limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for 

nonconsumer equipment. 

11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. 

D. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 

Electronic type. 

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control 

system and lamp type indicated. 

E. Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, batteryinverter 

unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. 

Comply with UL 924. 

1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp continuously at an output 

of 1100 lumens. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and 

switched circuit to fixture ballast. 

2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening 

fixture or entering ceiling space. 

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal 

power and demonstrates unit operability. 

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates 

trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 

4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power 

transfer relay. 





2.4 EXIT SIGNS 

A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, 

and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 

2.5 LAMPS 

A. Low-Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching 

procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested 

according to NEMA C78.LL. 

B. T8 Rapid-Start low-mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 32 W maximum, nominal 

length 48 inches, 3000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color 

temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 85 (minimum), color 

temperature 4100 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per 

start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 

2. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 

3. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 

2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for 

channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 

B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge. 

C. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed 

stainless steel, 12 gauge. 

D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and 

equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 


A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps 

in each fixture. 





B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. 

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 

1. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod 

for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 

D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper 

operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. 

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications 

indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest 

to demonstrate compliance with standards. 






SECTION 26 56 00 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 

2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 

3. Poles and accessories. 

B. See Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted 

on exterior surfaces of buildings. 


A. Product Data: For each luminaire and support component, arranged in order of 

lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 



NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 

B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 


A. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings 

that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, 

but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 

one of the manufacturers specified. 

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 1/4




3. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its 

support is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with 

requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one 

of the other manufacturers specified. 

2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet 

locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated 

for luminaires. 

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise 

indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. 

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, 

or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. 

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage 

under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. 

Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from 

falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors 

shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast 

when door opens. 

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. 

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, 

exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block 

light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. 

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise 

indicated: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to 

seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. 





L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and - 

tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of 

pole or support materials. 

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Color as selected by Architect. Comply 

with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Color shall be dark bronze and 

white as specified on drawings. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for 

Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating 

finishes. 

2.3 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS 

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without 

reduction average life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-powerfactor 

type. 

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C). 

3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 

4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and 

current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. 

B. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter 

and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. 

Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an 

igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 

1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, 

factory installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul 

sockets up to 150 W. 

a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. 

b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS. 

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F (Minus 40 deg C) . 

2.4 HID LAMPS 

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 92, and color 

temperature 4000 K. 

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 92, and color temperature 4000 K. 





2.5 SUPPORT COMPONENTS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting 

requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible 

with support components. 

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. 

3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. 


3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION 

A. Install lamps in each luminaire. 

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined 

for the application and approved by manufacturer. 

3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION 

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with 

a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. 

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." In 

concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape 

applied with a 50 percent overlap. 






SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Soil treatment with termiticide.. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide 

products. 



B. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following: 

1. Date and time of application. 

2. Moisture content of soil before application. 

3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 

4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 

5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 

6. Areas of application. 

7. Water source for application. 

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having 

jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and 

who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the 

EPA-Registered Label. 


A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do 

not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label 

and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat 

soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction. 

TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 1




1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, 

certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent 

infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during 

warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months'continuing service 

including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a standard 

continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, terms for agreement period, and 

terms for future renewal options. 


2.1 SOIL TREATMENT 

A. Termiticide: Provide an Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction,including the FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE AND CONSUMER 

SERVICES in compliance with Florida Statues, Chapter 487, in an aqueous solution formulated to 

prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the 

maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered 

Label. 

1. Products: As listed on the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services 

website. 

http://www.flaes.org/pdf/termiticidesregisteredinflorida.pdf 

2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than three years 

against infestation of subterranean termites. 


3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL 

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with 

manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 

3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT 

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements 

for[ moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements,] interfaces with earthwork, slab and 

foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite 

control. 





B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

C. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease 

treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously 

compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill 

under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 

1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required 

for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, 

according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and 

vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. 

Distribute treatment evenly. 

1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including 

footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before 

concrete footings and slabs are placed. 

2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; 

along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating 

the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside 

perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 

3. Masonry: Treat voids. 

4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. 

E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. 

F. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported 

slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. 

G. Post warning signs in areas of application. 

H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or 

other construction activities following application.

2013 4 29 ROSEMARY BEACH PROJECT MANUAL.pdf

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?